NEC Express5800 User's Guide

NEC Express5800 Series
N8800-090F, EXP320B
NEC Express5800/320Fa-L
N8800-091F, EXP320A
NEC Express5800/320Fa-LR
User's Guide
N8800-090F, EXP320B
NEC Express5800/320Fa-L
N8800-091F, EXP320A
NEC Express5800/320Fa-LR
User's Guide
2nd Edition
9-2006
856-126408-101-01
PROPRIETARY NOTICE AND LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
The information disclosed in this document, including all designs and related materials, is the
valuable property of NEC Corporation (NEC) and /or its licensors. NEC and/or its licensors, as
appropriate, reserve all patent, copyright and other proprietary rights to this document, including all
design, manufacturing, reproduction, use, and sales rights thereto, except to the extent said rights are
expressly granted to others.
The NEC product(s) discussed in this document are warranted in accordance with the terms of the
Warranty Statement accompanying each product. However, actual performance of each such
product is dependent upon factors such as system configuration, customer data, and operator control.
Since implementation by customers of each product may vary, the suitability of specific product
configurations and applications must be determined by the customer and is not warranted by NEC.
To allow for design and specification improvements, the information in this document is subject to
change at any time, without notice. Reproduction of this document or portions thereof without prior
written approval of NEC is prohibited.
Second Printing, September 2006
Copyright 2006
NEC Corporation
7-1 Shiba 5-Chome, Minato-Ku
Tokyo 108-8001, Japan
All Rights Reserved
Printed in Japan
Keep this User's Guide handy for quick reference when necessary.
SAFETY INDICATIONS
To use NEC Express5800 series safely, follow the instructions in this User's Guide.
This guide explains components that pose a danger, types of dangers, and actions taken to prevent
them; such components are labeled warning.
This guide and warning labels use “WARNING” and “CAUTION” to indicate a danger depending on
the degree. These terms are defined as follows:
WARNING
Indicates a danger that could lead to a death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a danger that could lead to a burn, other injuries or damage to
physical assets.
This guide uses the following three types of symbols to give indications and precautions against a
danger. They are defined as follows:
Indicates that there is a risk of danger. Each image symbolizes a particular type of
danger. (Attention)
Indicates what you must not do. Each image symbolizes a particular type of
prohibition. (Prohibited actions)
Indicates what you must do. Each image symbolizes a particular type of action
necessary to avoid a danger. (Mandatory actions)
(Example)
Symbol to draw attention
Term indicating a degree of danger
CAUTION
High temperature.
Immediately after the power-off, system components such as hard disk are
very hot. Wait the server to cool down completely before adding/removing
some component.
Symbol indicating a prohibited
action (may not always be
indicated)
Description of a danger
SYMBOLS USED IN THIS USER'S GUIDE AND WARNING LABELS
Attention
Indicates a risk of an electric shock.
Indicates a risk of a personal injury due to heat.
Indicates a risk of catching your fingers.
Indicates a risk of a fire or smoke.
Indicates a general precaution or warning that is not defined herein.
Indicates a risk of losing eyesight due to laser beam.
Indicates a risk of an explosion.
Indicates a risk of a personal injury.
Prohibited actions
Indicates a general prohibition that is not defined herein.
Do no touch the indicated area. There is a risk of an electric shock or fire.
Do not touch with wet hands. There is a risk of an electric shock.
Keep from flame. There is a risk of a fire.
Avoid using water or liquid nearby. If it spills on the equipment, there is a risk of an
electric shock or fire.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the equipment. There is a risk of an electric
shock or fire.
Mandatory actions
Unplug the server. There is a risk of an electric shock or fire.
Indicates a general action to take that is not defined herein. Make sure to follow the
instructions.
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
ᴾ
This class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numériqeu de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel
brouilleur du Canada.
CE Statement
Warning: This is a Class A product. In residential environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures (EN55022).
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
This system is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. This label id located on
the internal CD-ROM installed in your system.
NOTE: This product provides resistance against hardware faults with its redundant hardware
modules. However, this does not mean complete fault-tolerance is assured. For example,
there is a risk of system down when:
– A fatal fault occurs in software.
– Both modules within a redundant hardware pair break down.
– A fatal fault occurs in a non-redundant component, such as the clock generator circuitry
or the interconnect backplane.
– The entire system is cut off from AC power.
቟ోᵈᗧ੐㗄
቟ోᮡ␜
ᓮ೶‫֪شءە‬ਐতխऱਐ‫ڜאق‬٤ࠌ‫ش‬NEC Express5800ߓ٨‫ࣚۻ‬ᕴΖ
‫֪شء‬ਐতᎅࣔԱ๻ໂ۶๠‫ٲڶ‬ᙠΕ‫ٲ‬ᙠᣊীΕ‫ڕ‬۶ᝩ‫ٲ܍‬ᙠ࿛Ζ‫ڇ‬๻ໂ‫ױ‬ቃૠࠩऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠհ๠ࢨࠡॵ२
၀‫ܫᤞڶ‬ᑑ᧘Ζ
‫֪ش‬ਐত֗ᤞ‫ܫ‬ᑑ᧘խΔ௅ᖕ‫ٲ‬ᙠ࿓৫լ‫ٵ‬Δࠌ‫ش‬Ϙᤞ‫ܫ‬ϙΕϘࣹრϙ࿛ဲΔܶᆠ‫ڕ‬ՀΚ
।‫ڕق‬լᙅ‫ښ‬ᇠਐ‫ق‬Δ‫ױ‬౨֧࿇Գ୉႞ՋΖ
WARNING
।‫ڕق‬լᙅ‫ښ‬ᇠਐ‫ق‬Δ‫ױ‬౨࿇‫س‬ᗈ႞࿛ߪ᧯ჾ႞ࢨທ‫ګ‬ढᔆჾ؈Ζ
CAUTION
ኙ‫ٲ‬ᙠऱ༼‫ق‬।‫ڕڶق‬ՀԿጟฤᇆΔࠠ᧯ܶᆠ‫ڕ‬Հࢬ૪Κ
।‫ق‬ᇠ๠‫ױ‬౨࿇‫ٲس‬ᙠΖฤᇆ੡‫ٲ‬ᙠփ୲ऱቹூΖΰࣹრα
।‫ق‬ᆃַ۩੡Ζฤᇆխࢨࠡॵ२ऱቹூ੡ᆃַ۩੡փ୲Ζΰᆃַ۩੡α
।‫ق‬ൎࠫ۩੡Ζฤᇆխऱቹூ੡ൎࠫ‫ؘ‬ႊ೚ऱ۩੡փ୲Ζ‫ܛ‬੡ᝩ‫ٲ܍‬ᙠ‫ؘ‬Ꮑऱ۩੡Ζΰൎ
ࠫ۩੡α
‫֪ش‬ਐতխᒤࠏ
ࣹრฤᇆ
।‫ٲق‬ᙠ࿓৫ऱ‫ش‬፿
CAUTION ࣹრ೏ᄵΖ
‫ء‬ข঴ᣂຨሽᄭ৵Δփᆜ࿏጗࿛փຝ๻ໂսྥ๠࣍೏ᄵणኪΖᓮ‫ךڇ‬։‫ܐ‬থհ৵
ၞ۩ࣈᇘΖ
ᆃַ۩੡ऱ༼‫ق‬ฤᇆΰ‫ױڶ‬౨޲
‫ڼڶ‬ᣊ༼‫ق‬α
‫ٲ‬ᙠ༼‫ق‬փ୲
‫ء‬஼֗ᤞ‫ܫ‬ᑑ᧘խࠌ‫ش‬ऱฤᇆ
ࣹრ
।‫ڶق‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫ڂڶق‬೏ᄵۖ૤႞ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫֫ڶق‬ਐ࿛๯݈۰ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫ڶق‬কᄿࢨृထ‫־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫ॺق‬௽ࡳऱԫ౳ऱ༼ᙌᤞ‫ܫ‬Ζ
।‫ڂڶق‬ሼ୴ᖄી؈ࣔऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫ڶق‬ᡨ੦ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
।‫࠹ڶق‬႞ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
ᆃַ۩੡
।‫ॺق‬௽ࡳऱԫ౳ᆃַΖ
լ૞ᤛ኷ਐࡳ೴഑Ζ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽࢨထ‫־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
լ૞‫ش‬ᛘ֫ᤛ኷Ζ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
᎛ᠦ‫־‬ᄭΖ‫ڶ‬ထ‫־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
᎛ᠦ෈᧯Ζ‫᧯෈ࠩऀ࣠ڕ‬Δ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽࢨထ‫־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
ᓮլ૞ኙ‫ء‬๻ໂၞ۩ࣈ࠵Εଥ෻Ε‫ޏ‬ທΖ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽࡉ࿇‫߀־س‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
ൎࠫ۩੡
ᓮല‫ء‬๻ໂऱሽᄭ༺ᙰൕ‫ࣚۻ‬ᕴՂࢸՀΖ‫ڶ‬࿇‫ࡉ߀־س‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
ኙॺ௽ࡳऱԫ౳ࠌ‫ृش‬ऱ۩੡ၞ۩ਐ‫ق‬Ζᓮਊᅃᎅࣔၞ۩ᖙ‫܂‬Ζ
127(7KLVHTXLSPHQWKDVEHHQWHVWHGDQGIRXQGWRFRPSO\ZLWKWKHOLPLWVIRUD&ODVV
$GLJLWDOGHYLFHSXUVXDQWWR3DUWRIWKH)&&5XOHV7KHVHOLPLWVDUHGHVLJQHG
WRSURYLGHUHDVRQDEOHSURWHFWLRQDJDLQVWKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHZKHQWKHHTXLSPHQWLV
RSHUDWHGLQDFRPPHUFLDOHQYLURQPHQW7KLVHTXLSPHQWJHQHUDWHVXVHVDQGFDQUDGLDWH
UDGLRIUHTXHQF\HQHUJ\DQGLIQRWLQVWDOOHGDQGXVHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKWKH
LQVWUXFWLRQPDQXDOPD\FDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHWRUDGLRFRPPXQLFDWLRQV2SHUDWLRQ
RIWKLVHTXLSPHQWLQDUHVLGHQWLDODUHDLVOLNHO\WRFDXVHKDUPIXOLQWHUIHUHQFHLQ
ZKLFKFDVHWKHXVHUZLOOEHUHTXLUHGWRFRUUHFWWKHLQWHUIHUHQFHDWKLVRZQH[SHQVH
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
ຍਢ˖˟˔˦˦ʳ˄ʳ˟˔˦˘˥ʳˣ˥ˢ˗˨˖˧Ζᇠᑑ᧘၀࣍ߓอऱփຝ٠጗Ζʳ
ࣹრΚʳ ‫ء‬ข঴ຏመ‫ڍ‬塒ऱ࿏᧯ᑓิ༼ࠎ࿏᧯୲ᙑࢤ౨Ζ‫܀‬ਢຍࠀլ।‫ق‬౨ജঅᢞ‫ݙ‬٤୲ᙑΖ
‫ڕ‬Δ‫אڇ‬ՀൣउՀ‫ױ‬౨࿇‫س‬ᰳᖲΚʳ
Ωʳຌ᧯࿇‫س‬ીࡎਚᎽΖʳ
Ωʳ‫ڍ‬塒࿏᧯ᠨֱ݁࿇‫س‬ਚᎽΔլ౨ሎ۩Ζʳ
Ωʳழᤪข‫س‬ᕴᒵሁࢨփຝຑ൷હࣨ࿛ॺ‫ڍ‬塒ցٙ࿇‫س‬ીࡎਚᎽΖʳ
– ಾᣆੌᢛ୘♽⛔⊛AC㔚Ḯ
Trademarks and Patents
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER and NEC ESMPRO are trademarks of NEC Corporation.ᴾ
Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
Avocent and Dambrackas Video Compression (DVC) are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Avocent Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Mozilla is a trademark of Mozilla Foundation.
Netscape is a trademark or registered trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Java is a trademark or registered trademark of Sun Microsystems,
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linux Torvalds. Red Hat and RPM are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Red Hat, Inc. in the United States and other countries.
All other product, brand, or trade names used in this publication are the trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective trademark owners.
The Dambrackas Video Compression algorithm from Avocent Corporation is used for ft Remote
Management Card.
U.S. Patent Numbers: 5,732,212, 5,937,176, 6,633,905, 6,681,250, 6,701,380 and other patents
pending
Taiwanese Patent Number: 173784
European Patent Number: 0 740 811
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition operating system and Microsoft Windows Server
2003 Enterprise Edition operating system are called Windows Server for short. Microsoft Windows
2000 Server operating system, Microsoft Windows 2000 Advanced Server operating system and
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional operating system are called Windows 2000 for short.
Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system version 3.51/4.0 and Microsoft Windows
NT Workstation operating system version 3.51/4.0 are called Windows NT for short. Microsoft
Windows Millennium Edition Operating System is called Windows Me for short. Microsoft
Windows 98 operating system is called Windows 98 for short. Microsoft Windows 95 operating
system is called Windows 95 for short.
Names used with sample applications are all fictitious. They are unrelated to any existing product
names, names of organizations, or individual names.
Most of the software used for this server can be redistributed free under the terms of the BSD
Copyright and the GNU Public License. However, there is software that requires permissions for
redistribution as the owners have the ownership. For details, see “Introduction” in the attachment.
To prevent voltage sag:
This product may be affected by voltage sag caused due to lightning. To prevent voltage sag, you
are recommended to use an AC uninterruptible power supply (UPS) unit.
i
Notes:
(1) No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of
NEC Corporation.
(2) The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
(3) The contents of this manual shall not be copied or altered without prior written permission of
NEC Corporation.
(4) All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. If you find
any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in this manual, contact the sales agent where you
purchased this product.
(5) NEC assumes no liability arising from the use of this product, nor any liability for incidental or
consequential damage arising from the use of this manual regardless of (4) above.
PREFACE
Welcome to the NEC Express5800/ft series.
ᴾ
NEC Express5800/ft series is a “fault-tolerant (ft)” server focusing on “high reliability” in terms of
fault-tolerance, in addition to “high performance,” “scalability,” and “general versatility” provided
by NEC Express5800 series. In the event of trouble, its dual configuration will allow the system to
instantaneously isolate the failed parts to assure non-stop running; operation will be moved
smoothly from one module to the other, minimizing damage to it. You can use this NEC
Express5800/ft series in a mission-critical system where high availability is required. By the use of
Linux operating system, it also provides outstanding openness for general-purpose applications, etc.
To make the best use of these features, read this User's Guide thoroughly to understand how to
operate NEC Express5800/ft series.
ii
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE
This User's Guide helps a user to properly setup and use the product.
Consult this guide to ensure safety as well as to cope with trouble during a system setup and daily
operation.
Keep this manual handy.
This User's Guide is intended for users who have a good knowledge on the basic use of Linux
operating systems and general I/O devices such as a keyboard and mouse.
How to Use This User's Guide
This guide consists of eight chapters and appendices. To help you find a solution quickly, the guide
contains the following information:
For descriptions on setting up this product, see the separate volume “User’s Guide (Setup).”
Read “Precautions for Use” first.
Before going on to main chapters, be sure to read “Precautions for Use.” These precautions are very
important for using the product safely.
Chapter 1 Precautions for Use
This chapter describes precautions necessary to use the product safely and properly. Be
sure to read this chapter before using the product. It also provides information on user
support. It will be helpful when you need maintenance service, support, etc.
Chapter 2 General Description
This chapter describes what you should know about the product: its component names,
functions, operating procedures as well as handling of devices and other parts.
Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation
This chapter describes setup and operation specific to the product when it is on Linux.
Chapter 4 System Configuration
This chapter describes how to make settings of built-in basic input/output system. It also
describes factory-shipped parameters.
Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities
This chapter describes features and operating procedures of a standard utility “NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.” It also describes procedures to install and operate various
software programs contained in its CD-ROM.
Chapter 6 Maintenance
This chapter describes maintenance procedures and use of maintenance tools. If you
need to move the product for maintenance purposes, follow the steps provided in this
chapter.
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
If the product does not work properly, see this chapter before deciding that it is a
breakdown.
Chapter 8 System Upgrade
This chapter describes procedures to add options and precautions. See also this chapter
when you replace failed components.
Appendix A Specifications
This appendix lists specifications of the product.
Appendix B I/O Port Addresses
This appendix lists factory-assigned I/O port addresses.
iii
Additional symbols
The following symbols are used throughout this User's Guide in addition to the caution symbols
described at the beginning.
IMPORTANT:
Important points or instructions to keep in mind when using the
server or software
CHECK:
Something you need to make sure when using the server of
software
TIPS:
Helpful information, something useful to know
ᴾ
Accessories
This product is shipped with various accessories. See the attached list to make sure everything is
included and check the individual items. If some component is missing or damaged, contact your
sales agent.
„
Keep the accessories in a safe place. You will need them when you perform setup,
addition of options, or replacement of failed components.
„
To check NEC EXPRESSBUILDER components, see the attached list.
„
Be sure to fill out and mail the software registration card that is attached to your operating
system.
„
Make backup copies of included floppy disks, if any. Keep the original disks as the master
disks; use these copies in operation.
„
Improper use of an included floppy disk or CD-ROM may alter your system environment.
If you find something unclear, stop using them and contact your sales agent.
iv
CONTENTS
PREFACE .........................................................................................................................................i
ABOUT THIS USER'S GUIDE.......................................................................................................ii
Chapter 1 Precautions for Use...................................................................................... 1-1
WARNING LABELS................................................................................................................... 1-2
Server Chassis ......................................................................................................................... 1-2
CPU/IO modules ..................................................................................................................... 1-3
CPU/IO modules ..................................................................................................................... 1-4
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY ................................................................................................. 1-5
General .................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Use of Power Supply and Power Cord .................................................................................... 1-6
Installation, Relocation, Storage and Connection.................................................................... 1-7
Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices............................................................................. 1-9
During Operation................................................................................................................... 1-10
Rack-mount Model.................................................................................................................1-11
For Proper Operation............................................................................................................. 1-12
‫ڜ‬٤ࣹრࠃႈ ........................................................................................................................... 1-14
ԫ౳ࣹრࠃႈ ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
ࠌ‫ش‬ሽᄭ֗ሽᄭᒵࣹრࠃႈ ............................................................................................... 1-15
‫ڜ‬ᇘΔฝ೯Δঅጥ֗ຑ൷ࣹრࠃႈ ................................................................................... 1-16
ᖞ෻֗ᖙ‫܂‬փຝ๻ໂழऱࣹრࠃႈ ................................................................................... 1-17
ᖙ‫ࣹ܂‬რࠃႈ ....................................................................................................................... 1-18
ᖲਮ‫ࣚۻڤ‬ᕴऱࣹრࠃႈ ................................................................................................... 1-19
DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES........................................................... 1-21
IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED ................................................................................ 1-22
ABOUT REPAIR PARTS .......................................................................................................... 1-22
ABOUT OUR WEB SERVICE................................................................................................. 1-22
Chapter 2 General Description ..................................................................................... 2-1
STANDARD FEATURES ........................................................................................................... 2-2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS..................................................................... 2-6
Front View (inside).................................................................................................................. 2-7
CD- ROM Drive .................................................................................................................... 2-14
Rear View .............................................................................................................................. 2-15
CPU/IO Module..................................................................................................................... 2-18
ft Remote Management Card................................................................................................. 2-21
LEDs...................................................................................................................................... 2-22
BASIC OPERATION................................................................................................................. 2-28
Security lock (front door lock) (for tower model) ................................................................. 2-28
Installing/Removing the Front Bezel..................................................................................... 2-29
Power ON .............................................................................................................................. 2-30
Power OFF ............................................................................................................................ 2-31
POST Check .......................................................................................................................... 2-31
Floppy Disk Drive (Option) .................................................................................................. 2-34
CD-ROM Drive ..................................................................................................................... 2-36
v
Chapter 3 Linux Setup and Operation ......................................................................... 3-1
HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800/ft
series .............................................................................................................................................3-2
REPLACING 3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE ...........................................................................3-3
How to Locate Failed Disks .....................................................................................................3-3
Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually.........................................................................3-5
SETTING THE VIDEO MODE.................................................................................................3-10
Notes ......................................................................................................................................3-11
DUMP INITIALIZATION .........................................................................................................3-12
KEYBOARD SETTINGS FOR X WINDOW SYSTEM...........................................................3-14
ACCESSING USB FDD ............................................................................................................3-16
Notes ......................................................................................................................................3-16
Chapter 4 System Configuration.................................................................................. 4-1
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~ .........................................................................................................4-2
Starting SETUP Utility.............................................................................................................4-3
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage......................................................................4-4
Configuration Examples...........................................................................................................4-6
Menu and Parameter Descriptions ...........................................................................................4-9
SCSI BIOS (SCSISelect)........................................................................................................4-30
FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR .....................................................................................4-37
Forced Shutdown ...................................................................................................................4-37
Clear CMOS/Password...............................................................................................................4-38
How to Clear Passwords.............................................................................................................4-41
Remote Management function....................................................................................................4-44
Network Default Values.........................................................................................................4-44
Settings on the Server.............................................................................................................4-44
Initial Settings on the Server ..................................................................................................4-45
Setting a Management PC ......................................................................................................4-46
Using Remote Management ...................................................................................................4-48
Troubleshooting .....................................................................................................................4-79
Chapter 5 Installing and Using Utilities ....................................................................... 5-1
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER...........................................................................................................5-2
Start Menu ................................................................................................................................5-2
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu .....................................................................................5-4
Master Control Menu ...............................................................................................................5-7
NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager.............................................................................................5-8
Overview ..................................................................................................................................5-8
NEC ESMPRO Agent ............................................................................................................5-16
NEC ESMPRO Manager........................................................................................................5-24
Server Maintenance Utility ....................................................................................................5-40
Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series...........................................................................5-48
Notes ......................................................................................................................................5-74
Chapter 6 Maintenance.................................................................................................. 6-1
DAILY MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................................6-2
Checking Alert .........................................................................................................................6-2
vi
Checking STATUS LEDs ........................................................................................................ 6-2
Making Backup Copies ........................................................................................................... 6-3
Cleaning................................................................................................................................... 6-3
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS .......................................................................................................... 6-7
Test Items................................................................................................................................. 6-7
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics .................................................................................. 6-7
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY....................................................................................6-11
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility ...............................................................................6-11
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility................................................................................6-11
RELOCATING/STORING THE NEC Express5800/ft series.................................................... 6-13
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................... 7-1
TO LOCATE THE ERRORS....................................................................................................... 7-2
ERROR MESSAGES .................................................................................................................. 7-3
Error Messages by LED Indication ......................................................................................... 7-3
POST Error Messages ............................................................................................................. 7-4
Error Notification by BEEP................................................................................................... 7-12
Linux Error Messages............................................................................................................ 7-13
Server Management Application Error Message ................................................................... 7-22
SOLVING PROBLEMS ............................................................................................................ 7-23
Problems with NEC Express5800/ft series............................................................................ 7-23
Event Log .............................................................................................................................. 7-31
Syslog .................................................................................................................................... 7-32
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER............................................................................ 7-35
Problems with NEC ESMPRO .............................................................................................. 7-36
COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS...................................................................................... 7-37
Collection of syslog............................................................................................................... 7-37
Collection of System Information ......................................................................................... 7-37
Collection of the Memory Dump........................................................................................... 7-38
Backup of IPMI Information...................................................................................................... 7-39
Chapter 8 System Upgrade ........................................................................................... 8-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................................................................................... 8-2
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES ....................................................................................................... 8-3
PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE ...................................................................... 8-4
3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE.................................................................................................. 8-5
Installing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive ........................................................................................ 8-6
Removing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive....................................................................................... 8-8
Replacing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive ....................................................................................... 8-9
RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED........................................................ 8-10
5.25-inch device......................................................................................................................... 8-13
Installing 5.25-inch Device.................................................................................................... 8-14
Removing 5.25-inch Device .................................................................................................. 8-15
CPU/IO Module ......................................................................................................................... 8-16
Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 8-16
Removing CPU/IO Module ................................................................................................... 8-17
Installing CPU/IO Module..................................................................................................... 8-19
DIMM ........................................................................................................................................ 8-20
Precautions ............................................................................................................................ 8-21
vii
Installing DIMM ....................................................................................................................8-22
Removing DIMM...................................................................................................................8-23
Replacing DIMM ...................................................................................................................8-24
PROCESSOR (CPU)..................................................................................................................8-25
Installing CPU (Model with Heat Sink) .................................................................................8-26
Removing CPU (Model with Heat Sink)................................................................................8-29
Replacing CPU.......................................................................................................................8-30
ft Remote Management Card......................................................................................................8-31
Installing ft Remote Management Card .................................................................................8-32
Removing ft Remote Management Card................................................................................8-33
PCI BOARD ...............................................................................................................................8-34
Installing PCI Board...............................................................................................................8-36
Removing PCI Board .............................................................................................................8-37
Replacing PCI Board..............................................................................................................8-38
Setup of Optional PCI Board..................................................................................................8-39
Appendix A Specifications............................................................................................A-1
Appendix B I/O Port Addresses....................................................................................B-1
viii
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 1
Precautions for Use
This chapter includes information necessary for proper and safe operation of the server.
1-2 Precautions for Use
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels are placed in certain parts of the system so that the user stays alert to possible risks
(Do not remove or damage these labels).
If some label is missing, about to peel off, or illegible, contact your sales agent.
Server Chassis
Tower model
Front
Rear
Precautions for Use 1-3
Rack model
Front
Rear
1-4 Precautions for Use
CPU/IO modules
The following shows the place on CPU/IO modules where the label is attached.
Precautions for Use 1-5
PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY
This section provides precautions for using the server safely. Read this section carefully to ensure
proper and safe use of the server. For symbol meanings, see "SAFETY INDICATIONS" described
in the previous section.
General
WARNING
Do not use the equipment in an operation where human lives are involved or
high reliability is required.
This equipment is not intended for use in controlling or use with facilities or
systems where human lives are involved or high reliability is required, including
medical devices or nuclear, aerospace, transportation, and traffic control
facilities. NEC assumes no liability for any accidents or damage to physical
assets resulting from the use of this equipment in such systems or facilities.
Do not continue to use the equipment if you detect smoke, odor, or noise.
If the equipment emits smoke, odor, or noise, immediately flip off the POWER
switch, unplug the cord, and contact your sales agent. There is a risk of a fire.
Do not insert a wire or metal object
Do not insert a wire or metal objects into a vent or disk drive slot. There is a risk
of an electric shock.
Do not use the equipment in an unsuitable place.
Do not install a server rack in an unsuitable environment.
Other systems also may be affected, and the rack may fall over to cause a fire
or injuries. For details about installation environment and quake-resistant
engineering, see the attached manual or contact your sales agent.
CAUTION
Prevent water or foreign objects from getting into the equipment.
Do not let water or foreign objects (e.g., pins or paper clips) enter the
equipment. There is a risk of a fire, electric shock, and breakdown. When such
things accidentally enter the equipment, immediately turn off the power and
unplug the cord. Contact your sales agent instead of trying to disassemble it
yourself.
1-6 Precautions for Use
Use of Power Supply and Power Cord
WARNING
Do not handle a power plug with a wet hand.
Do not plug/unplug a power cord with a wet hand. There is a risk of an electric
shock.
Do not connect the ground wire to a gas pipe.
Never connect the ground wire to a gas pipe. There is a risk of a gas explosion.
CAUTION
Do not plug the attached cord in a nonconforming outlet.
Use a wall outlet with specified voltage and power type. There is a risk of a fire
or current leakage.
Avoid installing the equipment where you may need an extension cord. If the
cord that does not meet the power specifications, there is a risk of overheating
that could lead to a fire.
Do not plug too many cords in a single outlet.
If the rated current is exceeded, there is a risk of overheating that could lead to
a fire.
Do not plug the cord insecurely.
Insert the plug firmly into an outlet. There is a risk of heat or fire due to poor
contact. If dust settles on the slots and it absorbs moisture, there is also a risk
of heat or fire.
Do not use nonconforming power cords.
AC cord is to spend the thing of the next specifications.
Maximum 4.5m (14.76 ft) long. Rated minimum 125V, 10A, Type SJT flexible
cord.
You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and
connecting interface cables.
„ Do not pull on the cord.
„ Do not pinch the cord.
„ Do not bend the cord.
„ Keep chemicals away from the cord.
„ Do not twist the cord.
„ Do not tread on the cord.
„ Do not place any object on the cord.
„ Do not use cords as bundled.
„ Do not alter, modify, or repair the cord.
„ Do not staple the cord.
„ Do not use any damaged cord. (Replace it with a new one of the same
specifications. For replacement procedures, contact your sales agent.)
Precautions for Use 1-7
Installation, Relocation, Storage and Connection
WARNING
Disconnect the power cord(s) before installing or removing the equipment.
Be sure to power off the equipment and unplug its power cords from the wall
outlet before installation/relocation. All voltage is removed only when the power
cords are unplugged.
CAUTION
Do not install or store the equipment in an unsuitable place.
Install or store the equipment in such a place as specified in this User's Guide.
Avoid the following, or there is a risk of a fire.
„ a dusty place
„ a humid place located near a boiler, etc
„ a place exposed to direct sunlight
„ an unstable place
Be careful not to hurt your fingers.
Exercise great care not to hurt your fingers on the rail when you
mount/dismount the equipment into/from the rack.
Do not use or store this product in corrosive environment.
Avoid the usage or storage of this product in an environment which may be
exposed to corrosive gases, such as those including but not limited to :
sulfur dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, nitrogen dioxide, chlorine, ammonia and/or
ozone.
Avoid installing this product in a dusty environment or one that may be exposed
to corrosive materials such as sodium chloride and/or sulfur.
Avoid installing this product in an environment which may have excessive metal
flakes or conductive particles in the air.
Such environments may cause corrosion or short circuits within this product,
resulting in not only damage to this product, but may even lead to be a fire
hazard.
If there are any concerns regarding the environment at the planned site of
installation or storage, please contact your sales agent㧚
1-8 Precautions for Use
CAUTION
Do not connect any interface cable with the power cord of the server plugged to
a power source.
Make sure to power off the server and unplug the power cord from a power
outlet before installing/removing any optional internal device or
connecting/disconnecting any interface cable to/from the server. If the server is
off-powered but its power cord is plugged to a power source, touching an
internal device, cable, or connector may cause an electric shock or a fire
resulted from a short circuit.
Do not use any non-designated interface cable.
Use only interface cables designated by NEC; identify which component or
connector to attach beforehand. If you use a wrong cable or make a wrong
connection, there is a risk of short-circuit that could lead to a fire.
You also have to observe the following prohibitions about handling and
connecting interface cables:
„ Do not use any damaged cable connector.
„ Do not step on the cable.
„ Do not place any object on the cable.
„ Do not use the equipment with loose cable connections.
„ Do not use any damaged cable.
Precautions for Use 1-9
Cleaning and Handling of Internal Devices
WARNING
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Unless described herein, never attempt to disassemble, repair, or alter the
equipment. There is a risk of an electric shock or fire as well as malfunction.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM drive uses a laser beam. Do not look or insert a mirror inside
while the system is on. A laser beam is invisible; if your eyes get exposed to it,
there is a risk of losing eyesight.
Do not detach a lithium battery yourself.
This equipment has a lithium battery. Do not detach it yourself. If the battery is
exposed to fire or water, it could explode.
When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment does not work
correctly, contact your sales agent instead of disassembling, replacing or
recharging it yourself.
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTION.
Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server.
Make sure to power off the server and disconnect the power plug from a power
outlet before cleaning or installing/removing internal optional devices. Touching
any internal device of the server with its power cord connected to a power
source may cause an electric shock even if the server is off-powered.
Disconnect the power plug from the outlet occasionally and clean the plug with
a dry cloth. Heat will be generated if condensation is formed on a dusty plug,
which may cause a fire.
CAUTION
High temperature
Immediately after powering off the system, system components such as hard
disk may be very hot. Wait for the server to cool down completely before
adding/removing components.
Make sure to complete installation.
Firmly install all power cords, interface cables and/or boards. An incompletely
installed component may cause a contact failure, resulting in fire and/or smoke.
1-10 Precautions for Use
CAUTION
Protect the unused connectors with the protective cap.
The unused power cord connectors are covered with the protective cap to
prevent short circuits and electrical hazards. When removing the power cord
connector from the internal devices, attach the protective cap to the connector.
Failure to follow this warning may cause a fire or an electric shock.
During Operation
CAUTION
Do not pull out a device during operation.
Do not pull out or remove a device while it works. There is a risk of malfunction
and injuries.
Do not touch the equipment when it thunders.
Unplug the equipment when it threatens to thunder. If it starts to thunder before
you unplug the equipment, do not touch the equipment and cables. There is a
risk of a fire or electric shock.
Keep animals away.
Animal’s waste or hair may get inside the equipment to cause a fire or electric
shock.
Do not place any object on top of the server.
The object may fall off to cause injuries, damage to hardware and/or a fire.
Do not leave the CD tray ejected.
Dust may get in the equipment to cause malfunction. The ejected tray may also
become a cause of injuries.
Do not use a cellular phone or pager around the equipment.
Turn off your cellular phone or pager when you use the equipment. Their radio
waves may cause the equipment to malfunction.
Precautions for Use 1-11
Rack-mount Model
CAUTION
Do not install the equipment on a nonconforming rack.
Install the equipment on a 19-inch rack conforming to the EIA standard. Do not
use the equipment without a rack or install it on a nonconforming rack. The
equipment may not function properly, and there is a risk of damage to physical
assets or injuries. For suitable racks, contact your sales agent.
Do not attempt to install the server yourself.
To avoid a risk of injuries, users should not attempt to install the equipment into
a rack. Installation should be performed by trained maintenance personnel.
< For Maintenance Personnel Only >
Do not install the equipment in such a manner that its weight is imposed on a
single place.
To distribute the weight, attach stabilizers or install two or more racks. It may
fall down to cause injuries.
Do not assemble parts alone.
It takes at least two people to mount doors and trays to a rack. You may drop
some parts to cause a breakage or injuries.
Do not pull a device out of the rack if it is unstable.
Before pulling out a device, make sure that the rack is fixed (by stabilizers or
quake-resistant engineering).
Do not leave two or more devices pulled out from the rack.
If you pull out two or more devices the rack may fall down. You can only pull out
one device at a time.
Do not install excessive wiring.
To prevent burns, fires, and damage to the equipment, make sure that the rated
load of the power branch circuit is not exceeded. For more information on
installation and wiring of power-related facilities, contact your electrician or local
power company.
1-12 Precautions for Use
For Proper Operation
Observe the following instructions for successful operation of the server. Failure to observe them
could lead to malfunction or breakdown.
„
Perform installation in a place where the system can operate correctly. For details, see the
separate volume “User’s Guide (Setup).”
„
Before turning off the power or ejecting a disk, make sure that the access LED is off.
„
When you have just turned off the power, wait at least 30 seconds before turning it on again.
„
Once you have turned on the server, do not turn it off until the "NEC" logo appears on the
screen.
„
Plug the attached cord in the outlet whose AC input voltage is 100V.
„
After plugging in the power cord, do not turn on the power of the equipment for 30 seconds.
„
Before you move the equipment, turn off the power and unplug the cord.
„
This server shall not assure reproduction of copy-protect CDs using reproduction equipment
if such disks do not comply with CD standards.
„
Clean the equipment regularly. (For procedures, see Chapter 6.) Regular cleaning is effective
in preventing various types of trouble.
„
Lightning may cause voltage sag. As a preventive measure, it is recommended to use UPS
(uninterruptible power supply).
This equipment does not support the connection through an UPS serial port (RS-232C) or the
control using PowerChutePlus.
„
Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions:
-
After transporting the equipment
After storing the equipment
After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed
environment conditions (Temperature: 10 to 35°C, Humidity: 20 to 80%).
Check the system clock once in a month. It is recommended to operate the system clock
using a time server (NTP server) if it is installed on the system which requires high level of
time accuracy. If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by, though
the system clock adjustment is performed, contact your sales agent.
„
When you store the equipment, keep it under storage environment conditions (Temperature:
-10 to 55°C, Humidity: 20 to 80%, non-condensing).
„
If NEC Express5800/ft series, the built-in optional devices, and the media set for the backup
devices (tape cartridges) are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a short time,
condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used in such
state. In order to protect important stored data and assets, make sure to wait for a sufficient
period of time to use the server or components in the operating environment.
Reference: Length of the time effective at avoiding condensation in winter (more than 10°C
differences between room temperature and atmospheric temperature)
Disk devices: Approximately 2-3 hours
Tape media: Approximately 1 day
Precautions for Use 1-13
„
Make sure that the optional devices are attachable and connectable to the equipment. There is
a risk of malfunctions that could lead to a breakdown of the equipment even if you could
attach and connect.
„
Make sure that your options are compatible with the system. If you attach any incompatible
option, there is a risk of malfunction that could lead to a breakdown.
„
It is recommended to use NEC's genuine option products. Some competitors’ products are
compatible with this server. However, servicing for trouble or damage resulting from such a
product will be charged even within the warranty period.
1-14 Precautions for Use
‫ڜ‬٤ࣹრࠃႈ
‫ء‬ᆏᝑ૪‫ڜ‬٤ࠌ‫ࣚۻءش‬ᕴࢬᏁऱࣹრࠃႈΖ੡Ա൞‫إ‬ᒔ‫ڜ‬٤‫ࣚۻءشࠌچ‬ᕴΔᓮ‫ג‬าᔹᦰ
ᇠᆏփ୲Ζฤᇆऱઌᣂᎅࣔᓮ೶‫ە‬Ϙ‫ڜ‬٤ᑑ‫ق‬ΰSAFETY INDICATIONSαϙᎅࣔΖ
ԫ౳ࣹრࠃႈ
WARNING լ૞‫֗ٲ࣍ش‬ԳࡎࡉᏁ૞೏৫‫ױ‬ᔾࢤऱᖙ‫܂‬ՂΖ
‫ء‬ข঴լ૞‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ڇ‬᠔᛭๻ໂΕ଺՗౨๻ໂΕ౰़‫ࡶڙ‬ᖲᕴΕሎᙁ๻ໂ࿛ᄎ‫֗ٲ‬Գ
ࡎ‫֗א‬Ꮑ૞೏৫‫ױ‬ᔾࢤऱ๻ໂࡉᖲᕴՂΔՈլ૞ࠌ‫ءش‬ข঴ࠐ൳ࠫຍࠄᖲᕴΖ‫ڕ‬
࣠ല‫ء‬ข঴‫࣍ش‬ຍᣊߓอऱ๻ໂ֗ᖲᕴΔທ‫ګ‬Գߪࠃਚ֗ತขჾ؈࿛৵࣠Δ‫ء‬ֆ
‫׹‬ᄗլ૤ຂΖ
࿇‫س‬কᄿΕฆ࠺Εᠧଃழլ૞ࠌ‫ش‬Ζ
࿇‫س‬কᄿΕฆ࠺Εᠧଃ࿛ழΔᓮऴ൷ᣂຨሽᄭ32:(5Δࠀലሽᄭ༺ᙰൕ༺ஆՂࢸՀΖ
ྥ৵ᓮፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂᥨࣚ೭ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀΖᤉᥛࠌ‫ش‬ᄎᖄી‫߀־‬Ζ
լ૞༺Եᥳ࿭ࡉ८᥆ׂΖ
լ૞ല८᥆ׂࡉᥳ࿭࿛ฆढ༺Եຏ௛֞ࢨຌ጗ᖲΕ٠጗ᖲऱᜓᎼΖ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
CAUTION ๻ໂփլ૞ၞֽࡉฆढΖ
๻ໂփլ૞ၞԵֽΕಾΕ݈՗࿛ฆढΖ‫ױڶ‬౨ᖄી‫ࡉ߀־‬ᤛሽΖԫ‫؟‬ၞԵฆढΔ
ᓮ‫ܛم‬ᣂຨሽᄭΔലሽᄭ༺ᙰൕ༺ஆՂࢸՀࠐΖլ૞۞۩ࣈ࠵Δᓮፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂ
ᥨࣚ೭ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀΖ
Precautions for Use 1-15
ࠌ‫ش‬ሽᄭ֗ሽᄭᒵࣹრࠃႈ
WARNING լ૞‫ش‬ᛘ֫ஞሽᄭ༺ᙰΖ
լ૞‫ش‬ᛘ֫༺ࢸሽᄭ༺ᙰΖ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
լ૞‫چނ‬ᒵຑ൷ࠩᅁ௛ጥሐՂΖ
ᓮ֎ല‫چ‬ᒵຑ൷ࠩᅁ௛ጥሐՂΖ‫ڶ‬ᖄીᅁ௛ᡨ੦ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
CAUTION լ૞༺Ե‫آ‬ਐࡳऱ༺ஆΖ
ሽᄭᓮࠌ‫ش‬ਐࡳሽᚘ֗ሽᄭऱᕻ‫༺ڤ‬ஆΖࠌ‫آش‬ਐࡳऱሽᄭᄎທ‫ࡉ߀־ګ‬ዥሽΖ
ᓮᝩ‫࢏شࠌ܍‬९ᒵ‫ڜ‬ᇘ๻ໂΖ‫࣠ڕ‬ຑ൷ፖ‫ء‬ข঴ሽᄭ๵௑լઌฤऱሽᒵΔᄎ‫ڂ‬መ
ᑷۖᖄી‫߀־‬Ζ
լ૞‫ڇ‬ԫଡ༺ஆՂ༺൷‫ڍ‬ଡሽᄭᒵΖ
༺ஆ‫࣠ڕ‬၌መᠰࡳሽੌΔᄎ‫ڂ‬መᑷۖᖄી‫߀־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
լ૞‫༺׽‬Եԫ‫ת‬Ζ
ᓮലሽᄭ༺ᙰऴ༺ࠩࢍຝΖ‫༺࣠ڕ‬Եԫ‫ת‬ᄎ‫ڂ‬൷ᤛլߜۖ࿇ᑷΔທ‫߀־ګ‬Ζ‫׼‬؆Δ
༺Եຝ‫ॵڕ‬ထ‫ۊ‬ቺΕֽዠ࿛Δᄎ‫ڂ‬࿇ᑷᖄી‫߀־‬Ζ
լ૞ࠌ‫آش‬ਐࡳऱሽᄭᒵΖ
ᓮࠌ‫ش‬Հ٨๵௑ऱ$&ሽᄭᒵΖ
່९PIWΔ່՛ᠰࡳሽᚘ9$Δ6-7ሽᄭᒵΖ
‫ڼ‬؆Δᖙ‫ࡉ܂‬ຑ൷ሽᄭᒵழᓮᙅ༛‫א‬ՀࣹრࠃႈΖ
„ լ૞ࣆਏሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞݈ሽᄭᒵ
„ լ૞ᦛ‫މ‬ሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞ࠌሽᄭᒵᔾ२֏ᖂᢐ঴Ζ
„ լ૞‫ڴށ‬ሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞ᔐᔏሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞‫ڇ‬ሽᄭᒵՂሉԵढ঴Ζ
„ լ૞தᆙሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞ኙሽᄭᒵၞ۩‫ޏ‬ທΕ‫ף‬ՠΕଥ༚Ζ
„ լ૞‫ࡳࡐش‬ᕴ࿛ࡐࡳሽᄭᒵΖ
„ լ૞ࠌ‫ش‬ჾ႞ऱሽᄭᒵΖΰჾ႞ऱሽᄭᒵ૞‫ޓܛم‬ང੡ઌ‫ٵ‬๵௑ऱሽᄭᒵΖ‫ޓ‬
ངࠃࡵᓮፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂᥨࣚ೭ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀα
1-16 Precautions for Use
‫ڜ‬ᇘΔฝ೯Δঅጥ֗ຑ൷ࣹრࠃႈ
CAUTION լ૞‫ڜ‬ᇘࢨ‫آڇ࣋ژ‬ਐࡳऱ໱ࢬΖ
լ૞ല‫ء‬๻ໂ࣋ᆜ‫ڕڇ‬Հ໱ࢬࡉ‫ء‬஼‫آ‬ਐࡳऱ໱ࢬΔ‫ڶ‬ᖄી‫߀־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
„ ‫ۊ‬ቺለ‫ڍ‬ऱ໱ࢬ
„ ᑷֽᕴல࿛ᛘ௛ለ೏ऱ໱ࢬ
„ ၺ٠ऴ୴ऱ໱ࢬ
„ լؓ᡹ऱ໱ࢬ
լ૞‫ڇ‬ፍ፱ࢤᛩቼխࠌ‫࣋ژࢨش‬๻ໂΖ
լ૞‫ڶڇ‬ፍ፱ࢤ௛᧯ΰ‫ڕ‬Բ௜֏ทΕස֏ทΕེΕසΕ௝ࢨ౬௜࿛αऱᛩቼխࠌ
‫ء࣋ژࢨش‬ข঴Ζ
լ૞ല‫ء‬ข঴‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ۊڇ‬ቺለ‫ڶܶࢨڍ‬ፍ፱ࢤढᔆ‫֏ཻڕ‬ၪࢨทᛸ࿛ऱ‫ֱچ‬Ζ
լ૞ല‫ء‬ข঴‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫़ڇ‬௛խܶ‫ڶ‬መၦ८᥆ᅷ‫ࢨأ‬ႚᖄศ՗ऱ‫ֱچ‬Ζ
Ղ૪ᛩቼ‫ױ‬౨ᖄી‫ء‬ข঴ፍ፱ࢨ࿍ሁΔ‫ۖڂ‬ჾᡏข঴Δ੷֧۟ದ‫߀־‬Ζ
ኙข঴‫ڜ‬ᇘࢨ‫࣋ژ‬ᛩቼ‫ڶ‬ٚ۶ጊംΔᓮፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂଥࣚ೭ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀΖ
լ૞ࠌ‫آش‬ਐࡳऱॾᇆᒵΖ
ࠌ‫ش‬1(&ਐࡳऱॾᇆᒵΔࠀ‫ڇ‬ᒔᎁຑ൷๻ໂࡉտ૿৵ၞ۩ຑ൷Ζࠌ‫آش‬ਐࡳॾᇆᒵ
ࢨຑ൷ᙑᎄ࿛ᄎທ‫ګ‬࿍ሁΕᖄી‫߀־‬Ζ
ॾᇆᒵऱᖙ‫ࡉ܂‬ຑ൷Δႊᙅ‫אښ‬ՀࣹრࠃႈΚ
„ լ૞ࠌ‫ش‬ٚ۶ჾᡏऱॾᇆᒵ൷ᙰΖ
„ լ૞ᔐᔏॾᇆᒵΖ
„ լ૞‫ॾڇ‬ᇆᒵՂሉԵढ঴Ζ
„ ॾᇆᒵ൷ᠾ೯ழլ૞ࠌ‫ش‬Ζ
„ ϡ㽕Փ⫼ӏԩ᧡າⱘֵ㰳㎮DŽ
Precautions for Use 1-17
ᖞ෻֗ᖙ‫܂‬փຝ๻ໂழऱࣹრࠃႈ
WARNING լ૞۞۩ࣈ࠵Εଥ෻ࢨ‫ޏ‬ທ‫ࣚۻء‬ᕴΖ
ೈ‫ء‬஼ಖሉऱൣउ؆Δլ૞ၞ۩ࣈ࠵Εଥ෻Ε‫ޏ‬ທΖ‫ܡ‬ঞΔլ‫ױ܀‬౨ᖄી๻ໂլ
౨ၞ۩‫إ‬ൄሎ۩Δᝫ‫ڶ‬࿇‫س‬ᤛሽࡉ‫߀־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
լ૞઎٠጗ᖲփຝΖ
٠጗ᖲࠌ‫ش‬Աሼ୴Δᓮլ૞‫ڇ‬ሽᄭ‫ؚ‬ၲऱणኪՀᨠ઎փຝࢨ༺Եᢴ՗࿛Ζሼ୴୴
୴Եณᅪ‫ڶ‬ᖄી؈ࣔऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΰሼ୴ۚณ઎լߠαΖ
լ૞ᖐ۞ࣈೈᔶሽ‫ۃ‬Ζ
‫ء‬ข঴փຝ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ڶ‬ᔶሽ‫ۃ‬Ζᓮլ૞ࣈՀሽ‫ۃ‬Ζᔶሽ‫ۃ‬ᔾ२‫ࢨ־‬௦ֽ݁‫ױڶ‬౨࿇‫س‬
ᡨ੦Ζ
‫࣍ط‬ሽ‫شࠌۃ‬ཚૻۖᖄી๻ໂլ౨‫إ‬ൄሎ۩ழΔլ૞۞۩ࣈ࠵Ε‫ޓ‬ངΕ‫ך‬ሽ࿛Δ
ᓮፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂᥨࣚ೭ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀΖ
堚ᑥ‫ࣚۻ‬ᕴছᓮࢸՀሽᄭ༺ஆΖ
ᖞ෻ࢨࣈᇘ‫ء‬๻ໂփຝऱᙇ᝜಻ᆜழΔ૞֊ឰ๻ໂሽᄭΔࠀࢸՀሽᄭ༺ᙰΖ‫ࠌܛ‬
բᣂຨሽᄭΔ‫܀‬ຑ൷ထሽᄭᒵΔ൷ᤛࠩٚ۶փຝ๻ໂՈ‫ڶ‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
‫׼‬؆ΔᓮᆖൄࢸՀሽᄭ༺ᙰΔ‫ش‬೓ؒᚴ਌‫ۊ‬ቺࡉॵထढΖ‫ۊڶ‬ቺࢨֽዠ࿛ॵထழ
ᄎ࿇ᑷΔ‫ڶ‬ᖄી‫߀־‬ऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
CAUTION ࣹრ೏ᄵ
‫ء‬ข঴ᣂຨሽᄭ৵Δփᆜ࿏጗࿛փຝ๻ໂսྥ๠࣍೏ᄵणኪΖᓮ‫ךڇ‬։‫ܐ‬থհ৵
ၞ۩ࣈᇘΖ
ᒔᎁ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ݙ‬ฅΖ
ሽᄭᒵࡉॾᇆᒵΕ಻ٙࣨ૞ᒔኔ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ݔ‬ᅝΖ
‫ڜ‬ᇘլ߂‫ױڶ‬౨֧ದ൷ᤛլߜΔ‫ױ‬౨ທ‫ګ‬কᄿࡉထ‫־‬Ζ
1-18 Precautions for Use
CAUTION ᓮ‫ش‬অᥨ።অᥨ‫شࠌآړ‬ऱտ૿Ζ
ᓮ‫ش‬অᥨ።অᥨ‫شࠌآړ‬ऱሽᄭᒵտ૿‫ַ߻א‬࿍ሁࢨᤛሽΖൕփຝ๻ໂՂࢸՀሽ
ᄭ༺ᙰழΔ‫ش‬অᥨ።።‫ړ‬տ૿Δ‫ܡ‬ঞ‫ڶ‬ᖄી‫ࢨ߀־‬ᤛሽऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
ᖙ‫ࣹ܂‬რࠃႈ
CAUTION լ૞ᨃᡒढᔾ२Ζ
ᡒढऱඈइढࡉֻᕓၞԵ๻ໂ‫ױ‬౨ᖄી‫ࡉ߀־‬ᤛሽΖ
๻ໂՂլ૞࣋ᆜढ঴Ζ
ढ঴ଙՀ‫ױ‬౨֧ದ႞ՋΔధᡏ࿏᧯ࢨᖄી‫߀־‬Ζ
լ૞ല٠጗ᖲ‫ڮ‬ᒌࢮ‫࣋נ‬ᆜΖ
߻ַ‫ڮ‬ᒌխၞԵ‫ۊ‬ቺ֧ದሎ᠏ᙑᎄΖ‫ٵ‬ழ߻ַ‫ڂ‬ᅸᐳ࿛ທ‫ڮګ‬ᒌჾ႞Ζ
լ૞‫ؚڇ‬ሼழᤛ኷ᖲᕴΖ
‫ؚ‬ሼழᓮࢸՀሽᄭ༺ᙰΖ‫ࠐڕ‬լ֗ࢸՀሽᄭ༺ᙰΔᓮլ૞ᤛ኷๻ໂ֗ᒵᨱ࿛Δ߻
ַ࿇‫ࢨ߀־س‬ᤛሽΖ
լ૞‫ڇ‬๻ໂॵ२ࠌ‫۩ش‬೯ሽᇩࢨࡅ‫׻‬ᕴΖ
‫ءڇ‬ข঴ॵ२ழᓮᣂຨ۩೯ሽᇩ֗ࡅ‫׻‬ᕴሽᄭΔ߻ַ‫ڂ‬ሽंᐙ᥼ᖄીሎ᠏ᙑᎄΖ
Precautions for Use 1-19
ᖲਮ‫ࣚۻڤ‬ᕴऱࣹრࠃႈ
WARNING լ૞ല๻ໂ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫آڇ‬ਐࡳऱᖲਮՂΖ
ᓮല๻ໂ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ڇ‬ฤ‫(ٽ‬,$ᑑᄷऱ૎՚ᖲਮՂΖԫࡳ૞ല๻ໂ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ڇ‬ਐࡳऱᖲਮՂ
թ౨ࠌ‫ش‬Ζ‫ܡ‬ঞ๻ໂ‫ױ‬౨ྤऄ‫إ‬ൄࠌ‫ش‬Δࠀ‫ױڶ‬౨ჾᡏᖲᕴሿຝٙࢨᖄીԳߪ႞
୭Ζᣂ࣍‫ٽ‬ᔞऱᖲਮΔᓮፖ൞ऱᆖᔭ೸ᜤᢀΖ
լ૞‫آڇ‬ਐࡳऱ໱ࢬࠌ‫ࣚۻءش‬ᕴข঴Ζ
լ૞‫آڇ‬ਐࡳऱᛩቼխ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ࣚۻ‬ᕴᖲਮΖ
‫ܡ‬ঞΔࠡ‫ߓה‬อ‫ױ‬౨ᄎ࠹ࠩᐙ᥼Δࠀ‫׊‬ᖲਮๅᆵ‫ױ‬౨ᖄી‫ृࢨ߀־‬Գߪ႞୭Ζ‫ڶ‬
ᣂ‫ڜ‬ᇘᛩቼࡉ߻ᔼ‫ݾ‬๬ऱᇡาࠃႈᓮ೶ᔹॵ൅ऱ‫ࢨם֪֫ش‬ፖᆖᔭ೸ࢨፂᥨࣚ೭
ֆ‫׹‬ᜤᢀΖ
CAUTION ᓮ՛֨լ૞݈۰ࢨᅸ႞֫ਐΖ
ല‫ء‬ᖲᕴ‫ڜ‬ᇘࠩᖲਮՂࢨृൕᖲਮՂ࠵ሉऱழଢΔᓮ೭‫ؘ‬՛֨‫܍א‬๯ᄶ૩ቤ႞֫
ਐΖ
ᓮᒔᎁ‫ٵ‬ழ‫ڶ‬ԿԳ‫א‬Ղԫದၞ۩ჺሎ‫ڜ‬ᇘ‫ࣚۻڼ‬ᕴऱ೯‫܂‬Ζ
੡Աᝩ‫܍‬Գߪ႞୭Δᓮլ૞۞۩ല‫ء‬ᖲᕴ‫ڜ‬ᇘࠩᖲਮՂΖᚨᇠ‫࠹ط‬መറᄐಝᒭऱ
ፂᥨԳ୉ࠐ‫ڜ‬ᇘΖ
‫ڜ‬ᇘᖲᕴழլ౨ലᖲᕴऱࢬ‫ૹڶ‬ၦ‫ط‬ԫଡ‫ࢭࠐֱچ‬ሉΖ
੡Ա։ཋૹၦΔᚨᇠ‫ף‬ᇘࡐࡳᕴࢨृ‫ٵ‬ழ‫ڜ‬ᇘࠟଡࢨ‫ڍޓ‬ऱᖲਮΔ‫ܡ‬ঞᖲਮ‫ױ‬౨
ᄎႜଙᖄીԳߪ႞୭Ζ
լ૞ᖐ۞ิᇘሿຝٙΖ
ലছ॰ࡉ‫ڮ‬ਮ‫ڜ‬ᇘࠩᖲਮՂ۟֟Ꮑ૞ࠟԳ٥‫ګݙٵ‬Δ‫ܡ‬ঞ‫ױ‬౨ᄎ‫ڂ‬੡ሿຝٙၓᆵ
ۖᖄીჾᡏࢨृԳߪ႞୭Ζ
լ૞ൕլ߂ࡐऱᖲਮխࢼ‫נ‬๻ໂΖ
‫נࢼڇ‬๻ໂհছᓮᒔᎁᖲਮբᆖ๯᡹ࡐᕴࢨृຏመ‫ݼ‬ᔼ‫ݾ‬๬ࡐࡳΖ
1-20 Precautions for Use
CAUTION լ૞ൕᖲਮࢼ‫ࠟנ‬ଡࢨृࠟଡ‫א‬Ղऱ๻ໂΖ
‫ٵ‬ழࢼ‫ࠟנ‬ଡࢨृࠟଡ‫א‬Ղऱ๻ໂ‫ױ‬౨ᖄીᖲਮႜଙΖԫ‫׽ڻ‬౨ࢼ‫נ‬ԫଡ๻ໂΖ
լ૞ᇘ಻መ‫ڍ‬ሽᒵΖ
੡Աᝩ‫ࡉ߀־܍‬๻ໂჾᡏΔᓮ೭‫ؘ‬ᒔঅլ૞၌መᒵሁऱᠰࡳ૤ሉΖ‫ڶ‬ᣂሽԺ๻ໂ
ऱ‫ڜ‬ᇘࡉሽᒵऱ‫ڍޓ‬ᇷಛᓮᜤᢀሽՠࢨृᅝ‫چ‬ऱሽԺֆ‫׹‬Ζ
լ૞‫ڇ‬๻ໂሎ۩ழࢸ‫נ‬๻ໂΖ
լ૞ࢸ‫ࣈࢨנ‬ೈሎ۩խऱ๻ໂΖ‫ڶ‬ᖄીߓอਚᎽࡉჾᡏऱ‫ٲ‬ᙠΖ
Precautions for Use 1-21
DISPOSAL OF EQUIPMENT AND CONSUMABLES
„
When you dispose of the main unit, hard disk drives, floppy disks, CD-ROMs, optional
boards, etc., you need to observe your local disposal rules.ᴾDispose the attached power cable
along with the equipment to avoid being used with other equipment.ᴾ
For details, ask your municipal office.
IMPORTANT:
For disposal (or replacement) of batteries on the motherboard, consult with your sales
agent.
If data remains on the hard disk, backup data cartridges, floppy disks, or other writable
media (such as CD-R and CD-RW), it could be restored and reused by outsiders. The
customer is responsible for wiping out such data before disposal. You need to exercise
sufficient care to protect privacy and confidential information.
„
Some of the system components have limited lifetime (e.g., cooling fans, built-in batteries,
built-in CD-ROM drive, floppy disk drive and mouse). For stable operation, it is
recommended to replace them regularly. For lifetime of individual components and replacing
procedures, ask your sales agent.
WARNING
Do not detach a lithium battery yourself.
This equipment has a lithium battery. Do not detach it yourself. If the battery is
exposed to fire or water, it could explode.
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED WITH INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
When the lithium battery is running down and the equipment does not work
correctly, contact your sales agent instead of disassembling, replacing or
recharging it yourself.
1-22 Precautions for Use
IF SYSTEM TROUBLE IS SUSPECTED
Before sending the equipment for repair, try the following:
1.
Check if its power cord and connection cables are attached correctly.
2.
See “ERROR MESSAGES” in Chapter 7 to check if there is a relevant symptom. If yes,
take measures as instructed.
3.
Certain software programs are required for operation of NEC Express5800/ft series.
Check if these programs are properly installed.
4.
Use a commercially available anti-virus program to check the server.
If the problem is not solved by the above actions, stop using the server and consult with your sales
agent. In this case, check LED indications of the server and alarm indications on the display, which
will serve as helpful information at the time of repair.
ᴾ
ABOUT REPAIR PARTS
The minimum duration of holding repair parts of this equipment may be different for each country,
so contact the NEC sales representatives.
If the period is not specified, the repair parts are kept for 5 years after discontinuance of the product.
ᴾ
ABOUT OUR WEB SERVICE
Information on NEC Express5800/ft series including modification modules is also available on our
web site, NEC Express5800 Web Site Asia Pacific, at
http://www.nec.co.jp/express/index.html
Precautions for Use 1-23
Advice for Your Health
Prolonged use of a computer may affect your health. Keep in mind the
following to reduce stresses on your body:
Sit in a good posture
Sit on your chair with your back straight. If the desk height is appropriate,
you will slightly look down at the screen and your forearms will be parallel to
the floor. This “good” work posture can minimize muscle tension caused by
sedentary work.
If you sit in a “bad” posture—for example, sit round-shouldered or with you
face too close to the display—you may easily suffer fatigue or have your
eyesight affected.
Adjust the installation angle of Display
Most types of displays allow you to adjust the angle vertically and
horizontally. This adjustment is very important to prevent the reflection of
light as well as to make the screen more comfortable to see. Without this
adjustment, it is difficult to maintain a “good” work posture and may get tired
soon. Be sure to adjust the angle before using the display.
Adjust Brightness and Contrast
Displays allow you to adjust brightness and contrast. Optimum brightness
and contrast vary depending on the individual, age, brightness of the room,
etc; you need to make an adjustment accordingly. If the screen is too bright
or too dark, it is bad for your eyes.
Adjust the installation angle of Keyboard
Some types of keyboards allow you to adjust the angle. If you adjust the
angle to make the keyboard more comfortable to use, you can greatly
reduce stresses on your shoulders, arms, and fingers.
Clean the Equipment
Cleanliness of the equipment is very important not only for reasons of
appearance but also from the viewpoints of function and safety. Especially,
you need to regularly clean the display, which gets unclear due to the
accumulation of dirt.
Take a break when you get tired
If you feel tired, you are recommended to refresh yourself by taking a short
break or doing a light exercise.
1-24 Precautions for Use
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 2
General Description
This chapter describes what you need to know to use the NEC Express5800/ft series. Refer to this
chapter when you want to know about certain components and how to operate them.ᴾ
2-2 General Description
STANDARD FEATURES
High performance
„ Intel“ Xeon® Processor
(320Fa-L, 320Fa-LR: 3.2GHz)
„ High-speed Ethernet interface
(1000Mbps/100Mbps/10Mbps supported)
„ High-speed disk access (Ultra320 SCSI)
Expandability
„ Two slots (low profile) of PCI bus
(100MHz) (320Fa-L, 320Fa-LR)
„ Large memory of up to 6 GB (320Fa-L,
320Fa-LR)
„ Remote power-on feature
„ USB interface
„ Backup device bays as standard
equipment
(320Fa-L)
High-reliability
„ Memory monitoring feature (1-bit error
correction/ 2-bit error detection)
„ Bus parity error detection
„ Temperature monitoring
„ Error notification
„ Built-in fan monitoring feature
„ Internal voltage monitoring feature
„ BIOS password feature
„ Security feature (security lock for front
bezel)
Various Features
„ Graphic accelerator " ES1000" supported
„ El Torito Bootable CD-ROM (no
emulation mode) format supported
„ POWER switch mask
„ Remote power-on feature
„ AC-LINK feature
Management Utilities
„ NEC ESMPRO
„ NEC DianaScope
Maintainability
„ Off-line Maintenance Utility
Ready-to-use
„ Quick cableless connection: hard disk,
CPU/IO module, POWER
Easy and Fine Setup
„ NEC EXPRESSBUILDER (system setup
utility)
„ SETUP (BIOS setup utility)
„ SCSISelect (SCSI device utility)
Fault-tolerant Feature
„ Redundant modules achieved within a
system
„ Higher hardware availability by isolation
of failed module
Self-diagnosis
„ Power On Self-Test (POST)
„ Test and Diagnosis (T&D) Utility
General Description 2-3
The NEC Express5800/ft series achieves fault-tolerant high-availability in a space-saving form
factor by incorporating redundant hardware module pairs in a single chassis. These modules work in
synchronous tight lockstep while constantly making comparisons with each other and detecting
anomalous diversions in operation.
Mirrored
Memory
Compare/Sync
Memory
CPU Module #0
CPU Module #1
IO Module #0
IO Module #1
Mirror
Linux software programs
New fault-tolerant technology
Standard product
Even if one hardware module stops, the server can continue operation with the other module. After the failed
module is replaced, the new module will obtain information from the other and resume operation.
NEC Express5800/ft series is a highly fault-tolerant server that achieves continuous computing
operations, data storage mirror, and continuous network connection. It allows you to run
Linux-based applications.
NEC Express5800/ft series achieves continuous computing operations for the Linux server and
server-based applications with its redundant CPU processing and redundant memory. It assures data
redundancy through duplication of server data on an independent storage system. These features
eliminate server downtime that is usually caused by network disconnection or trouble with the I/O
controller, Ethernet adapter or disk drive, and support operation of the network and server
applications continuously. While being transparent to application software, NEC Express5800/ft
series achieves high fault-tolerance.
NEC Express5800/ft series detects status changes, errors and other events and notifies the user of
these events. If you use an alarm notification tool, you can configure NEC Express5800/ft series to
notify you when certain events occur.
NEC ESMPRO is installed on the system as a server management solution. NEC ESMPRO, a
GUI-based management tool, allows you to monitor, view, and configure NEC Express5800/ft
series. This tool also supports both local and remote management of NEC Express5800/ft series.
2-4 General Description
NEC Express5800/ft series mainly provides the following advantages:
„
Highly fault-tolerant processing and I/O subsystems
NEC Express5800/ft series use redundant hardware and software to assure server
operation even if one module suffers trouble with its processor, memory, I/O (including
trouble related to the I/O controller), disk drive, or Ethernet adapter.
„
Continuous network connection
NEC Express5800/ft series maintains continuous network connection by detecting any
trouble with the network adapter, connection, etc. If trouble occurs, the standby network
connection will take over all network traffic processing and thus securely maintain the
network system connection of NEC Express5800/ft series without losing network traffic
or client connection.
„
Support of multiple network connections
Since NEC Express5800/ft series can support multiple Ethernet connections, you can add
network redundant control or network traffic control.
„
Industry standard hardware platform
NEC Express5800/ft series uses IA (Intel Architecture)-based system hardware.
„
No need to modify applications
You can run Linux-compliant applications on NEC Express5800/ft series. Thus, unlike
other highly fault-tolerant products, special API or scripts are not necessary.
„
Automatic mirroring
NEC Express5800/ft series automatically maintains data as the current data.
„
Automatic detection and notification of faults
NEC Express5800/ft series detects and sorts out all events such as general status changes
and faults, and records these events to syslog.
„
Transparent migration
NEC Express5800/ft series constantly monitors events. If trouble occurs on NEC
Express5800/ft series’ server module, it will transparently use a redundant module of the
failed module. This feature maintains data and user access without losing application
service.
„
Automatic reconfiguration
When the failed module restarts after the trouble is corrected, NEC Express5800/ft series
will perform reconfiguration automatically, and if necessary, resynchronize the affected
modules. Reconfiguration can include CPU processing (e.g., CPU memory), server's
operating system (and related applications), and system data stored on the hard disks. In
most cases, NEC Express5800/ft series automatically restores redundancy of the server
modules after recovery.
General Description 2-5
„
Local and remote management
NEC Express5800/ft series uses NEC ESMPRO as a server management tool. This tool
uses a GUI that enables monitoring and setting of NEC Express5800/ft series. NEC
ESMPRO can be used both locally and remotely on work station PCs or server PCs.
„
Syslog function
When a trouble or other event is detected on NEC Express5800/ft series, they will be
recorded in syslog.
„
In-service repairing
You can repair or replace a failed module even if NEC Express5800/ft series is operating.
2-6 General Description
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS
Names and functions of components are shown below: ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
(1) Front door
The cover to protect devices in the front
in daily operations: this cover can be
locked by the security key shipped
together.
(2) LEDs
For more information, see the description
on the front view (page 2-7).
(3) Key slot
The slot you insert the security key to
unlock the front door
(4) Drive cover
The cover to be detached when removing
the backup device bay
Tower model
(1) Front bezel
The cover to protect devices in the
front: this cover can be locked by the
security key shipped together.
(2) LEDs
For more information, see the
description on the front view (page
2-11).
(3) Key slot
The slot you insert the security key to
unlock the front bezel.
Rack-mount model
General Description 2-7
Front View (inside)
The following illustrations show components in the front of the tower model and the rack model.
Tower model
(with the front door open)
2-8 General Description
(1)
POWER LED (green)
This LED illuminates when the power supply is switched on (see page 2-22).
(2)
DISK ACCESS LED (green/amber)
This LED illuminates in green when the internal hard disk drives are accessed. If any internal
hard disk drive is failing, the LED illuminates in amber (see page 2-22).
(3)
FT status LED (green/amber)
This LED indicates the status of the server (see page 2-23).
In the Duplex mode, the LED illuminates in green.
In the Simplex mode, the LED does not illuminate.
If either of the CPU/IO modules fails, the LED illuminates in amber. While memory dump is
being performed, this LED blinks in amber.
(4)
CPU/IO module #1 status LED
This LED indicates the status of the CPU/IO module #1 (see page 2-24). When the module is
running successfully, the LED illuminates in green. If the module has a problem, the LED
blinks in green, illuminates in amber, or blinks in amber.
(5)
CPU/IO module #0 status LED
This LED indicates the status of the CPU/IO module #0 (see page 2-24). When the module is
running successfully, the LED illuminates in green. If the module has a problem, the LED
blinks in green, illuminates in amber, or blinks in amber.
(6)
UID LED (blue)
This LED blinks by a command from software.
(7)
POWER switch
This switch is used to power on/off the server. The POWER LED illuminates and the server
is powered on when this switch is pressed once (see page 2-30). The power supply is turned
off when the switch is pressed once again (see page 2-31). Pressing this button for 4 or more
seconds shuts down the server forcefully (see page 4-37).
(8)
DUMP (NMI) switch
This switch is used to perform memory dump.
(9)
USB1 connector
This connector is used for connecting devices supporting the USB1.1 interface.
(10)
Hard disk drive bays
These bays are used to install hard disk drives (see page 8-6).
The numbers following “-” represent SCSI IDs.
(11)
CD-ROM drive
This device is used to read data from CD-ROMs.
General Description 2-9
(12)
CPU/IO module #0
This is a module with a set of CPU (processor), memory (DIMM), PCI board, and cooling
fan unit (see page 2-18).
(13)
CPU/IO module #1
This is a module with a set of CPU (processor), memory (DIMM), PCI board and cooling fan
(see page 2-18).
(14)
Module POWER switch
This switch is used to control power supply to a module. The switch is pressed when
removing a failed module.
(15)
Module POWER LED
See page 2-25.
(16)
Module FAULT LED
See page 2-25.
(17)
Processor error LED
See page 2-25.
(18)
I/O error LED
See page 2-25.
(19)
Memory group 3 error LED
See page 2-25.
(20)
Fan 2 error LED
See page 2-25.
(21)
Fan 1 error LED
See page 2-25.
(22)
Memory group 2 error LED
See page 2-25.
(23)
Voltage error LED
See page 2-26.
(24)
Memory group 1 error LED
See page 2-25.
(25)
HCS2 error LED
See page 2-26.
(26)
Power supply unit error LED
See page 2-26.
2-10 General Description
(27)
HCS1 error LED
See page 2-26.
(28)
Heat warning LED
See page 2-26.
(29)
Backup device bays
These bays are used to install optional drives such as DAT or AIT drives.
General Description 2-11
Rack model
(with the front door open)
(1)
POWER LED (green)
This LED illuminates when the power supply is switched on (see page 2-22).
(2)
DISK ACCESS LED (green/amber)
This LED illuminates in green when the internal hard disk drives are accessed. If any internal
hard disk drive is failing, the LED illuminates in amber (see page 2-22).
(3)
FT status LED (green/amber)
This LED indicates the status of the server (see page 2-23).
In the Duplex mode, the LED illuminates in green.
In the Simplex mode, the LED does not illuminate.
If either of the CPU/IO modules fails, the LED illuminates in amber. While memory dump is
being performed, this LED blinks in amber.
(4)
CPU/IO module #1 status LED
This LED indicates the status of the CPU/IO module #1 (see page 2-24). When the module is
running successfully, the LED illuminates in green. If the module has a problem, the LED
blinks in green, illuminates in amber, or blinks in amber.
(5)
CPU/IO module #0 status LED
This LED indicates the status of the CPU/IO module #0 (see page 2-24). When the module is
running successfully, the LED illuminates in green. If the module has a problem, the LED
blinks in green, illuminates in amber, or blinks in amber.
2-12 General Description
(6)
UID LED (blue)
This LED blinks by a command from software.
(7)
POWER switch
This switch is used to power on/off the server. The POWER LED illuminates and the server
is powered on when this switch is pressed once (see page 2-30). The power supply is turned
off when the switch is pressed once again (see page 2-31). Pressing this button for 4 or more
seconds shuts down the server forcefully (see page 4-37).
(8)
DUMP (NMI) switch
This switch is used to perform memory dump.
(9)
USB1 connector
This connector is used for connecting devices supporting the USB1.1 interface.
(10)
Hard disk drive bays
These bays are used to install hard disk drives (see page 8-6).
The numbers following “-” represent SCSI IDs.
(11)
CD-ROM drive
This device is used to read data from CD-ROMs.
(12)
CPU/IO module #0
This is a module with a set of CPU (processor), memory (DIMM), PCI board, and cooling
fan unit (see page 2-24).
(13)
CPU/IO module #1
This is a module with a set of CPU (processor), memory (DIMM), PCI board and cooling fan
(see page 2-24).
(14)
Module POWER switch
This switch is used to control power supply to a module. The switch is pressed when
removing a failed module.
(15)
Module POWER LED
See page 2-25.
(16)
Module FAULT LED
See page 2-25.
(17)
Processor error LED
See page 2-25.
(18)
I/O error LED
See page 2-25.
(19)
Memory group 3 error LED
See page 2-25.
General Description 2-13
(20)
Fan 2 error LED
See page 2-25.
(21)
Fan 1 error LED
See page 2-25.
(22)
Memory group 2 error LED
See page 2-25.
(23)
Voltage error LED
See page 2-26.
(24)
Memory group 1 error LED
See page 2-25.
(25)
HCS2 error LED
See page 2-26.
(26)
Power supply unit error LED
See page 2-26.
(27)
HCS1 error LED
See page 2-26.
(28)
Heat warning LED
See page 2-26.
2-14 General Description
CD- ROM Drive
(1)
Status LED
An LED that stays on while the loaded CD-ROM is accessed.
(2)
CD tray eject button
A button for ejecting the CD tray.
(3)
Manual release hole
When the eject button does not work, insert a metal pin into this hole to forcefully eject the
CD tray.
General Description 2-15
Rear View
2
٤
1
٤
1
٤
4
5
3
٤
٤
٤
3
٤
8
٤
5
٤
6
٤
7
٤
12
٤
8
٤
٤
9
13
٤
16
٤
12
٤
10
٤
14
٤
13
٤
15
٤
12
٤
11
٤
13
٤
Tower model
1
3
٤
٤
4
٤
5
٤
7
٤
14
٤
8
ᴾ٤
15
٤
2
٤
1
٤
3
٤
4
٤
5
٤
13
٤
12
٤
6
٤
11
٤
9
٤
13
٤
10
٤
Rack model
12
٤
2-16 General Description
(1)
Power supply units
Power supply units supply DC power to the server.
(2)
Cooling fan unit 2
(3)
Lock springs
A lock spring prevents a power supply cord from disconnected from this device.
(4)
AC inlets
A power cord is connected to this socket.
(5)
Power supply unit LEDs
A power supply unit LED blinks in green when AC power is supplied via a power cord.
When the server is powered on, the LED illuminates in green (see page 2-27).
(6)
Cooling fan LEDs
A cooling fan LED illuminates in green while a cooling fan unit is working normally. If the
fan unit has a problem, the LED illuminates in amber (see page 2-27).
(7)
USB connectors
From left to right, USB2 and USB3. The connectors are used for connecting devices
supporting the USB1.1 interface.
(8)
Monitor connector
This connector is used to connect a display device
(9)
Management LAN port
This is a LAN port dedicated to management and can be used when a ft remote management
card is installed. The port is used when the remote management function or NEC DianaScope
is used (optional for 320Fa-L, 320Fa-LR models).
(10)
LAN connector 1
This connector is used to connect to a network.
(11)
LAN connector 2
This connector is used to connect to a network.
(12)
LINK/ACT LEDs
A LINK/ACT LED indicates the LAN access status (see page 2-27).
(13)
Speed LEDs
A speed LED indicates the transfer speed of the LAN (see page 2-27).
(14)
PCI-X slot #1
64 bit 100MHz 3.3V PCI-X. A PCI board of low-profile type is attached to this slot.
(15)
PCI-X slot #2
64 bit 100MHz 3.3V PCI-X. A PCI board of low-profile type is attached to this slot.
General Description 2-17
(16)
SCSI connector
This connector is used to connect the internal backup device (optional) and N8803-032 SCSI
board (only for tower model).
2-18 General Description
CPU/IO Module
1)
4
٤
Module handle
2)
Cooling fan unit 1
3)
Heat sink (CPU#1)
4)
PCI slot
5)
DIMM
For more information on slot
numbers, see the figure on next
page.
5
٤
3
٤
2
٤
1
٤
C
C
P
CPU/IO module (without a water-cooling kit)
(320Fa-L/320FaLR model)
General Description 2-19
CPU/IO module board
(1)
DIMM slots
(1)-1 DIMM slotA1
(1)-2 DIMM slot B1
(1)-3 DIMM slot A2
(1)-4 DIMM slot B2
(1)-5 DIMM slot A3
(1)-6 DIMM slot B3
(2)
ft remote management card connector
(3)
LAN1 connector
(4)
LAN2 connector
(5)
Riser card connector
(6)
PCI board slot
(6)-1 PCI board slot (unavailable)
(6)-2 PCI board slot 1
(6)-3 PCI board slot 2
2-20 General Description
(7)
LED board connector
(8)
Fan connector
(9)
Jumper switch for CMOS/password clearing
(10)
Lithium battery
(11)
Processor #1 socket (CPU#1)
(12)
Processor #2 socket (CPU#2)
(13)
HCS-A connector (unavailable)
(14)
Fan connector (unavailable)
(15)
HCS-B connector (unavailable)
(16)
Jumper switch for BMC configuration
General Description 2-21
ft Remote Management Card
(1) Edge connecting to a server
This edge of the card connects to the connector for this card in this device
IMPORTANT:
Attaching this card to a slot or device other than those specified may cause problems. Do
not attach this card to any non-specified slot or device.
(2) Management LAN port
This port supporting 100Mbps/10Mbps is used to connect to a network. You cannot use this
port to connect to a telephone line directly. This port is also used for management by NEC
DianaScope, the management software shipped with the server.
„
LINK/ACT LED
This LED indicates the network port status. When power is supplied to this card and a
connected device such as a hub and they are connected properly, the LED illuminates in
green (LINK). When the network port is sending/receiving data successfully the LED
blinks in green (ACT).
„
Speed LED
This LED indicates the network interface on which network port’s communication
mode is running. When the LED illuminates in amber, it indicates the network interface
is working on 100Mbps. If the LED does not illuminate, it indicates the network
interface is working on 10Mbps.
(3) MAC address
The label containing MAC address information is attached on the other side of this card. You
can also check the MAC address on the BIOS setup screen on the server.
ᴾ
2-22 General Description
LEDs
This section describes indications and meanings of the LEDs on NEC Express5800/ft series.
See “NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF COMPONENTS” (pages 2-6 through 2-17) for the locations
of each LED.
POWER LED
This LED illuminates in green while the server is powered on. When power is off, this LED does
not illuminate. The LED also illuminates in green when one of CPU/IO modules is powered on.
DISK ACCESS LED
This LED indicates the status of hard disk drives loaded on 3.5-inch disk bays. Whenever the hard
disk drives are accessed, the LED blinks in green.
When this LED illuminates in amber, it indicates a hard disk drive has a problem. You can see the
status of the failed hard disk drive by checking the LED of each hard disk drive.
If this LED is blinking in amber, it indicates volumes in hard disk drives are not mirrored. See
“HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC Express5800/ft series”
(page 3-2) to configure mirror volumes.
General Description 2-23
FT Status LED
The LED stays green while the server is running normally in DUPLEX mode. If this LED does not
illuminate or illuminates/blinks in amber, there is something wrong with the server.
ᴾ
The table below shows indications of the FT Status LED and their meanings.
FT status LED
indications
Green
Not on
Description
The device is running
successfully in the Duplex
mode.
Power is off
Performing POST.
The device is running in
the Sipmlex mode
Amber
One of the CPU/IO
modules has a problem.
Blinking in
amber
Memory dump is being
performed.
Action
–
–
Wait for a while; it will illuminate in green and the
mode will become Duplex shortly after POST.
The LED indicates only one of modules is
running. If this status is observed right after the
system startup or activation of a module that has
been stopped, wait for a while. The status will
change to the Duplex mode with the LED lit in
green.
If the LED does not illuminate in green after a few
minutes, a device (LAN, FC-connected storage,
or internal disk) that should be redundant may not
be attached properly. Check to see devices to
make sure they achieve redundancy.
Check the CPU/IO module status LEDs to find the
failing module, and then report your sales agent
which LED of the failing module is blinking.
Wait for memory dump to be completed.
2-24 General Description
CPU/IO Module # 0 Status LED
CPU/IO Module # 1 Status LED
These LEDs illuminate in green when this device is running successfully. If a LED is off, blinks in
green, or illuminates/blinks in amber, the device has a problem.
The table below shows indications of CPU/IO module status LEDs, their meanings, and actions to
be taken.
CPU/IO status
LED indications
Green
Blinking in green
Not on
Amber
Description
The CPU/IO module is
running successfully.
A number of errors that
can be fixed by memory
are occurring.
The CPU/IO module
handle is not firmly fixed.
Power supply is off.
POST is running.
A fatal hardware error has
occurred.
One of the CPU/IO
modules has a problem.
Detected a fatal
temperature error.
Amber (blinking)
Detected a fatal voltage
error.
Power supply has a
problem.
Detected a temperature
error to be warned.
Detected a voltage error
to be warned.
Detected a fan alarm.
Action
–
Although you can continue using the server, it is
recommended to contact your service agent.
Check to see the CPU/IO module is firmly
loaded and then fasten the screws of the handle
to fix the handle.
Wait for a while; the LED will illuminate in green
and the mode will become Duplex shortly after
POST.
Contact your sales agent.
Check the CPU/IO module status LEDs to find
the failing module, and then report your sales
agent which LED of the failing module is
blinking.
Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans
and confirm that the fan cables are connected
firmly. If the LED indication does not change,
contact your sales agent.
Contact your sales agent.
Contact your sales agent.
Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans
and confirm that the fan cables are connected
firmly. If the LED indication does not change,
contact your sales agent.
Contact your sales agent.
Check if dust is accumulated on internal fans,
and confirm that the fan cables are connected
firmly. If the LED indication does not change,
contact your sales agent.
General Description 2-25
UID LED
This LED blinks in blue by NEC ESMPRO Manager, NEC DianaScope or remote management of
WEB server functions to identify the targeted device for maintenance. Use this LED when you have
two or more of this device model on a single rack.
When you are finished with maintenance, switch off the UID LED.
ᴾ
Module POWER LED
This LED illuminates in green while the CPU/IO module is powered on. When the CPU/IO module
is not powered on, this LED is off.
When the LED is illuminating, you cannot remove the module.
Module FAULT LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the CPU/IO module has a problem.
ᴾ
Processor Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the processor of the CPU/IO module has a problem.
I/O Unit Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the I/O of the CPU/IO module has a problem.
ᴾ
Memory Group 1 Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 1 (A1 and B1 DIMM slots) of the CPU/IO
module has a problem.
ᴾ
Memory Group 2 Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 2 (A2 and B2 DIMM slots) of the CPU/IO
module has a problem.
ᴾ
Memory Group 3 Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the memory group 3 (A3 and B3 DIMM slots) of the CPU/IO
module has a problem.
Fan 1 Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the cooling fan unit in the CPU/IO module has a problem.
Fan 2 Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the cooling fan unit located at the rear of this server has a
problem.
2-26 General Description
ᴾ
Power Supply Unit Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the corresponding power supply unit located at the rear of the
server has a problem.
ᴾ
Voltage Error LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the voltage of the CPU/IO module is not within an appropriate
range.
ᴾ
Heart Warning LED
This LED illuminates in amber when the temperature in the CPU/IO module is not within an
appropriate range.
ᴾ
HCS 1 Error LED
Unavailable
ᴾ
HCS 2 Error LED
Unavailable
ᴾ
Access LED on the CD-ROM Drive
This LED illuminates when the installed CD-ROM is being accessed.
ᴾ
Hard Disk Drive LED
Each indication of the DISK LED on a hard disk drive bay has a different meaning.
Blinks in green: the hard disk drive is being accessed.
Illuminates in amber: the hard disk drive has failed.
Illuminates in green and amber in turn: the hard disk drive reconfiguration (rebuild) is ongoing. This
does not indicate the hard disk drive has a problem.
When the rebuilding is completed the LED goes off. If the rebuilding fails, the LED illuminates in
amber.
Blinks in amber: the hard disk drive has a mirror volume for which redundancy is not achieved (i.e.
mirrored configuration is in the degenerated mode).
General Description 2-27
LAN Connector LED
x LINK/ACT LED
The LINK/ACT LED shows the status of a standard network port. It is green if power is
supplied to the main unit and hub, and they are connected correctly (“LINK”). It blinks green
while the network port sends or receives data (ACT).
When the LED does not illuminate during “LINK,” check the condition and connection of
network cables. If there is nothing wrong with the cables, a defect is suspected in the network
(LAN) controller. In this case, contact your sales agent.
x Speed LED
This LED indicates the network interface of the communication mode used by a network port.
1000BASE-T and 100BASE-TX are the supported LAN port types. When this LED illuminates
in amber, the port is operating on 1000BASE-T. When the LED illuminates in green, the port is
operating on 100BASE-TX.
Power Supply Unit LED
Power supply units located at the rear have power supply unit LEDs. When power is supplied to a
power supply unit by connecting a power cord to the AC inlet of the power supply unit, its LED
blinks in green. When the server is powered on, the LED illuminates in green. If the LED does not
illuminate in green or illuminates/blinks in amber, the power supply unit may be failing. Contact
your service agent and ask for replacement of the power supply unit.
ᴾ
Cooling Fan LED
Cooling fan units located at the rear have cooling fan LEDs. While a cooling fan unit is working
normally, its LED illuminates in green. When the LED illuminates in amber, the fan unit may have
a problem. Contact you service agent and ask for the replacement of the cooling fan unit.
ᴾ
2-28 General Description
BASIC OPERATION
This section describes basic operation procedures of NEC Express5800/ft series.
Security lock (front door lock) (for tower model)
The security lock located at the front of this server locks the front door. Open the front door to
power on/off the server, operate the CD-ROM drive or 5.25-inch device, or install/remove a hard
disk drive on a 3.5-inch disk bay or CPU/IO module.
IMPORTANT:
The security lock can be unlocked only by the security keys shipped together.
Some software programs have commands to eject media on the tray of a CD-ROM drive or
device installed in a 5.25-inch device bay. Before you run any of these commands, make sure
the front door is open. If you run the command with the front door closed, the media on the
CD-ROM tray or 5.25-inch device bumps against the door and the server can get damaged.
To open the front door, unlock it and then hold the handle located in the right middle of the door
gently and pull it toward you. When you close the front door, it is recommended to lock it for
security reasons. ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
Front door locked
Front door unlocked
General Description 2-29
Installing/Removing the Front Bezel
When you power on/off the server, operate the CD-ROM drive, or remove/install a hard disk drive
or CPU/IO module, remove the front bezel.
IMPORTANT:
Front bezel cannot be opened without inserting the attached security key into the slot to
release the lock.
1.
Insert the security key into the slot and turn it left with a little pressure to release the lock.
2.
Hold the right side of the front bezel lightly and pull it toward you.
3.
Detach the front bezel from the main unit by sliding it to the left a little to disengage the
tabs from the frame.
To attach the front bezel, engage the tabs on the frame on the left side of the main unit.
After attaching and closing the front bezel, lock it with the key for security.
2-30 General Description
Power ON
To power on NEC Express5800/ft series, press the POWER switch located on the right of the front
panel.
Follow the steps below to turn on the power.
1.
Power on the display unit and other peripheral devices connected to the server.
CHECK:
If the power cord is connected to a power controller like a UPS, make sure that it is
powered on.
2.
Press the power switch located on the right of the front panel.
The POWER LED illuminates in green. After
a while, the "NEC" logo will appear on the
screen.
IMPORTANT:
„
When you connect a power cord to an AC
inlet, wait ten or more seconds to press the
POWER switch.
„
Do not turn off the power before you see
the “NEC” logo and a character below the
logo. It may take one to five minutes for
the logo to appear depending on you server
configuration. ᴾ
While the "NEC" logo is displayed on the screen, NEC Express5800/ft series is
performing a power-on self test (POST) to check itself. For details, see "POST Check"
described later in this chapter. Upon the completion of POST, the OS will start.
CHECK:
If the server finds errors during POST, it will interrupt POST and display the error
message. See Chapter 7.
General Description 2-31
Power OFF
Follow the steps below to turn off the power. If NEC Express5800/ft series is plugged to a UPS, see
manuals included with the UPS or the application that controls the UPS.
1.
Perform a normal shutdown from Linux by running the shutdown command.
Press the POWER switch to power off the server.
2.
Power off all peripheral devices.
POST Check
POST (power-on self test) is a self-test function stored on the motherboard of NEC Express5800/ft
series.
When you power on the server, POST will start automatically to check the motherboard, ECC
memory modules, CPU modules, keyboard, mouse, etc. It also shows startup messages for various
BIOS setup utilities.
According to the factory default settings, the “NEC” logo appears on the display while POST is
being performed. (To view POST’s details, press Esc.)
TIPS:
„
You can view POST details from the beginning without the need to press Esc when the
BIOS menu is displayed: select [System Configuration] - [Advanced], and set [Boot-time
Diagnostic Screen] to "Enabled" (see Chapter 4).
„
You can view the test items and details from a management PC where NEC ESMPRO
Manager or NEC DianaScope is installed.
You do not always need to check POST details. You will need to check messages when:
„
You install a new NEC Express5800/ft series.
„
A failure is suspected.
„
You hear several beeps between the time of the power-on and OS start-up.
„
The display unit shows an error message.
2-32 General Description
Flow of POST
This section walks you through how POST is performed.
1.
When you power on the system, one selected CPU/PCI module will start up.
POST will be performed on this selected CPU/PCI module.
2.
Memory check starts.
A message appears at the upper left of the screen to show that the basic and expanded
memories are being counted. The memory check may take a few minutes to complete
depending on the server’s memory size. Likewise, it may take about one minute for the
screen to appear when the server is rebooted.
Note that if you have replaced the PCI module, the server will perform a reset of the MAC
address, then reboot itself before the memory check.
3.
The server starts processor check, IO check, and initialization.
Several messages appear: they show the ID of the selected CPU/PCI modules, information
on the processor, detection of the keyboard and mouse, etc.
4.
A message appears at the lower left of the screen, prompting for startup of the BIOS setup
utility “SETUP.”
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
You will need to start it when you want to modify the configuration for using the server.
Unless this message appears together with an error message, you do not need to start the
utility to modify the configuration. (If you wait for a few seconds, POST will go on
automatically.)
To start the SETUP utility, press F2 while the above message is displayed. For setting and
parameter functions, see the section of BIOS setup.
When SETUP is completed, the server will reboot itself automatically and perform POST.
5.
A message appears prompting for startup of SCSI BIOS setup utility.
When a built-in SCSI controller is detected, a message will appear prompting for startup
of SCSI BIOS setup utility. (If you wait for a few seconds, POST will go on
automatically.)
If you press Ctrl + N, the SCSI BIOS setup utility will start. For setting and parameter
functions, see “SCSI BIOS (SCSISelect)” (page 4-30).
You will need to use this utility, for example, when you have changed the server’s internal
SCSI device connections. However, you usually do not need to use it.
When SETUP is complete, the server will reboot automatically and perform POST again.
If multiple SCSI controller boards are mounted on the PCI bus, the SCSI BIOS startup
message will appear for these boards in numerical order (PCI #1, PCI #2, PCI #3…).
6.
The screen shows SCSI ID numbers used by the connected SCSI devices.
General Description 2-33
7.
Upon completion of POST, the password entry screen appears prior to OS startup.
The password entry screen will appear after the normal termination of POST only if you
have set a password in the BIOS setup utility “SETUP.”
You can enter a password up to three times. If you enter an incorrect password three times,
the startup will be unsuccessful. In this case, turn off the power and then turn it on again
after waiting 30 seconds to boot the server.
IMPORTANT:
Do not set a password before installing the OS.
8.
Upon completion of POST, the OS will start up.
Behavior at Occurrence of Error
If POST or OS startup does not finish normally, the server will reboot itself automatically.
At the time of reboot, it will select the other CPU/IO module and run POST or OS startup.
In this manner, the server retries POST or OS startup with different combinations of CPU/IO
modules. If POST does not finish normally with any combinations, the server will stop with the
state of DC OFF or Post end with an error message displayed.
While performing retries, the server displays or registers the error types.
For details of error messages, see Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting.”
POST Error Messages
When the server detects an error during POST, it will notify you of the occurrence in the following
manners:
„
Displays an error message on the display unit.
„
Makes a beeping sound.
These notification methods are described in “POST Error Messages” (Page 7-3).
IMPORTANT:
Before you contact your sales agent, write down the error messages and patterns of the beeping
sound. They will serve as helpful information at the time of maintenance.
2-34 General Description
CPU/IO Module Status
The CPU/IO module (#0 or #1) started first is managed as primary, and the module started later is
managed as secondary. If one CPU/IO module is disconnected because of the failure and others, the
other module becomes primary.
The CPU/IO module to be started first is selected depending on the primary/secondary status of
modules when the server was shut down the last time.
The following devices are connected to the primary CPU/IO module by the hardware switch,
although those can be connected to both CPU/IO modules #0 and #1. When one CPU/IO module is
disconnected because of a failure, those are switched to the other module automatically and
continue operating.
„
VGA
„
CD-ROM drive
„
USB device (keyboard, mouse, floppy disk drive)
Floppy Disk Drive (Option)
If you want to use a floppy disk drive with this server, connect N8460-002USB FDD UNIT, which
are available optionally to a USB connector.
This server supports 3.5-inch 2HD (1.44 MB) and 2DD (720KB) floppy disks.
Insert/Remove Floppy Disk
Before inserting a floppy disk into the drive, make sure that NEC Express5800/ft series is on (the
POWER LED illuminates).
Insert a floppy disk into the drive firmly until it snaps in place. The eject button of the drive is then
raised slightly.
CHECK:
„
You cannot use 1.2 MB-formatted disks.
„
If you insert an unformatted disk, you will see a message that the disk cannot be
read or that needs formatting. To format a floppy disk, see your OS manual.
„
If you power on or restart NEC Express5800/ft series with a floppy disk left in the drive, the
server will access the floppy disk to start the system. Unless a system exits on the FD, the
server will be unable to start.
„
When using a USB floppy disk drive, the access to the floppy disk is delayed on rare
occasions if the display graphic load is high because a moving picture is being played. In
such a case, retry the operation with the floppy disk inside the floppy disk drive.
General Description 2-35
To remove a floppy disk from the drive, press the eject button.
CHECK:
Before removing a floppy disk, make sure that the floppy disk access LED is off. If you eject a
floppy disk while the LED is on, the stored data could be damaged.
Use of Floppy Disk
You may need to store important data on floppy disks. Since the floppy disk is a very delicate
medium, you must handle it with extra care:
„
Push the floppy disk gently into place.
„
Attach the label on a proper position.
„
Do not use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the floppy disk.
„
Do not open the protective shutter.
„
Do not use the floppy disk in a dusty place.
„
Do not place anything on the floppy disk.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures
(e.g., near a heater).
„
Keep away from cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the floppy disk near water or chemicals.
„
Keep away from magnetic objects.
„
Do not clip disks. Be careful not to drop.
„
Store floppy disks in a protective case where they are kept away from magnetic waves or
dust.
„
To prevent data from being erased accidentally, the
floppy disk has a write-protect notch. When the disk is
write-protected, you can read data, but you cannot write
the data or format the disk. It is recommendable to
write-protect floppy disks that contain important data
except when you write data to the floppy disk. To
write-protect a 3.5-inch floppy disk, slide the
write-protect notch located on its back.
„
The floppy disk is a very delicate storage medium. Dust or changes in temperature could
cause data to be lost. Data loss could also be caused by faulty operation and computer
trouble. To avoid such possible data loss, it is recommendable to back up important data
regularly. (Be sure to make back-up copies of the floppy disks that are included with NEC
Express5800/ft series.)
2-36 General Description
CD-ROM Drive
NEC Express5800/ft series has a CD-ROM drive on the front panel. It is a device used to read data
from a CD-ROM (compact disc read-only memory). Compared to a floppy disk, a CD-ROM allows
for larger volume and fast data readout.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of a
burn, injury, or damage to physical assets. For details, see “PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFETY” in Chapter 1.
„ Do not leave the CD tray ejected.
Insert/Remove CD-ROM
Follow the steps below to set a CD-ROM.
1.
Before you insert a CD-ROM, make sure that the server is powered on. When the server is
powered on, the LED illuminates in green.
2.
Press the CD-tray-eject button located in the front of
the CD-ROM drive. The tray is then ejected.
3.
Hold the CD-ROM with its signaling side facing the
tray.
4.
As shown in the figure on the right, place the CD-ROM
on the tray and press lightly on the center to lock.
5.
Push the front side of the tray gently to the drive-closed
position.
IMPORTANT:
If you hear noise while running the CD-ROM drive,
reset the CD-ROM.
General Description 2-37
To remove the CD-ROM, press the CD-tray-eject button as you did
in setting the CD-ROM.
ᴾ
When the access LED illuminates in orange, it indicates the
CD-ROM is being accessed. Make sure the access LED is not
illuminating in orange before you press the CD-tray-eject button.
Press the locking part in the center of the tray and pick the CD-ROM gently. When you have
removed the CD-ROM, push the tray to the drive-closed position.
When you cannot eject a CD-ROM
When you cannot eject the CD-ROM from the server even by pressing the eject button, follow the
steps below to eject it:
1. Press the POWER switch to power off this server (i.e. the POWER/SLEEP LED is off).
2. Use a metal pin of about 1.2 mm in diameter and 100 mm
long (alternatively, you can use a fairly large paper clip after
straightening). Insert it gently into the manual release hole
located at the low front side of the server until the tray is
ejected.
ᴾ
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use a toothpick, plastic pin, or other breakable
objects.
„
If you cannot eject the CD-ROM by following the steps above, contact your sales agent.
3. Hold the tray and pull it out.
4. Take out the CD-ROM.
5. Push the tray back.
2-38 General Description
Handling CD-ROMs
Observe the following when you use a CD-ROM on NEC Express5800/ft series:
„
As for a disk such as a noncompliant “copy-protected CD,” we shall not guarantee that
you can use a CD player to play it with this server.
„
Be careful not to drop the CD-ROM.
„
Do not bend or place anything on the CD-ROM.
„
Do not attach labels on the CD-ROM.
„
Do not touch the signal side (blank side).
„
Place the CD-ROM gently on the tray with the printed side up.
„
Do not scratch, or use a pencil or ballpoint pen to write on the CD-ROM.
„
Keep away from cigarette smoke.
„
Do not leave the CD-ROM in a place that is subject to direct sunlight or high temperatures
(e.g., due to a heater).
„
If the CD-ROM gets dirty with dust or fingerprints, wipe it gently from its center to edge
with a dry soft cloth.
„
When you clean the CD-ROM, use a CD cleaner. Do not use a record cleaner (spray),
benzine, or thinner.
„
Store the CD-ROM in a protective case when not in use.
Chapter 3
Linux Setup and Operation
This chapter describes setup procedures to make NEC Express5800/ft series ready for use.
3-2 Linux Setup and Operation
HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT
ON THE NEC Express5800/ft series
In the NEC Express5800/ft series, all built-in disks need RAID configuration. Configure
RAID 1 using software for the NEC Express5800/ft series.
The hard disks on the same slot location of the PCI module configure RAID. As shown in
the following figure, hard disk drives in Slot 0 and Slot 3, Slot 1 and Slot 4, Slot 2 and Slot
5 should be paired to configure RAID.
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slots to execute the mirroring process
Slot 0
IMPORTANT:
When adding disks or reconfiguring RAID, the status of each disk becomes “resync” or
“recovery.” Do not insert/remove disks, turn off the power, or restart the system during
this status. Wait until the status of “resync” or “recovery” is finished. You can check
the status of RAID using ftdiskadm described later. For details, see the separate volume
of User’s Guide (Setup).
Two hard disk drives which configure RAID 1 must have the same disk capacity. Also,
two hard disk drives must have the same logical structure.
Perform operations for built-in SCSI disks, such as mounting a disk, to devices (md) for
RAID by software.
With the standard configuration at the time of shipment, the boot disks are inserted to the
Slot 0 and Slot 3.
Linux Setup and Operation 3-3
REPLACING 3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE
Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk. If the hard disk fails, it should
be replaced with new device with the server powered-on.
How to Locate Failed Disks
This section describes a procedure to locate failed disks.
1.
Open [Data Viewer] from ESMPRO Manager.
If trouble occurs, the color changes from green to red.
In this case, you will notice that there is trouble with both the SCSI Enclosures
(ID: 41) and (ID: 42).
2.
Check the SCSI Enclosures (ID: 41) and (ID: 42) on the tree.
See the path information in [General Information] of [SCSI Slot] to locate a
group of 3.5-inch hard disk drive bays that corresponds to each enclosure.
The table below shows the path information on Groups 1 and 2:
Slot
Group1
Group2
PCI module
10
11
SCSI adapter
5
5
SCSI bus
0
0
3-4 Linux Setup and Operation
3.
See the path information in [General Information] of [SCSI Slot (ID: 41/1)].
It shows that PCI module, SCSI adapter, and SCSI bus are 10, 5, and 0,
respectively.
This allows you to find that SCSI Slot (ID: 41/1) belongs to Group 1. SCSI slots
under SCSI Enclosure (ID: 41) correspond to Group 1. Therefore, Group 2
corresponds to SCSI slots under SCSI Enclosure (ID: 42).
You will find that the failed disk located in the SCSI slot (ID: 41/2) is the second
disk of Group 1.
Linux Setup and Operation 3-5
Restoring Redundant Configuration Manually
This section describes procedure to change the built-in disk on which failures occurred and
re-establish the dual configuration of hard disks.
IMPORTANT:
„
Manual restoration of redundant configuration must be performed by a root user.
„
While recovery operation of RAID, the status of two disks configuring RAID
become “resync” or “recovery” to build RAID for a while. Do not stop or restart
the system until that status is finished.
„
Before recovering the boot disks (Slot0 and Slot3) from the system, remove the
registration of the disk device that diskdump uses, and then register them again
after the boot disks are recovered. Referring to “DUMP INITIALIZATION,”
check the diskdump partition, remove the registration, initialize the disk dump
partition, and register disk devices again.
1.
Select “RAID” – “Remove Half Disk” of ftdiskadm to separate the disk
specified by the slot number from the RAID. For boot disks (Slot0 and Slot3),
remove the registration of the disk devices that diskdump uses.
2.
Select “Bring Down” – “SCSI” of ftdiskadm to separate the disk specified by
the slot number from the system.
3.
Remove the disk from the system and then insert a new disk.
4.
Select “Bring Up” – “SCSI” of ftdiskadm to add the disk specified by the slot
number to the system.
5.
Use “Repair Disk” of ftdiskadm to recover RAID.
The following is an example from the separation of the built-in disk inserted to
the slot 3 to the recovery. For boot disks (Slot0 and Slot3), initialize the disk
partition and register the disk devices again after RAID is recovered.
(Separating the disk from RAID)
#diskdumpctl –u /dev/hadb6
<<<For boot disks (Slot0 and Slot3), remove the registration of the
disk devices that diskdump uses.>>>
#ftdiskadm
Command Action
1 => RAID
2 => SCSI
9 Quit
Command:2
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
3-6 Linux Setup and Operation
4
5
6
9
Remove Full Disks
Status(Raid)
Status(All Disks)
<= Return
Command:2
[Remove Half Disk]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:3
mdadm:
mdadm:
mdadm:
mdadm:
mdadm:
mdadm:
set
hot
set
hot
set
hot
/dev/hadb2 faulty in /dev/md1
removed /dev/hadb2
/dev/hadb3 faulty in /dev/md2
removed /dev/hadb3
/dev/hadb1 faulty in /dev/md0
removed /dev/hadb1
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:5
<<<Confirm that the disk is disconnected from RAID>>>
[Status(Raid)]
Name Partition Status Member
-------------------------------------------------md1 /
simplex (0)hada2
md2
simplex (0)hada3
md0 /boot
simplex (0)hada1
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:9
(Disconnecting a disk from the system and adding a new disk)
Command Action
1 => RAID
2 => SCSI
9 Quit
Command:2
Command Action
Linux Setup and Operation 3-7
1
2
3
9
Bring Down(System Disk)
Bring Up(System Disk)
Status(System Disks)
<= Return
Command:1
[Bring Down(System Disk)]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:3
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:3
<<< Confirm that the disk is disconnected from the system>>>
[SCSI DISK STATUS]
-- SYSTEM -slot name use serial
path
0
hada 2
V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 h1c0t0l0ACT h7c0t0l0HOT
1
2
3
4
5
<<<Confirm that no disk is configured to the target slot and replace
the disk.>>>
<<<The following is an example of a RAID recovery procedure>>>
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:2
[Bring Up(System Disk)]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:3
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:3
<<<Confirm that the disk is added to the system>>>
[SCSI DISK STATUS]
-- SYSTEM -slot name use serial
path
0
hada 2
V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 h1c0t0l0ACT h7c0t0l0HOT
1
2
3
hadb 0
V3W1RK5A0050B5CK040D h2c0t3l0ACT h8c0t3l0HOT
4
-
3-8 Linux Setup and Operation
5
-
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:9
(Restoring RAID)
Command Action
1 => RAID
2 => SCSI
9 Quit
Command:1
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:3
[Repair Disk]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:3
Creating the partitions of /dev/hadb
mdadm: hot added /dev/hadb1
mdadm: hot added /dev/hadb2
mdadm: hot added /dev/hadb3
md0 is under repair.
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:5
<<< Confirm that the duplication process is started>>>
[Status(Raid)]
Name Partition Status
Member
-------------------------------------------------md1 /
resync=DELAYED (0)hada2 -(3)hadb2
md2
recovery55.8%
(0)hada3 -(3)hadb3
md0 /boot
duplex
(0)hada1 (3)hadb1
Linux Setup and Operation 3-9
<<<Perform recovery to each md device. After a while, use the following
command and check the status again.>>>
#service diskdmp initialformat
#diskdumpctl /dev/hadb6
<<<For boot disks (Slot0 and Slot3), initialize the diskdump partition
and regisrer the disk devices again.>>>
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:5
[Status(Raid)]
Name Partition Status Member
-------------------------------------------------md1 /
duplex (0)hada2 (3)hadb2
md2
duplex (0)hada3 (3)hadb3
md0 /boot
duplex (0)hada1 (3)hadb1
<<<If each md device’s status is duplex, disk duplication is completed.>>>
TIPS:
„ If you attempt to start ftdiskadm more than once at a time, “Cannot start” is
displayed. If this message is displayed even when only one ftdiskadm is started, it
may have been terminated without clearing the information. In such a case, run
ftdiskcleanup and then start ftdiskadm.
„ The trace log of ftdiskadm is recorded to the /var/log/ftdiskadm directory. If the files
occupy a large part of the disk space, delete them from the oldest.
„ Boot disks are inserted into the Slot0 and Slot3 normally. If you can only boot the
system in the simplex mode, insert a boot disk into the Slot0 and boot the system.
IMPORTANT:
Never use the command that directly deletes SCSI disk for separating a SCSI disk. If
you do, RAID cannot be recovered when the deleted SCSI disk is included in the md
device.
3-10 Linux Setup and Operation
SETTING THE VIDEO MODE
This section describes how to configure the video mode on the server. The server needs to
be restarted in order to enable the video mode setting.
1.
Log on with the root authority and open /boot/grub/grub.conf with an editor.
IMPORTANT:
grub.conf is an extremely imporatant file for the system.
In the worst case, you may not be able to start the system. Pay extra attention when
editing the file.
2.
Change the following setting within grub.conf. (The information such as the kernel
version “2.6.9-34.17AXsmp” is just an example. Change these values to the actual
values of your environment.)
title Asianux HAS (2.6.9-34.17AXsmp)
root (hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz-2.6.9-34.17AXsmp ro root=/dev/md1 vga=0x323 video=vesafb:off
initrd /initrd-2.6.9-34.17AXsmp.HAS.img
(1)
(1) vga=0x323 (0x323 is an option)
Configure the video mode common to the console and X server.
Specify an appropriate value from the table below.
Value
0x317
0x318
0x323
0x314
0x315
0x31A
0x31B
Screen size
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
1024 x 768
800 x 600
800 x 600
1280 x1024
1280 x1024
Color
16bpp
24bpp
32bpp
16bpp
24bpp
16bpp
24bpp
It is recommended to set 0x317, 0x318, or 0x323. If other value is specified and
the monitor does not support it, the screen may not be displayed properly.
3.
Restart the server.
Linux Setup and Operation 3-11
Notes
z
X server that supports the ft feature always operates in the same video mode as the
console.
z
The Xrandr feature is not supported. You cannot change screen resolution from X
server.
z
“IPMI Management Utility” cannot be used.
z
“OpenIPMI” cannot be used.
z
For using X on the console, run the system at the run level 5 and perform graphical
logon. If X is not started at the system startup (run level 3), log on as root and enter
“init 5” to the command line on thte text console to start X.
3-12 Linux Setup and Operation
DUMP INITIALIZATION
1. Checking partition for diskdump
1-1. Check /var/crash (Dump file storage area)
# df
Filesystem
/dev/md1
/dev/md0
none
/dev/md3
Note:
1K-blocks
40313912
194366
1035356
10080364
Used Available Use% Mounted on
5152136 33113896 14% /
17729
166602 10% /boot
0 1035356 0%
/dev/shm
1089312 8478988 12%
/var/crash
Unless you have created /var/crash partition, it does not exist. The dump file
will be created on the partition that the root file system exists.
1-2. Check diskdump partition (Dump file creation area)
#fdisk /dev/md*
Run “p print the partition table.”
* When HAS is loaded, run it at “fdisk /dev/had*.”
* Check that dump partitions exist as many as the disks in fdisk.
Device Boot
/dev/hada1
/dev/hada2
/dev/hada3
/dev/hada4
/dev/hada5
/dev/hada6
Start
1
26
5125
5380
5380
6655
End
25
5124
5379
8899
6654
7929
Blocks
200781
40957717+
2048287+
28274400
10241406
10241406
Id
fd
fd
fd
5
fd
83
System
Linux raid autodetect
Linux raid autodetect
Linux raid autodetect
Extended
Linux raid autodetect
Linux
Check the partition which is created for diskdump and the ID is 83.
In this example hada6 is the dump partition.
Note:
If 1-1 and 1-2 do not exist, reinstall the OS. Create a dump partition in the
phase of partition creation during installation.
2. Initializing the diskdump partition
2-1. Edit /etc/sysconfig/diskdump
Open the file in:
#vi /etc/sysconfig/diskdump
and then add:
DEVICE=/dev/hada6:/dev/hadb6
and comment out other lines.
For had*, specify the value of the partition you checked in 1-2.
*
Even when the disk is expanded, this file needs to be edited.
Linux Setup and Operation 3-13
2-2. Restart the dump partition
Run the following command to reboot the dump driver.
# /etc/init.d/diskdump restart
3. Formatting the dump partition
Run the following command to format the dump partition.
# /etc/init.d/diskdump initialformat
4. Registering a device to diskdump or removing it
4-1. Register a dump driver
# /usr/sbin/diskdumpctl /dev/hada6
4-2. Remove a dump driver
Run the following command to reboot the dump driver.
# /usr/sbin/diskdumpctl –u /dev/hada6
3-14 Linux Setup and Operation
KEYBOARD SETTINGS FOR X WINDOW SYSTEM
The keyboard for X Window System is set to Japanese by default. (Keyboard model: jp106,
Keyboard layout: jp)
If you use a non-Japanese keyboard, follow the procedure below to change your keyboard
settings.
2. Open “/etc/X11/xgem.conf” on an editor.
Section "InputDevice"
# Specify which keyboard LEDs can be user-controlled (eg, with xset(1))
#
Option "Xleds"
"1 2 3"
# To disable the XKEYBOARD extension, uncomment XkbDisable.
#
Option "XkbDisable"
# To customize the XKB settings to suit your keyboard, modify the
# lines below (which are the defaults). For example, for a non-U.S.
# keyboard, you will probably want to use:
#
Option "XkbModel"
"pc102"
# If you have a US Microsoft Natural keyboard, you can use:
#
Option "XkbModel"
"microsoft"
#
# Then to change the language, change the Layout setting.
# For example, a german layout can be obtained with:
#
Option "XkbLayout"
"de"
# or:
#
Option "XkbLayout"
"de"
#
Option "XkbVariant"
"nodeadkeys"
#
# If you'd like to switch the positions of your capslock and
# control keys, use:
#
Option "XkbOptions"
"ctrl:swapcaps"
# Or if you just want both to be control, use:
#
Option "XkbOptions"
"ctrl:nocaps"
#
Identifier "Keyboard0"
Driver
"kbd"
Option
"XkbModel" "jp106"
Option
"XkbLayout" "jp"
EndSection
Linux Setup and Operation 3-15
3. Change the underlined values on the previous page to those below. The settings may
vary depending on the keyboard you use.
<For US keyboard>
[Before changed]
Option
"XkbModel" "jp106"
Option
"XkbLayout" "jp"
[After changed]
Option
"XkbModel" "us101"
Option
"XkbLayout" "us"
<For the same setting as text console>
[Before changed]
Option
"XkbModel" "jp106"
Option
"XkbLayout" "jp"
[After changed]
Option
"XkbDisable"
4. Restart X Window System (with Ctrl + Alt + BackSpace) after changing the
settings.
IMPORTANT:
„ Change only the underlined sections. If you change the "Screen" section, the setting
of X Window System may become incorrect.
3-16 Linux Setup and Operation
ACCESSING USB FDD
Access USB FDD after the device is mounted.
[How to mount]
# mount /media/floppy
TIPS:
If mount point is not automatically created, the service needs to be started again.
Run the following commands sequentially to start the service:
/etc/init.d/messagebus restart
/etc/init.d/haldaemon restart
Notes
When accessing USB FDD by directly specifying the sd device name as in the example
below, the device name may be changed if the system is disconnected or connected, and
the data on partitions of other disks may be corrupted unintentionally.
[Example]
When commands are run on USB FDD after connecting the system by using the same sd
device name as the one specified before it was disconnected, data on the partition of the
disk A may be corrupted.
How the sd device name changes:
Disk A
USB FDD
Disk B
Before disconnecting the system
sda
sdb
sdc
After disconnecting the system
none
sda
sdc
After connecting the system
sdb
sda
sdc
1) Before disconnecting the system:
# tar cf /dev/sdb files
Æ Files are written in USB FDD.
2) After connecting the system
# tar cf /dev/sdb files
Files are written into the disk A unintentionally Æ Partitions are corrupted
CHECK:
It is a specification of the NEC Express5800/ft series to change the device name of the
device file when incorporating and disconnecting the system.
Chapter 4
System Configuration
This chapter describes Basic Input Output System (BIOS) configuration.
When you install the Express5800 fault tolerant server for the first time or install/remove optional
devices, thoroughly read this chapter for better understanding and correct setups.
4-2 System Configuration
SYSTEM BIOS ~ SETUP ~
The SETUP utility is provided to make basic hardware configuration for the server. This utility is
pre-installed in the flash memory of the server and ready to run.
The server is configured with the correct parameters using the SETUP utility and shipped in the best
conditions. Thus, you do not need to use the SETUP utility in most cases. However, you might wish
to use the SETUP utility in the cases described below.
IMPORTANT:
„
The SETUP utility is intended for system Administrator use only.
„
The SETUP utility allows you to set a password. The server is provided with two levels of
password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor password, you can view and change all
system parameters of the SETUP utility. With the User password, system parameters
available for viewing and changing are limited.
„
Do not set any password before installing the OS.
„
The server contains the latest version of the SETUP utility. Dialog boxes appearing on your
SETUP utility, thus, may differ from descriptions in this User's Guide. If you find anything
unclear, see the online help or ask your sales agent.
System Configuration 4-3
Starting SETUP Utility
Powering on the server starts POST (Power On Self-Test) and displays its check results. If the NEC
logo is displayed, press Esc.
After a few seconds, either of the following messages appears at bottom left on the screen
depending on your system configuration.
Press <F2> to enter SETUP
Press <F2> to enter SETUP or Press <F12> to boot from Network
You may see either of the following messages at bottom left on the screen when POST terminates.
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP
Press F2 to start the SETUP utility and display its Main menu.
If you have previously set a password with the SETUP utility, the password entry screen appears.
Enter the password.
Enter password:[
]
Up to three password entries will be accepted. If you fail to enter the password correctly for three
consecutive times, the server halts. (You can no longer proceed.) Power off the server.
TIPS:
The server is provided with two levels of password: Supervisor and User. With the Supervisor
password, you can view and change all system configurations. With the User password, the
system configurations you can view or change are limited.
4-4 System Configuration
Description of On-Screen Items and Key Usage
Use the following keyboard keys to work with the SETUP utility. (Key functions are also listed at
the bottom of the screen.)
Shows the current menu.
Options to be
configured
Online help
window
Denotes there are
submenus
Explanation of keys
Cursor (n, p):
Cursor (m, o):
–
+
Enter
Esc
F1:
F9:
Parameters (selected parameters are
highlighted)
Selects an item on the screen. The highlighted item is currently
selected.
Selects the Main, Advanced, Security, System Hardware, Boot, or
Exit menu.
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item to the
previous value.
Changes the value (parameter) of the selected item to next value.
Displays a submenu or chooses the selected parameter.
Displays the previous screen.
Press F1 when you need help on SETUP operations. The help
screen for SETUP operations appears. Press Esc to return to the
previous screen.
Shows the following:
Setup Confirmation
Load default configuration now?
[Yes]
[No]
ᴾ
If you select “Yes” and then press the Enter key, all items in the
setup are set to default values. If you select “No” and then press
either the Enter or Esc key, the status before pressing the F9
key is restored.
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
System Configuration 4-5
F10:
Shows the following:
ᴾ
If you select “Yes” and then press the Enter key, the setup will
complete with all changes you have made saved. If you select
“No” and then press either the Enter or Esc key, the status
before pressing the F10 key is restored.
ᴾ
4-6 System Configuration
Configuration Examples
The following describes examples of configuration required to use software-link features or for
system operations.
Link with Management Software
To control power supply of the server with NEC ESMPRO Manager via the network
<Using the LAN connector on the motherboard>
Select [Advanced]ĺ [Advanced Chipset Control]ĺ [Wake On LAN]ĺ [Enabled]
<Using the PCI LAN card>
Select [Advanced]ĺ [Advanced Chipset Control]ĺ [Wake On PME]ĺ [Enabled]ᴾ
ᴾ
UPS
To link power supply with the UPS
„
To power on the server when power is supplied from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS if the POWER
switch was used to power off
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Last State].
„
To keep the server off-powered even when power is supplied from the UPS
Select [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [StayOff].
Keyboard
To set Num Lock and key repeat
Select [Advanced] - [NumLock].
System Configuration 4-7
Security
To set passwords on the BIOS level
Select [Security] - [Set Supervisor Password] and enter a password.
Set Supervisor password first, then User password.
To enable/disable the POWER switch
Select [Security] - [Switch Inhibit] - [Disabled]. (POWER switch enabled)
Select [Security] - [Switch Inhibit] - [Enabled]. (POWER switch disabled)
IMPORTANT:
Masking the POWER switch disables forced shutdown as well as power on/off using the
POWER switch.
Optional PCI–related devices
To enable Option ROM of the PCI card (option) installed on the server
Select [Advanced] - [PCI Configuration] - [PCI Slot n] - [Option rom] - [Enabled].
n: Slot number to install the board
Boot
To change the boot order of devices connected to the server
Select [Boot] and specify the boot order.
To display POST check results
Select [Advanced] - [Boot-time Diagnostic Screen] - [Enabled].
You can also press Esc while the NEC log is on the screen to display POST check results.
To control from the HW console
„
Remote operation via LAN
Select [Server] - [Console Redirection], and make necessary settings.
Memory
To check the installed memory (DIMM) status:
Select [Advanced] - [Memory Configuration] and check the status indications.
4-8 System Configuration
Saving the Configuration Data
To save the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Saving Changes]
To discard changes to the BIOS configuration data
Select [Exit] - [Exit Discarding Changes]
To restore the default BIOS configuration data (the data may differ from the factory-setting)
Select [Exit] - [Load Setup Defaults].
System Configuration 4-9
Menu and Parameter Descriptions
The SETUP utility has the following six major menus:
„
Main
„
Advanced
„
Security
„
Server
„
Boot
„
Exit
To configure detailed settings of functions, select a submenu from the above menus. Below
describes configurable functions and parameters and the factory settings displayed in the screen for
each menu.
Main
Start the SETUP utility to display the Main menu.
When you select a menu with the “Ź” mark and press the Enter key, its submenu appears.
<Example>
4-10 System Configuration
Available options in the Main and descriptions are listed below.
Option
System Time
System Date
Parameter
HH:MM:SS
MM/DD/YYYY
Description
Specify the system time.
Specify the system date.
[
] factory - set
IMPORTANT:
Check and adjust the system clock before operation in the following conditions.
- After transporting the equipment
- After storing the equipment
- After the equipment halt under the conditions which is out of the guranteed environment
conditions (Temperature: 10 to 35°C, Humidity: 20 to 80%).
Check the system clock once in a month. It is recommended to operate the system clock using a
time server (NTP server) if it is installed on the system which requires high level of time accuracy.
If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by, though the system clock
adjustment is performed, contact your sales agent.
System Configuration 4-11
Processor Settings
When you select “Processor Settings” in the Main menu, the following screen appears.
ᴾ
Refer to the table below for information on options.
Option
Processor Speed Setting
ʊ
Processor 1 CPUID
CPUID
Processor 1 L2 Cache
ʊ
Processor 2 CPUID
CPUID
[Not Installed]
Processor 2 L2 Cache
ʊ
Hyper-Threading Technology
Disabled
[Enabled]
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Continuous]
Discrete
Execute Disable Bit
Cache Setting
Parameter
Description
Displays the speed of the processor.
When the processor 1 in installed, its
CPU ID is displayed. If the system
supports "Hyper-Threading
Technology,” the ID of a physical
processor but not logical processor
appears here.
Displays the cache size of the L2 of
the processor 1.
When the processor 2 is installed, its
CPU ID is displayed. If it the
processor is not installed, "Not
Installed" appears.
Displays the caches size of the L2 of
the processor 2.
Specify whether or not to enable
Hyper-Threading Technology.
Specify whether or not to enable the
Execute Disable Bit feature.
Change the MTRR setting of the
processor. If it takes time to display
screen, set “Discrete.”
[
]: Factory-set
4-12 System Configuration
Advanced
Move the cursor onto "Advanced" to display the Advanced menu.
There is no configurable item on the Advanced menu screen below. Display each sub menu and
make settings on the sub menu screen. Select an option with the "Ź" mark and press Enter to
display its submenu.
See the table below for setup options on the screen.
Option
Boot-time
Diagnostic Screen
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Reset
Configuration Date
[No]
Yes
NumLock
On
[Off]
Description
Specify whether to display the Power On
Self-Test (POST) screen at start-up. If
"Disabled" is selected, the NEC logo
appears while POST is in progress. (To
display POST check results, press Esc and
F2.)
If "Console Redirection” is set to "Enabled,”
this option is unconditionally set to
"Enabled.”
If you select [Yes], the system configuration
data will be cleared at next boot with this
option set automatically to [No].
Specify whether or not to enable NumLock
at system startup.
Your Setting
[
]: Factory-set
System Configuration 4-13
Memory Configuration
When you select “Memory Configuration” in the Advanced menu, the following screen appears.
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
Refer to the table below for information on options.
ᴾ
Option
Memory Size
DIMM Group #1 Status
Parameter
㧩
Normal
[Not Installed]
Description
Displays the memory size.
Displays the memory status.
DIMM Group #2 Status
Normal
[Not Installed]
Displays the memory status.
DIMM Group #3 Status
Normal
[Not Installed]
Displays the memory status.
Extended RAM Step
1MB
1KB
Every location
[Disabled]
Set the time interval between memory tests.
Depending on the mounted memory
amount, it may take about several tens of
minutes to several hours to complete the
test. Set “Disabled” for normal operation.
[
]: Factory-set
4-14 System Configuration
PCI Configuration
When you select “PCI Configuration” in the Advanced menu, the following screen appears. If you
select a menu with the “Ź” mark and press Enter, its submenu appears.
Refer to the table below for information on options.ᴾ ᴾ ᴾ
Option
PCI Slot 1 Option ROM
PCI Slot 2 Option ROM
PCI Slot 3 Option ROM*
Parameter
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
Enabled
[Disabled]
ᴾ
Description
If [Enabled] is selected, the extended ROM of the
slot device will be initialized.
[
*
Not provided for the 320Fa-L and 320Fa-LR models.
]: Factory-set
System Configuration 4-15
SCSI Controller
When you select “SCSI Controller” in the Advanced menu, the following screen appears.
Refer to the table below for information on options.
ᴾᴾ
ᴾ
Option
SCSI Controller
ᴾ
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabledᴾ
Description
If “Disabled” is selected, chip
stays in the reset status. In this
status, the SCSI Controller is
totally disabled and not
recognized by the PnP OS.
Option ROM Scan
ᴾ
[Enabled]
Disabledᴾ
If “Enabled” is selected, the
extended ROM of the device
will be initialized.
ᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾᴾ [
ᴾ
]: Factory-set
4-16 System Configuration
LAN Controller
When you select “LAN Controller” in the Advanced menu, the following screen appears.
Refer to the table below for information on options.
Option
LAN Controller
ᴾ
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabledᴾ
Description
If “Disabled” is selected, chip stays
in the reset status. In this status, the
LAN Controller is totally disabled
and not recognized by the PnP OS.
Option ROM Scan
ᴾ
[Enabled]
Disabledᴾ
If “Enabled” is selected, the
extended ROM of the device will be
initialized.
[
]: Factory-set
System Configuration 4-17
Advanced Chipset Control
When you select “Advanced Chipset Control” in the Advanced menu, the following screen appears.
Refer to the table below for information on options.
Option
Wake on LAN
ᴾ
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabledᴾ
Wake On PME
ᴾ
[Disabled]
Enabledᴾ
OS Debug
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Select whether or not to enable the
remote power-on function via the
LAN connector on motherboard.
Select whether or not to enable the
remote power-on function via the
PCI LAN card.
Select whether or not to enable the
OS Debug mode. Typically, select
Disable.
[
]: Factory-set
4-18 System Configuration
Security
Move the cursor onto "Security" to display the Security menu.
Select "Set Supervisor Password" or "Set User Password" and press Enter to display the following
pop-up screen. The screen below shows when "Set Supervisor Password" is selected.
Set a password on this pop-up screen. Enter a password of up to seven alphanumeric characters and
symbols from the keyboard.
IMPORTANT:
„
User password setup is not available before Supervisor password setup.
„
Do not set any password before installing the OS.
„
If you forget your password, contact you sales agent.
System Configuration 4-19
See the table below for setup options on the screen.
Option
User Password
is
Supervisor
Password is
Set User
Password
Parameter
[Clear]
Set
[Clear]
Set
[Enter]
Set Supervisor
Password
[Enter]
Password on
boot
[Disabled]
Enabled
Switch Inhibit
[Disabled]
Enabled
Description
Indicates User password setup status (view only).
Indicates User password setup status (view only).
Press Enter to display the user password entry
screen. With a user password, accessing the
SETUP menus is restricted. This option is
available only if the Supervisor Password is
specified.
Press Enter to display the supervisor password
entry screen. This option is available only when
you log into the SETUP utility with the supervisor
password.
Specify whether to request a password entry at
boot-up. User password setup is required
beforehand.
Enable or disable the POWER switch on the
server. If you select to enable, the switch will be
disabled.
[
]: Factory-set
IMPORTANT:
If you have logged in SETUP by using the Supervisor Password, you can check and change all
settings. If you have logged in SETUP by using UserPassword, you see the settings but cannot
make changes on the settings except System Time, System Date and User Password of Main.
4-20 System Configuration
Server
Move the cursor onto [Server] to display the Server menu.
The following describes options you can configure in the Server menu and their functions.
Select an option with the "Ź" mark and press Enter to display its submenu.
Refer to the table below for information on options.
Option
Thermal
Sensor
BMC IRQ
Post Error
Pause
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Disabled
[IRQ 11]
[Disabled]
Enabled
AC LINK
Stay Off
[Last State]
Power On
Power ON
Delay Time
[0]-255
Description
Enable or disable the thermal sensor
functions.
Set the IRQ of BMC interruption.
Set whether or not to pause POST at the end
of POST if an error has occurred during
POST execution.
Specify the AC LINK feature by selecting the
status of the power supply unit of the server
when the AC power supply restarts. (See the
table on the next page for details.)
Configure the DC ON delay time if AC LINK
is set to “Power On” or “Last State” (unit:
second).
[
]: Factory-set
* “Console Redirection” is shown only when the N8815-001/001A ft Remote Management Card is
installed.
System Configuration 4-21
The table below lists how selections for "AC LINK" determine the power status of the server when
the power supply to the server restarts.
State before powered off
In service
Out of service (DC power: Off)
Forced shutdown *
*
Stay Off
Off
Off
Off
Parameter
Last State
On
Off
Off
Power On
On
On
On
Pressing the POWER switch for over four seconds shuts down the power to the server.
System Management
Select "System Management" on the Server menu and press Enter to display the following screen.
See the table below for setup options on the screen.
Option
BIOS Revision
Board Part Number
Parameter
̛
̛
Description
Displays the BIOS revision.
Displays the board information.
Board Serial Number
̛
Displays the board information.
System Part Number
̛
Displays the system information.
System Serial Number
̛
Displays the system information.
Chassis Part Number
̛
Displays the chassis information.
Chassis Serial Number
̛
Displays the chassis information.
BMC Device ID
̛
Displays the BMC information.
BMC Device Revision
̛
Displays the BMC information.
4-22 System Configuration
Option
BMC Firmware Revision
Parameter
̛
SDR Revision
̛
Description
Displays the BMC information.
Displays the revision of SDR (sensor
device information).
PIA Revision
Displays the PIA (plat form information)
̛
revision.
Module#0 BMC MAC Address* ̛
Displays the BMC MAC address of
CPU/IO module#0.
Displays the BMC MAC address of
Module#1 BMC MAC Address* ̛
CPU/IO module#1.
[
]: Factory-set
* MAC address information is shown only when the N8815-001/001A ft Remote Management Card
is installed.
Console Redirection
Select "Console Redirection" on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the
following screen.
See the table below for setup options on the screen.
Option
BIOS Redirection
Port
Parameter
[Disabled]
Enabled
Baud Rate*
9600
[19.2K]
38.4K
57.6K
115.2K
Description
Enable or disable Console Redirection. By enabling
this option, you can remotely control behavior during
POST.
Select a port rate used for the interface with a
hardware console to be connected.
System Configuration 4-23
Option
Flow Control*
Console Type*
Parameter
[None]
XON/XOFF
[CTS/RTS]
CTS/RTS+ CD
PC-ANSI
[VT100+]
VT-UTF8
Description
Select a flow control method.
Select a console type.
[
* Displayed only when the BIOS Redirection Port menu is enabled.
]: Factory-set
4-24 System Configuration
Event Log Configuration
Select "Event log Configuration” on the System Hardware menu and press Enter to display the
following screen.
See the table below for setup options on the screen.
Option
Clear Online Event Logs
Parameter
[Press Enter]
Clear Offline Event Logs
[Press Enter]
Description
To clear event logs of the working module, press the
Enter key and select “Yes.”
To clear event logs of the stand-by module, press the
Enter key and select “Yes.”
System Configuration 4-25
Monitoring Configuration
Select “monitoring Configuration” on the Server menu and press Enter to display the following
screen.
Option
FRB-2 timer
Boot Monitoring
Option ROM Scan
Monitoring
Option ROM
Monitoring Time-out
Parameter
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
5 minutes
[10 minutes]
15 minutes
20 minutes
25 minutes
30 minutes
35 minutes
40 minutes
45 minutes
50 minutes
55 minutes
60 minutes
Disabled
[Enabled]
1-[5]-20
POST Pause
Monitoring
Disabled
[Enabled]
POST Pause
Monitoring Time-out
1-[3]-20
Description
Select whether or not to enable the FRB-2 timer.
Select whether or not to enable the timer for boot
monitoring at startup. If you are starting up from an OS
with no NEC ESMPRO Agent installed, disable this
option. If you use Disaster Recovery Option for
ARCServe, select [Disabled].
Select whether or not to enable the function to monitor
the option ROM scan.
Set the timeout of the option ROM scan. This option is
displayed when the Option ROM Scan menu is set to
[Enabled] (unit: minute).
Set whether or not to enable the POST monitoring
function during boot pause.
Set the time for POST monitoring during boot pause.
This option is displayed when the POST Pause
Monitoring menu is set to [Enabled] (unit: minute).
[
]: Factory-set
4-26 System Configuration
Boot
Move the cursor onto "Boot" to display the Boot menu.
The server searches for the boot device according to the order specified in this menu and use the
software to boot the system if found.
You can change the boot device order using n or p and + or –. Move the cursor to select the device
by n or p, and then change the priority using + or –.
IMPORTANT:
Specify the device boot order as shown above to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
System Configuration 4-27
Exit
Move the cursor onto "Exit" to display the Exit menu.
4-28 System Configuration
The following describes each option on the Exit menu:
Exit Saving Changes
Select this option to save the current
configuration data into the CMOS
(non-volatile memory) and exit the SETUP
utility.
Select “Exit Saving Changes” to display the
right screen. Select "Yes" to save the current
configuration data into the CMOS
(non-volatile memory) and exit the SETUP
utility. The server will automatically restart
the system.
Exit Discarding Changes
Select this option to exit the SETUP utility
without saving the current configuration data
into the CMOS (non-volatile memory).
If you select “Yes” here, the “SETUP
Warning” dialogue box appears.
If you select “No” in the “SETUP Warning”
dialogue box, you can exit
SETUP without saving the changes you have
made.
If you select “Yes” in the dialogue box, you
can exit SETUP with the changes you have
made saved in CMOS. The server reboots
automatically.
Load Setup Defaults
Select this option if you want to reset all
values in SETUP to default (factory-set
values). When you select Load Setup
Defaults, the dialogue box as shown on the
right appears.
If you select “Yes” in the dialogue box,
default values are restored. If you select
“No,” you will see the Exit menu screen.
IMPORTANT:
The default value slightly differs from the
factory-set value. Check all setting values
before restoring the default value.
System Configuration 4-29
Discard Changes
Select this option if you want to restore
previous values before saving values in CMOS.
When you select “Discard Changes,” you will
see the dialogue box as shown on the right.
If you select “Yes” in the dialogue box,
changes you have made are discarded and
previous settings are restored.
Save Changes
Select this option if you want to save changes
you have made in CMOS (non-volatile
memory) without exiting SETUP. When you
select the Save Changes, you will see the
dialogue box as shown on the right.
If you select “Yes” in the dialogue box,
changes you have made are saved in CMOS
(non-volatile memory).
4-30 System Configuration
SCSI BIOS (SCSISelect)
The “SCSISelect” utility makes settings of the SCSI controller on a motherboard. You can start it up
by simple key operation during POST execution without using any special startup disk.
IMPORTANT:
Because the server is installed with the latest version of the SCSISelect utility, your screen
display may be different from the one described in this guide. For information on options
different from those described in this guide, refer to the online help or ask your service agent.
Usage of the SCSISelect utility
The SCSISelect utility is activated when you configure the transfer speed of SCSI devices
connected to the server (except hard disk drive), and allows you to make settings.
IMPORTANT:
SCSI configuration must be set by starting up the utility on a SCSI controller basis. The server
is equipped with one SCSI controller. If you have added SCSI controller boards, you need to
make SCSI controller settings as many as the number of added SCSI controller boards in
addition to the configuration for the built-in SCSI controller. The utility used for changing
settings may be different.
Starting and Quitting the SCSISelect utility
The following section describes the procedures from starting the SCSISelect utility to quitting the
utility. For information on how you start up and/or operate the utility stored on the option board, see
the manual shipped with the option board.
1. Power on the server.
The following message appears on the screen during POST execution.
IMPORTANT:
The message is repeated for the number of times as many as the number of SCSI
controllers installed.
2. Press and hold down the Ctrl key and press the N key.
The SCSISelect utility starts up with the “Main” menu displayed.
System Configuration 4-31
3. Use the cursor to select a channel in the “Bus:Device” box, and then press the Enter key.
The SCSI controller of the motherboard has two channels.
The channel A (08:01:00) shows the hard disk drive of ID0, ID1 and ID2 while the channel B
(08:01:01) shows the hard disk drive of ID3, ID4 and ID5.
When selection is made, the “Options” menu appears.
4. Select the Options menu and press the Enter key.
If you want to make settings of the adapter (selected channel) or the SCSI device connected to
the channel, choose “Configure/View SCSI Controller Settings.”
If you want to know or verity the format of hard disk drive or find the SCSI ID of the device
connected to the channel, select “CSI Disk Utilities.”
For more information, see the following description.
To quit SCSISelect, press the Esc until you see the closing message. (If any changes have been
made, the massage asking you whether or not to save the changes is displayed. Select Yes (save the
changes) or No (discard the changes)).
4-32 System Configuration
Configure/View SCSI Controller Settings
When you select “Configure/View Host Adapter Settings” in the “Options” menu, the following
screen appears.
The following describes menus and parameters. Read the descriptions to optimize your system.
SCSI Bus Interface Definitions
Use arrow keys to select SCSI BUS Interface Definitions. The following table provides information
on options and their functions.
Option
SCSI Controller ID
SCSI Controller Parity
SCSI Controller Termination
Parameter
0 to [7] to 5
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
Function/settings
Set “7.”
Set “Enabled.”
This option allows you to select
whether or not to enable the
terminator.
Set “Enabled.”
[
]: Factory-set
System Configuration 4-33
Additional Options
Use arrow keys to select Additional Options.
Boot Device Configurations
When you select “Boot Device Configurations” and press the Enter key, the display changes as
shown below:
SCSI Device Configuration
When you select “SCSI Device Configuration” and press the Enter key, the display changes as
shown below:
IMPORTANT:
You can make settings on a SCSI ID basis. Before you make settings, confirm the SCSI ID of
your target device.
TIPS:
If you do not know the SCSI ID of the added option, choose “SCSI Disk Utilities” in the
“Options” menu. After a while, the screen showing SCSI IDs and matching devices appears.
For more information, see “SCSI Disk Utilities” described later.
4-34 System Configuration
The following table provides information on options and their functions on the menu.
Option
Sync Transfer Rate
(MB/Sec)
Packetized
Parameter
[320] 33.3
160
20.0
80.0 10.0
66.6 ASYN
40.0
[Yes]
No
QAS
[Yes]
No
Initiate Wide Negotiation
[Yes]
No
[Yes]
No
[Yes]
No
Yes
[No]
[Yes]
No
Enable Disconnection
Send Start Unit Command
BIOS Multiple LUN Support
Include in BIOS Scan
Description
Typically, set “320.” This value may need to be
changed depending on the option connected. For
more information, see the manual attached to the
option.
Select whether or not to optimize the bus usage
ratio by using the function to transfer packetized
data (DT or dual transition).
Select whether or not to use the Quick Arbitration
and Selection(QAS) function, which improves the
SCSI bus usage ratio
If the connected SCSI device supports Wide
SCSI, select “Yes.” If not, select “No.”
Set “Yes.”
Set “Yes” for a hard disk drive. Otherwise set
“No.”
Set “No.”
Set “Yes.”
[
]: Factory-set
System Configuration 4-35
Advanced Configuration
When you select “Advanced Configuration” and press the Enter key, the display changes as shown
below:
The following table provides information on options and their functions.
Option
Reset SCSI Bus at IC
Initialization
Display <Ctrl><Alt> Message
During BIOS Initialization
Extended Int 13 Transfer for
DOS Drivers > 1 Gbyte
Post Display Mode
SCSI Controller Int 13
Support
Domain Validation
Support Removable Disks
under Int 13 as Fixed Disks
BIOS Support for Bootable
CD-ROM
Parameter
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Enabled]
Disabled
[Verbose]
Silent
Diagnostic
[Enabled]
Disabled: NOT Scan
Disabled: scan bus
[Enabled]
Disabled
Boot Only
All Disks
[Disabled]
[Enabled]
Disabled
Description
Set “Enabled.”
Set “Enabled.”
Set “Enabled.”
Do not change the settings unless it is
necessary.
Select whether or not to enable SCSI BIOS.
Select “Enabled” except
z when starting up the OS from a hard
disk drive other than those connected to
the SCSI controller (it is OK if no hard
disk drive is connected to controller
other than SCSI controller).
z when reserving a space in the extended
ROM space. In this case, you can
disable the BIOS of a SCSI controller to
which no hard disk drive is connected.
Set “Enabled.”
Options controlled by removable media are
supported by AIC-79xx BIOS.
Set “Enabled.”
[
]: Factory-set
4-36 System Configuration
SCSI Disk Utilities
SCSI Disk Utilities scans a device connected to the selected channel and displays information on the
device. If the device is a hard disk drive, you can perform low-level formatting or verification.
When you choose “SCSI Disk Utilities” in the “Options” menu, which is shown after selecting a
channel to be configured, the screen for scanning SCSI IDs is displayed.
After the scanning the screen showing SCSI IDs and corresponding devices appears.
When you select a device on this screen and press the Enter key, details of the device is shown.
If the selected device is a hard disk drive, you can execute the following submenus.
z Format Disk: performs low-level formatting for the selected device
z Verify Disk Media: compares (verifies) all sectors of the selected device and if there is any bad
sector, re-assignment will be performed.
System Configuration 4-37
FORCED SHUTDOWN AND CLEAR
Read this section if your server does not operate as expected, or if you want to return all setup
values to those made at shipment.
Forced Shutdown
Use this function when an OS command does not shut down
the server, the POWER switch does not turn off the server,
or resetting does not work.
Press and hold the POWER switch on the server for over
four seconds. The power is forcibly turned off. To turn on
the power back again, wait approximately 30 seconds after
turning off the power (forced shutdown).
IMPORTANT:
If the remote power-on feature is used, power on the
server and start the OS, and turn off the power in the
normal way.
Press it for over 4 seconds.
4-38 System Configuration
CLEAR CMOS/PASSWORD
With the pre-installed SETUP utility, you can set desired passwords to protect data stored on the
server from unauthorized user access. If you forget the password, you can clear them by following
the procedure described in this section.
You can also use the same procedure to clear the CMOS data in the server.
IMPORTANT:
„
Clearing the CMOS data restores the factory settings.
„
To clear the password or CMOS data, power off the server.
To clear the password or the CMOS data, use configuration jumper pins (jumper switches) located
inside of the server. The jumper switches are found on the motherboard in a CPU/IO module. See
the figure below. ᴾ
IMPORTANT:
Do not change any other jumper switch settings. Any improper change may cause the server to
fail or malfunction.
Pins for BMC configuration
Use clips on pins 1 and 3
Pins for protecting/
clearing CMOS data
Use clips on
pins 11 and 12
Pins for protecting/clearing
password
System Configuration 4-39
„
„
Pins for protecting/clearing the password
Short-circuiting the two pins:
Clears the password
Opening the two pins:
Protects the password (factory-set)
Pins for protecting/clearing the CMOS data
Short-circuiting the two pins:
Clears the CMS data
Opening two pins:
Protects the CMOS data (factory-set)
The following describe the clearing procedure.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of
death or serious personal injury. See “PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY” in
Chapter 1.
„ Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
How to Clear CMOS
1.
Power off the NEC Express5800/ft series and unplug the both power cords.
2.
Remove the both CPU/IO modules (#1 and #2) from the NEC Express5800/ft series (see
“Removing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-17).
3.
Make setting of jumper switch for clearing CMOS of CPU/IO # 0.
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11-12 and place them on the jumper pins 1-2 on
the CPU/IO Module #1.
4.
Mount only the CPU/IO Module # 0 to the NEC Express5800/ft series (see “Installing
CPU/IO Module” on page 8-19).
5.
Connect the power cord of the CPU/IO module #0 and press the POWER switch to power
on.
6.
When you see “8150: NVRAM Cleared By Jumper” and “Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to
Setup” during POST after the startup, press the POWER switch to power off, and then
disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
4-40 System Configuration
7.
Example
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Phoenix ServerBIOS 3 Release 6.0
Copyright 1985-2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
GPJ1. HA. XXXX. X. XXXXXXXXXX
IGPJ BIOS Release X. X
Build Time: XX/XX/XX XX : XX : XX
2x Intel (R) Xeon (R) CPU 3.60GHz
3072M System RAM Passed
2048K Cache SRAM Passed
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
IPMI Base Board Management Controller was detected.
Device ID : XX Device Revision : XX
IPMI Version : X. X Firmware Revision : XX. XX
Self Test Result : XXXXH
SMBIOS Initialize. . . . . . . . . Passed
System Monitoring Check. Passed
ERROR
8150: NVRAM Cleared By Jumper
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ᴾ
By referring to “Removing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-17, remove the CPU/IO module
#0 from the server.
8.
Restore the previous CMOS clear jumper switch settings. Remove the jumper pins 1-2 of
the CPU/IO module #0 and install them on the jumper pins 7-8.
9.
By referring to “Installing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-19, install the CPU/IO module #0
on the server.
10.
Reconnect the power cord of the CPU/IO module #0 and press the POWER switch to
power on.
11.
After the startup, press the F2 key during POST to start BIOS SETUP.
12.
Make settings in SETUP as you desire and then the settings by selecting “Exit”ĺ “Exit
Saving Changes.” Switch the power off and disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
13.
Clear CMOS for the CPU/IO module #1 by following the steps 3 to 12.
14.
By referring to “Installing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-19, install both CPU/IO modules
on the server.
15.
Connect both power cords.
System Configuration 4-41
HOW TO CLEAR PASSWORDS
1.
Power off NEC Express5800/ft series and unplug the both power cords.
2.
Remove the both CPU/IO modules (#1 and #2) from the NEC Express5800/ft series (see
“Removing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-17).
3.
Make setting of jumper switch for clearing the password of CPU/IO module # 0...
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 11-12 on CPU/IO module # 0 and place them on
the jumper pins 3-4 on the CPU/IO Module #1.
4.
Mount the CPU/IO Module # 0 to NEC Express5800/ft series (see “Installing CPU/IO
Module” on page 8-19).
5.
Connect the power cord of CPU/IO module #0 only, and then press the POWER switch to
power on.
6.
When you see “8151: Password Cleared By Jumper” and “Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to
Setup” during POST after the startup, press the POWER switch to power off, and then
disconnect the power cord from the outlet.
7.
8.
Example
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Phoenix ServerBIOS 3 Release 6.0
Copyright 1985-2003 Phoenix Technologies Ltd.
All Rights Reserved
GPJ1. HA. XXXX. X. XXXXXXXXXX
IGPJ BIOS Release X. X
Build Time : XX/XX/XX XX : XX : XX
2x Intel (R) Xeon (R) CPU 3.60GHz
3072M System RAM Passed
2048K Cache SRAM Passed
System BIOS shadowed
Video BIOS shadowed
IPMI Base Board Management Controller was detected.
Device ID : XX Device Revision : XX
IPMI Version : X. X Firmware Revision : XX. XX
Self Test Result : XXXXH
SMBIOS Initialize. . . . . . . . . Passed
System Monitoring Check. Passed
ERROR
8151: NVRAM Cleared By Jumper
Press <F1> to resume, <F2> to Setup
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------By referring to “Removing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-17, remove the CPU/IO module
#0 from the server.
Reset the jumper switch setting.
Remove the clips from the jumper pins 3-4 and place them on the jumper pins 11-12 on
the CPU/IO Module # 0.
9.
Clear password for the CPU/IO module #1 by following the steps 3 to 8.
4-42 System Configuration
10.
By referring to “Installing CPU/IO Module” on page 8-19, install both CPU/IO modules
on the server.
11.
Connect both power cords.
System Configuration 4-43
BMC Configuration Jumper Settings
You can restore the initial values of the BMC configuration information (logon name/password etc.),
which are set when you use a remote management function. The values are registered on a CPU/IO
module basis. Because of this, you need restore the values for your target CPU/IO module.
How to restore initial values:
1. Power off the server and then disconnect the power cords of both CPU/IO modules from the
outlet
2. Remove your target CPU/IO module from the server by referring to "Removing CPU/IO
Module" on page 8-17.
3. Make clear settings of the jumper for the BMC configuration of the CPU/IO module.
Remove the CPU/IO module jumper pins (5H) 1-3 and set them to the jumper pins (5H) 1-2
(see page 4-38).
4. Install the CPU/IO module on the server by referring to “"Installing CPU/IO Module" on
page 8-19.
5. Connect the power cords of CPU/IO modules and wait for 30 seconds. Then disconnect the
power cords of both CPU/IO modules from outlet again.
6. Remove your target CPU/IO module from the server by referring to "Removing CPU/IO
Module" on page 8-19.
7. Restore the original statue of the jumper for the BMC configuration of the CPU/IO module.
Remove the CPU/IO module jumper pins (5H) 1-2 and set them to the jumper pins (5H)
1-3.
8. Install the CPU/IO module on the server by referring to "Installing CPU/IO Module" on
page 8-19.
IMPORTANT:
By this operation, BMC settings required in NEC DianaScope or remote management functions
for connection with the server will be cleared as well. If you are using NEC DianaScope, store the
settings required to connect to NEC DianaScope in media such as a floppy disk before this
operation, and configure the settings after the operation again. Use NEC DianaScope Agent or
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER system management function to configure and save the BMC settings.
4-44 System Configuration
REMOTE MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
320Fa-L and 320Fa-LR models are equipped with the optional card, N8815-001A ft Remote
Management Card on the server. By connecting to a network via their management LAN port, BMC
(Baseboard Management Controller), an LSI for system management, installed on the server allows
remote monitoring and controlling of the server such as keyboard, video and mouse (KVM) control
over management network.
Network Default Values
The following are default values to connect the server to a network.
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
User Name
: administrator
Password
: (None)
Host Name
: ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX
„ The host name above is the host name used for auto registering with a DNS server using
DHCP functions.
XXXXXXXXXXXX is the MAC address assigned to each management card. The MAC
address can be found on the label attached to the rear or the card or Server-System
Management Sub-menu Selections- Primary BMC MAC Address/Secondary BMC MAC
Address on the BIOS Set UP screen.
ᴾ
IMPORTANT:
„
The default IP address of the management LAN is 192.168.1.1 for both CPU/IO module #0
and CPU/IO module #1. Therefore the server cannot connect to network at the same time
without changing the IP address. To connect to network simultaneously, specify different IP
addresses.
„
To ensure security, change values for host name, password and IP address according to your
network environment.
Settings on the Server
The following describes the settings that should be made on the server to use the server. CHECK:
The resolution and refresh rate of the screen that can be displayed on a remote KVM console
are 1024x768 and 75Hz or smaller respectively. If values larger than these are set, the remote
screen does not display any data. If a great value is set for the number of colors on the screen
for the server, the remote may not show colors accurately. Connecting this card to a network
where broadcast occurs frequently may affect remote control performance.
System Configuration 4-45
Initial Settings on the Server
1. If information specific to the server has not been written in, the following message informing
you that the server-specific information is not written is displayed while the NEC logo is
displayed, and the startup processing of the server is paused.
If this message is not displayed, the remote management function does not need to be
initialized. If it is displayed, the remote management function needs to be initialized in order
to monitor devices into details.
H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.
!! Update BMC H/W Configuration by configuration tool !!
!! Refer to BMC configuration manual !!
The message above may appear in a different screen during POST with the NEC logo shown
and paused. In that case, press the Esc key to display the diagnosis screen to check whether
or not the above message is shown. If a different error message is shown, refer to Chapter 7
“Troubleshooting.”
2. How to make initial settings
Either wait for a while after the above message is shown or press the F1 key to precede
POST. Start up the “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER”CD-ROM and select “initialize Remote
Management Card” from the Tool menu. By doing so, information specific to each server
will be written in.
When writing the information is completed, the following message appears. Press any key to
reboot the server for use. Strike a key when ready…
TIPS:
Running the initialize Remote Management Card resets the AC LINK setting (Server-AC
LINK) of the BIOS setup to the initial value “Last State.” If you have changed the value,
you will need to set it again.
4-46 System Configuration
Setting a Management PC
The following provides management PC considerations to connect the server and a management
PC.
Setting Your Browser
Configure the following.
- Enable SSL.
Supported browsers
The following browsers are supported.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0
- Netscape 7.0
- Mozilla 1.6
Java2 Runtime Environment
Java2 Runtime Environment, Standard Edition 1.4.2_04 or later is required.
Follow the steps below if you use NEC EXPRESSBUILDER for installation:
z
When the OS of the management PC is Windows:
(1) Activate Windows on the PC on which you want to install Java2 Runtime Environment
and set the “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER” CD-ROM.
(2) By the auto startup function, the master control menu of NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
appears. Click “Software Setup” and then “NEC DianaScope,” and then run the installer
of JRE, which you find in the NEC DianaScope install menu.
z
When the OS of the management PC is Linux:
The JRE installer (Linux) is stored in the following directory of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM:
/dianascope/jre_x
For installing JRE, log on as root user or obtain the root authority by the su command.
(1) Copy the JRE installer to any directory. Below is an example of copying the installer from
the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to /user/local/bin:
cp /mnt/cdrom/dianascope/jre_x/j2re-1_4_2_09-linux-i586.rpm.bin/usr/
local/bin
(2) Go to the directory where you copied the JRE installer. Below is an example that the
installer was copied to /user/local/bin:
cd /user/local/bin
System Configuration 4-47
(3) Extract the JRE installer.
./j2re-1_4_2_09-linux-i586.rpm.bin
(4) Install JRE. JRE will be installed in the directory of each JRE version under /usr/java.
rpm –ivh ./j2re-1_4_2_09-linux-i586.rpm
(5) Add an environment variable “JAVA_HOME.” Enter the directory name that you
installed JRE.
For bash:
export JAVA_HOME=/usr/java/j2re1.4.2_09
For tcsh:
setenv JAVA_HOME=/usr/java/j2re1.4.2_09
(6) Set the path to JRE.
For bash:
export PATH=$JAVA_HOME/bin:$PATH
For tcsh:
setenv PATH $JAVA_HOME/bin:$PATH
IMPORTANT:
For the Mozilla browser, create a symbolic link to the Java Plug-in in the Mozilla plugins
directory.
* If you want to install the latest Java Runtime, download it from the following site. If you use
NEC DianaScope on the same management PC, use Java2 Runtime Environment, which you
can find in the “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER”CD-ROM. ᴾ
http://java.sun.com/j2se/
If you access the logon page without installing Java2 Runtime Environment, the following message
may appear. Check the message and perform installation.
4-48 System Configuration
Using Remote Management
Overview
You can control power of this server and use the remote KVM console from a web browser by
using web server functions of BMC.
This function is achieved by Java Applet.
How to get connected
From a Web browser on the management PC, access the following URL.
URL: http://BMC_HostPort/index.htm
TIPS:
„
“BMC_HostPort” is a BMC IP address or host name followed by a colon and http port
number. If the http port number is 80 (the default value), you can omit the port number.
When connecting to network which supports DHCP protocol:
The default host name of BMC is ARMC characters followed by the MAC address if you use
DHCP functions and automatically register it with your DNS server.
IP Address
: 192.168.1.1
User Name
: administrator
Password
: (None)
Host Name
: ARMCXXXXXXXXXXXX
Default host
When connecting to network which does not support DHCP protocol:
(1) The default IP address of the LAN of the managed server is “192.168.1.1” for both CPU/IP
module #0 and #1. If you want to access the network that does not support DHCP protocol,
access the network that the default IP address can use, and then set the IP address according
to your network environment from the managing PC (see “BMC Configuration”).
System Configuration 4-49
(2) If you cannot use the default IP “192.168.1.1,” start up the “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER”
CD-ROM on the server and select [Tools] ĺ [System Management] ĺ [Set System
Management Parameters]ĺ [Configuration]. Select [New] to register new settings, or
[Change] to change the settings. Then, set IP addresses of the managed LAN ports on the
[BMC Configuration] menu.
LAN1: CPU/IO Module#0 management LAN port
LAN2: CPU/IO Module#1 management LAN port
The following is a configuration screen for LAN1 (CPU/IO module #0). Specify an IP
address to use. Make settings for LAN2 (CPU/IO module #1) in the same manner.
For the settings to take effect, you need to execute [OK] on the previous menu, “BMC
Configuration” window.
Specify different IP addresses to LAN1 (CPU/IO module #0) and LAN2 (CPU/IO module
#1).
4-50 System Configuration
TIPS:
To disable the remote management console function, make the following settings from the
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM. Load the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM on
the server, and from the main menu, select [Tools] ĺ [System Management] ĺ [Set FT
Remote Management Card (LAN1/LAN2)]. Select [Disable] on [Remote Management
Console] and register the setting. The host name, the domain name, and the IP address
cannot be modified on this screen.
The image below shows the setting screen for LAN1 (CPU/IO module #0).
If you use remote management for the first time, the “Waning - Security” dialogue box as shown
below may be displayed. Check the message, and then click [Yes] [No], or [Always]. Then you will
see the logon page. If you are not sure, click [No].
System Configuration 4-51
TIPS:
If you use SSL for access, the “Warning - Security” dialogue box(es) for server certification
may be displayed for SSL in addition to the dialogue box shown above.
Logon and logout
Logon
When the logon page appears, enter the user name and password, and then click [Login].
When you login for the first time, use the following default user name and password.
Default user name: administrator
Default password: None (enter no data)
IMPORTANT:
By default, no password is set. Set your password immediately after logging on.
For security, it is recommended to change the default user name as well.
For information on settings and modification, see “BMC Configuration” described later.
When the password is authenticated, the following end user license agreement is displayed.
Read the agreement carefully.
If you can agree, click [Yes], and you can start using remote management functions.
If you cannot agree, click [No]. You cannot use remote management functions.
TIPS:
If you click [Yes], you do not see this message again because the data will be stored on the
management PC. 4-52 System Configuration
Logout
Click the File menu and select Exit to logout. When you log out, the main window closes and you
will return to the login page on the browser.
System Configuration 4-53
Main Window
e
d
c
f
(1) Click this to show the File menu.
Click “Exit” to quit this applet.
(2) Click this to show the Window menu.
From the Window menu, you can open windows including the KVM console window.
(3) Main frame
A window is shown here.
(4) Click this to show the Help menu.
Click “Help” to see the version information of this applet.
Control panel
The control panel allows you to see the server status and to control power.
The control panel also allows you to activate windows.
Control panel functions
c
d
f
e
g
h i j
k
18
٤
20
٤
l
11 ٤
12 ٤
٤
13
14
٤
15
17
٤
٤
16
٤
19
٤
4-54 System Configuration
(1) Displays the BMC host name or IP address
(2) Displays the LCD of the server.
(3) The power lamp of the server telling you of the power status
(4) The same as pressing the POWER switch of the server, but pressing it for 4 or more seconds
(the forced power off) is not supported.
(5) Performs memory dump on the server (the same as pressing the DUMP switch of the server).
(6) Makes the Unit ID lamp of the server blink
(7) Starts up the remote KVM console.
(8) Starts up the BMC configuration.
(9) Stats up the firmware update.
(10) A user name is displayed here.
(11) Displays the connectivity with BMC.
(12) Displays communication security status
(13) Displays network access status
(14) The status lamp of the server telling you of the server status.
(15) Opens the window showing system event logs (SEL).
(16) Opens the window showing the sensor device information (SDR).
(17) Opens the window showing the information on parts to be replaced for maintenance (FRU).
(18) Displays the slot position information (module #0 or module #1)
(19) Displays the slot status (primary or secondary).
(20) Hides the control panel
System Configuration 4-55
Remote KVM Console
Remote KVM console functions of the BMC allow you to transfer a local console to the browser on
the management PC over a network.
You can make full access to the server from the management PC using video, keyboard and mouse.
CHECK:
„
The remote KVM console supports the following five resolutions:
1024 x 768
800 x 600
640 x 480
720 x 400
720 x 350
„
Set the resolution of the device to one of these values. If any value other than these values,
nothing will be shown on the remote KVM console.
„
The mouse cannot be used on the remote KVM console on the operation window of NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER.
ᴾ
TIPS:
KVM is an acronym for keyboard, video and mouse.
The remote KVM control is different from those using a serial console remotely in that it allows
you using graphics directly and remotely.
ᴾ
CHECK:
You cannot use the remote KVM remote control for connection via proxy.
When you use the remote KVM console logon with the settings where no proxy is used.
4-56 System Configuration
Starting up the remote KVM console window
Click the startup icon [
console window.
] on the remote KVM console on the control panel to display the KVM
IMPORTANT:
NEVER open the remote KVM console when you log on to the BMC from a local console.
If you do so, data entry from the keyboard or mouse becomes disabled. ᴾ
CHECK:
You cannot use the KVM console on the secondary side. Use it on the primary side.
Items on the remote KVM console window
11
٤
c
d
e f g h ijk
l
12
٤
(1), (2) and (3) are special icons. Use them when you want to operate special keys.
(4) Virtual keyboard icon: use this icon when you want to enter a special key other than those
mentioned above.
System Configuration 4-57
(5) Screen refresh icon: use this icon to refresh the window.
(6) KVM properties icon.
(7) Enlarge icon: use this icon to enlarge the view.
(8) Shrink icon: use this icon to reduce the view.
(9) Equal size icon: use this icon to display images in the same magnification.
(10) Window size icon: use this icon to adjust the window size to the screen size.
(11) KVM indicator showing information including resolution.
(12) Remote KVM console screen, on which the server screen is shown.
IMPORTANT:
When you operate Shift + Caps Lock or Num Lock on the remote KVM console window,
such action may not be reflected in the Shift + Caps Lock or Num Lock status of the
management PC LED. Likewise, on the server, the Caps Lock or Num Lock status may become
different from LED status after the remote KVM console is used. If this happens, press the
key(s) on the device in issue so that LED status and actual operation match. Operating special keys
Operation of special keys from the keyboard of the management PC is not reflected in the server.
Click the following special key icons for operation on the host server.
(raised)
(raised)
(pressed): the status change every time you click the icon.
(pressed): the status change every time you click the icon.
IMPORTANT:
For example, if you want to enter “Ctrl + Alt + Del,” click the [Ctrl] and [Alt] icons and then
press the Del key on the keyboard. By doing so “Ctrl + Alt + Del” is sent to the server. After
the operation, click the [Ctrl] and [Alt] icons to cancel the special key operation.
(Windows key icon)
4-58 System Configuration
Virtual keyboard
When you click the virtual keyboard icon [
], the virtual keyboard appears.
You can select either 104 or 109 keyboard from the tab.
By clicking buttons corresponding to each key, you can make entry to the host server.
Zoom-in and zoom-out of the view
Click the [
] icon to zoom in the view.
Click the [
] icon to zoom out the view.
Click the [
] icon to display the screen in the same size as the device.
Click the window resize icon [
screen size.
Refreshing the screen
Click the screen refresh icon [
distorted, refresh the screen.
Modifying properties
] to adjust the remote KVM console window size to the remote
] to refresh the remote KVM console screen. If the screen is
When you click the KVM properties icon [ ], the KVM properties window appears, in which you
can specify an interval between screen refreshes. IMPORTANT:
A shorter interval will reduce garbage remaining on the screen. However, note that a shorter
interval can slow down the terminal response speed or impact network traffic.
System Configuration 4-59
IPMI information
System event logs (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), or field replacement unit (FRU) can be
displayed. Such information is referred to as the IPMI information. The information can be used to
examine errors and events on the server and identify which part should be replaced.
System Event Log (SEL)
When you click the icon to start up system event logs [
] on the control panel, SEL information
is collected from the BMC and shown on the system event log (SEL) window as shown below.
The upper pane shows a list of system event logs while the lower pane shows details of the entry
selected in the list.
By clicking the reloading icon [ ], you can reload the SEL information from the BMC and display
the latest information. Clearing the SEL information
By clicking the SEL clear icon [ ], you can clear the SEL information on the BMC. As a message
for confirmation appears, click [Yes] if it is OK to clear the information. If you click [No], the SEL
information will not be cleared.
4-60 System Configuration
Sensor Data Record (SDR)
When you click the icon to start up sensor device information (SDR) [ ]on the control panel, the
SDR information is collected from the BMC and shown on the sensor device information (SDR)
window as shown below.
The upper pane shows a list while the lower pane shows details of the entry selected in the list.
TIPS:
SDR information is definition data on device sensors.
The BMC monitors sensors according to this information.
System Configuration 4-61
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)
When you click the icon to start up information on parts to be replaced for maintenance (FRU) [
on the control panel, FRU information is collected from the BMC and shown on the window for
parts to be replaced for maintenance (FRU) as shown below.
The upper pane shows a list while the lower pane shows details of the entry selected in the list.
]
4-62 System Configuration
BMC Configuration
You can configure the BMC settings.
Starting up the BMC Configuration window
When you click the icon to start up the BMC configuration [
configuration window appears as shown below.
d e f g
c
h
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
] on Control Panel, the BMC
i
Reads the BMC configuration file
Saves the BMC configuration file
Edits the BMC configuration
Reloads the BMC configuration
Sets the data loaded from the file to the BMC in a batch
Lets you select what to be configured
Shows the overall information on the current values
TIPS:
When you load configuration from the file, choose to make settings of the BMC in a batch. System Configuration 4-63
User Settings
Here you cam make user account settings.
When you click [User] on the left pane of the BMC configuration window, total of 20 accounts
appear in the right pane.
When you select the account you want to modify or add and click the icon for editing [
following window for editing a user account appears.
], the
c
d
e
(1) Enter the user name.
(2) Enter the password.
(3) You can specify whether or not to enable the remote KVM console. Select the check box if
you want to enable it.
When you click [OK], all the information you have edited will be written into the BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the window closes without saving what you have edited. 4-64 System Configuration
Network Settings
Here you can make network settings of BMC such as IP address configuration. IMPORTANT:
„
The following ports are used for the remote management functions. If your network
environment has any firewall, you also need to have configuration for the firewall.
Module name
Remote KVW
client
Mail server
WEB client
WEB client
㧔SSL㧕
Port
number
Not
determined
25(*1)
Protocol
Direction
ĸĺ
Module
name
BMC
Port
number
623
UDP
TCP
ĸĺ
BMC
TCP
ĸĺ
BMC
Not
determined
80(*2)
Not
determined
Not
determined
TCP
ĸĺ
BMC
443(*3)
*1:
Can be modified by selecting [BMC Settings] - [Alert Mail] - [E-Mail Alert
Settings] - [SMTP] - [SMTP Port Number].
*2:
Can be modified by selecting [BMC Settings] - [WEB Server] - [WEB Server
Settings] - [HTTP Port Number].
*3:
Can be modified by selecting [BMC Settings] - [WEB Server] - [WEB Server
Settings] - [SSL Port Number].
When you click [Network] on the left pane of the BMC configuration window, the right pane shows
the overall information of the network settings as shown below.
When you click the icon for editing [ ], the following window for editing appears.
The window for network settings has three tabs.
System Configuration 4-65
- LAN
c
d
e
(1) The MAC address of the BMC
(2) Lets you choose whether or not to acquire an IP address automatically by DHCP.
(3) Lets you make the IP address settings if the address is not acquired automatically by DHCP.
If the address is acquired automatically by DHCP, the data acquired is shown here.
IMPORTANT:
„ Specify different IP addresses to CPU/IO module #0 and CPU/IO module #1.
„ If you change the IP address, the current connection will be disconnected when the BMC
settings are completed by clicking OK. Close the window once, and then log on again by
entering the newly set IP address (or host name) in the browser.
„ The logon page remaining on the browser is the page you accessed by using the old address.
You cannot use it to log on.
„ When you configure “default gateway,” the gateway, the server, the management PC should
be in a state where communication over network is available.
„ If you make the settings in a state where communication is not available, you need to switch
on/off the AC of the server in a state where the gateway, the server and the management PC
can be communicated over the network.
4-66 System Configuration
- DNS
c
d
(1) Lets you select whether or not to automatically acquire the IP address of the DNS server by
DHCP.
(2) If you have selected not to automatically acquire the IP address by DCHP, make settings here.
If the address is acquired automatically by DHCP, the acquired address appears here.
System Configuration 4-67
- Host name
c
d
e
f
(1) The default host name to be used when no host name is set when DHCP is used
(2) Set the BMC host name. If this option is not configured, the default host name mentioned in 1)
will be used.
(3) Set the domain name of the network to which the BMC belongs.
(4) Choose whether or not to register the host name with the DNS server.
TIPS:
It is recommended to set the BMC host name to be easily guessed from the server’s host name on
the OS.
For example, you may set the BMC host name as “sapphire_bmc” if the server’s host name on the
OS is “sapphire.”
IMPORTANT:
Specify different host names to CPU/IO module #0 and CPU/IO module #1. When you click [OK], all of what you have set in the three tabs will be written into the BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the editing window closes without saving what you have edited.
4-68 System Configuration
WEB server settings
Here you can make web server settings such as HTTP port settings for the BMC.
When you click [Web Server] on the left pane of the BMC configuration window, the right pane
shows the overall information of the web server settings.
IMPORTANT:
„
When you change the HTTP port number, settings of SSL (enable/disable), or SSL port
number, the current connection will be temporarily disconnected. Close the window and
exit, and then log on again by entering the newly set port number in the browser.
„
The logon page remaining on the browser is the page you accessed by using old web server
settings. You cannot use it to log on.
System Configuration 4-69
When you click the icon for editing [
], the window for editing appears as shown below.
c
d
e
f
g
h
(1) Specify the HTTP port number.
(2) Specify whether or not to enable SSL communication. If you select the check box for enabling,
connection by HTTPS (SSL enabled) is enabled. Clear the check box if you want to disable
SSL.
TIPS:
It is recommended to use connection by the encrypted HTTPS protocol unless you have
any specific reason such as SSL cannot be used. By default, this option is disabled.
(3) Specify the SSL port number.
(4) Specify the logon trial period during which you can try logging on again if you have failed to
log on.
(5) Specify the number of logon retries. If the number of retries exceeds the number specified here
during the period specified in (4), logon retries will be rejected for the time period specified in
(6).
(6) Specify the time period during which logon is rejected.
TIPS:
Though the three steps mentioned above are effective in blocking automatic unauthorized
logons, they do not completely block such logons. 4-70 System Configuration
If you click [Default], the default values for HTTP port number, SSL port number, logon trial period,
number of logon retries and the account lock period are displayed. The SSL check box
configuration remains the same.
When you click [OK], all of what you have set will be written into the BMC.
When you click [Cancel], the editing window closes without saving what you have edited. Alert Mail Configuration
Here you can make alert mail settings for BMC.
When you click [Alert Mail] on the left pane of the BMC configuration window, the right pane
shows the summary of the alert mail settings.
When you click the icon for editing = ?, the window for editing appears as shown in the next
page. The window for editing has four tabs. System Configuration 4-71
- Basic
c
d
e
(1) Specify whether or not to enable the alert mail functions by the check box. When you select
the check box, you can make mail-related settings.
(2) Select a notice level from six levels. Levels are categorized according to severity of factor
events.
(3) Allows you to send a test mail.
IMPORTANT:
Perform the mail test after you have completely configured “E-Mail Alert Settings” described in
the following pages.
Making entries in the editing window does not complete settings. You need to click [OK] after
entering all the required information to complete the BMC settings.
TIPS:
The X-Priority: field in the mail header changes according to the severity of factoring event.
Non-recoverable/Critical
X-Priority: 1
Non-critical
X-Priority: 3
OK/Information/Monitoring
X-Priority: 5
4-72 System Configuration
- Message
c
d
e
f
g
(1) Specify mail address of receivers to whom alert mail is sent. You can specify up to four
addresses.
(2) Specify the sender’s address used in alert mail.
(3) Enter the subject to be given to alert mail.
(4) Select whether or not to enable the body messages for all alert mail, which is configured in
the next step.
(5) Enter the body message to be used in all alert mail. If you do not need such a body message,
clear the check box of (4). If you click [Get Default Message], the recommended message
appears.
TIPS:
The subject and message you configure here will be used in all alert mails.
System Configuration 4-73
- SMTP
c
d
e
f
(1) Specify the address of the SMTP server. You can enter the IP address or host name.
(2) Specify the port number of the SMTP server.
(3) Specify the number to be made if sending a mail has failed.
(4) Specify the time period in seconds to wait for next retry.
If you click [Default], the default values for SMTP port number, number of retries, and retry
interval appears. It is recommended to use the default values unless you have specific reasons.
IMPORTANT:
This card does not support SMTP authentication (SMTP-AUTH). 4-74 System Configuration
- Option
c
d
(1) Specify information to be attached to the body of alert mail.
The information you specify here will be contained in the body of alert mail with the
message you specified in the message box in the message tab.
Product Information
Product name, code, number of the server
IP Address
IP address of the BMC
Event Time
Time that the event occurred
SEL Dump Data
Data representing system event logs (SEL) in the hexadecimal
format
BMC URL
URL of the RMC logon page
BMC FQDN
Full domain name of the BMC
LCD Message
LDC message on the server at the time of event occurrence
BMC FW Rev.
Revision information of the BMC firmware/SDR/PIA
(2) Used in the date filed of the mail header of alert mail.
System Configuration 4-75
Firmware Update
You can update applets, KVM firmware, BMC firmware, sensor device information (SDR), and
platform information (PIA).
Starting up the firmware update window
When you click the icon to start up firmware update [ ] on the control panel, each pieces of
revision information is loaded from the BMC to display the following firmware update window.
If you click [Cancel], the firmware update window closes without making any changes.
The following pages provide step-by-step instructions for update.
4-76 System Configuration
Loading update data files
When you click the icon for adding update files [
], the window to select a file appears.
Specify an update data file.
When you click [Open] after specifying the file, loading of the file begins.
Wait for file loading to complete.
TIPS:
You can update in a batch.
If there are more than one update targets, all the information of the update targets must be
loaded. You can select more than one file to be loaded at the same time.
Confirming revision
When loading data files completes, information on current revisions, loaded revisions and file data
(file names and time stamps) appears on the window.
Check the information carefully.
System Configuration 4-77
CHECK: Check each revision carefully because downgrading is possible as well.
If you click the icon for clearing update data [ ], all loaded data will be discarded. When you
click [Cancel], the update window will be closed without saving any loaded data.
Selecting what to be upgraded
Select check boxes of update targets.
CHECK:
Only those selected here will be written in.
Items with no check box selected will not be written in even if files have been loaded.
IMPORTANT:
If you update both SDR and PIA, make sure to write in simultaneously. If writing is done twice,
the first writing will not take effect.
Writing update data into the BMC
When you click the icon for writing update [
], the writing the update data into the BMC begins.
4-78 System Configuration
As shown below, the window showing writing process appears for each update target.
If any error is detected during the writing process, an error message is displayed and the process
terminates.
End of writing
When writing is completed, the “Status” column displays the result for each target.
OK
OK
CHECK:
„
To apply updates for targets other than applet, reboot the server or power off and then on
the server.
„
When you rebooted or power on the server to apply an update for BMC software, SDR, or
PIA, the connection with BMC will be disconnected. Because of this, you need to log in
again.
„
To apply updates for applets, log out once, close all browsers, and then logon again. You do
not need to reboot the server.
System Configuration 4-79
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
When using the remote management, an error dialog box may appear on the management PC if
some problem occurs. Messages and actions for the errors are described below.
Fatal errors
No.
1
2
Error message
Fatal error. JavaVM quits.
A fatal software error has
occurred.
Action
Try logging in again.
If the same message continues to appear, contact
your service representative.
Try logging in again.
If the same message continues to appear, contact
your service representative.
Logon error
No.
1
Error message
Authentication error
Action
Check the user name and password, and then enter
them again.
Access privilege error
No.
1
Error message
Unauthorized operation. You
have no privilege to perform the
operation.
Action
Try performing the operation with administrator’s
privileges. Consult your administrator.
Network errors
No.
1
Error message
The HTTP communication failed.
2
Could not resolve the IP address.
3
Unable to reach the target host.
4
Failed to download applet.
5
The RMCP+ session is closed.
6
Failed to establish the RMCP+
session.
Action
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists. .
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for
connections via proxy.
Check the network environment.
You cannot use Remote KVM Console for
connections via proxy.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service
representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service
4-80 System Configuration
No.
Error message
7
The RMCP+ transmission failed.
8
9
10
The specified RMCP+ protocol
cannot be used.
BMC resources to establish a new
RMCP+ session are insufficient.
The RMCP+ session time-out
occurred.
11
The HTTP communication failed.
Action
representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service
representative.
Check the network environment.
If there is no network problem, contact your service
representative.
Try again after a connection from other client is
finished.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists. .
BMC-related error
No.
1
Error message
The IPMI request was aborted.
2
Received bad response from
BMC.
3
BMC does not support IPMI 2.0
functions.
4
Failed to run the IPMI command.
5
Failed to send the IPMI message.
6
Action
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in
BMC.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
Contact your service representative.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in
BMC.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
Check the network environment.
If the network has no problem, contact your service
representative.
Illegal IPMI message was
requested.
Contact your service representative.
Specified target is not present.
Check the server. A failure may have occurred in
BMC.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
7
Errors on the Remote KVM Console
No.
1
2
3
Error message
Failed to disable Remote KVM
Console.
Failed to enable Remote KVM
Console.
KVM packet transmission failed.
Action
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists.
Check the network environment and server.
System Configuration 4-81
No.
4
Error message
The KVM request was aborted.
5
UDP packet transmission failed.
6
7
8
Remote KVM console can not
activate because it is disabled
Remote KVM Console is used by
other client.
Failed to shut down Remote KVM
Console.
9
Failed to make settings.
10
The UDP connection is closed.
Action
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
This is not a problem. Click [OK] and close the
message box.
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
Refer to page 4-63 and enable remote KVM console.
Try again after the client using Remote KVM Console
finishes using.
Use Remote KVM Console after waiting 3 or more
minutes.
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists. .
Check the network environment and server.
If you do not find any problem, contact your service
representative.
System event log (SEL) display errors
No.
1
2
Error message
Failed to clear session event logs
of BMC.
Failed to acquire system event
logs.
Action
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Sensor data records (SDR) display error
No.
1
Error message
Failed to acquire sensor data
records.
Action
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because a
failure may have occurred in BMC.
Field replaceable (FRU) information display error
No.
1
Error message
Failed to acquire field replaceable
units information.
Action
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because a
failure may have occurred in BMC.
4-82 System Configuration
BMC configuration errors
No.
1
Error message
Failed to make settings:
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists.
Failed to acquire BMC
Configuration:
Check the network environment and try again.
Contact your service representative if the error
persists.
Used by other software program.
Try again after a while.
Try again after a while.
Invalid BMC configuration file.
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check
the file.
The required XML tag is not
found.
The BMC configuration file may be corrupted. Check
the file.
Failed to write the file.
The BMC configuration file is not saved successfully.
Change the location to save the file and try again.
Invalid user name
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus
sign (–), and underscore (_) for a user name. A user
name should be 31 characters or less.
The user name is too long
A user name should be 31 characters or less.
The password is too long.
Use 16 or less characters.
Passwords are not matched.
Enter passwords again.
Invalid HTTP port number
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid SSL port number
You can only use numeric values.
HTTP/SSL should not be the
same.
The same port number cannot be specified for HTTP
and SSL. Specify different value.
Invalid login attempt period
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid failed login attempts
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid account lock period
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid IP address
Use numbers and periods to specify an IP address.
Invalid subnet mask
Use numbers and periods to specify a subnet mask.
Invalid default gateway
Use numbers and periods to specify a default
gateway.
Invalid DNS server IP address
Use numbers and periods to specify the IP address of
DNS server.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Action
19
20
System Configuration 4-83
No.
21
Error message
Invalid host name
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus
sign (–), and underscore (_) for a host name. A host
name should be 64 characters or less.
Invalid domain name
You can use only alphanumeric characters, minus
sign (–), and underscore (_) for a domain name. A
domain name should be up to 128 characters.
The SMTP server address is too
long.
Specify the value within 128 characters.
Invalid SMTP port number.
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid retry count
You can only use numeric values.
Invalid retry interval
You can only use numeric values.
"To" is too long.
Specify the value within 128 characters.
"From" is too long.
Specify the value within 128 characters.
"Subject" is too long.
Specify the value within 256 characters.
The message is too long.
The message should be up to 1024 characters.
Failed to open the file:
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
Failed to close the file:
The specified file may be corrupted.
Can’t open the file:
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
Timeout has occurred.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Action
34
Firmware update errors
No.
1
2
3
Error message
There are uncompleted update
images on BMC as follows:
Failed to acquire status of the
update area.
Update data is too large:
4
Failed to prepare update
5
6
Invalid file size:
Could not find the revision
information:
Action
Reboot the server to complete the update.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
The update file may be corrupted. Obtain the update
file again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
4-84 System Configuration
No.
7
Error message
Failed to create rollback image.
8
Failed to erase.
9
10
Unsupported format version:
Failed to load the update image
file.
11
Update has failed.
12
13
14
Could not switch to the update
mode.
Could not find the update targets:
Invalid address:
15
Writing has failed.
16
17
18
Unsupported token is detected:
Invalid segment information:
Invalid data length:
Action
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
19
Failed to open the file:
The specified file may not exist. Check the file name.
20
21
Failed to close the file:
The specified file may be corrupted.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Try again. If the error persists, contact your service
representative because a failure may have occurred in
BMC.
Check clients. A software program other than you are
using may have interrupted.
Try again as necessary after online update performed
by other tool is completed.
The network may be busy. Try again. If the error
persists, contact your service representative because
a failure may have occurred in BMC.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
22
23
24
25
Invalid file checksum:
Failed to parse files.
Failed to parse files:
Failed to load files:
Could not find files:
26
Failed to verify
27
28
29
30
Update will be stopped because
interruption has occurred.
Online update is now being used.
Failed to acquire the current
revision.
Failed to acquire lines:
System Configuration 4-85
No.
31
32
33
34
Error message
Invalid line length:
Unexpected EOF is detected:
Unexpected token is detected:
PIA does not suit this server
Action
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
Some update files may be corrupted. Obtain update
files again.
It is not Platform Information (PIA) of this server.
Obtain update files again.
ᴾ
4-86 System Configuration
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
ᴾ
Chapter 5
Installing and Using Utilities
This section describes how to use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM that comes with your
server and to install the utilities stored on the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
5-2 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, integrated setup software, can automatically detect the hardware
connected to an NEC Express5800/ft series machine to advance the processing. The hardware
subject to setup with the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER should have the same configuration as that for
operation.
Start Menu
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER provides three procedures to start the server as described below. The
menus and items appearing on the screen vary depending on the procedures.
„
Booting (starting) the server from NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
For the procedure, insert the NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the
CD-ROM drive of the NEC Express5800/ft series
and start the NEC Express5800/ft series from the
system in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. When
the NEC Express5800/ft series is started by using
this procedure, the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top
menu shown on the right appears.
Perform the NEC Express5800/ft series setup
from this menu.
IMPORTANT:
Do not use this CD-ROM on computers other than NEC Express5800/ft series with
which it is packaged (including other NEC Express5800 models). Otherwise, a
breakdown may result.
See "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu" for details.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-3
„
Inserting NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM after Windows startup
The "Master Control Menu" (see the figure below) starts automatically after you place the
"NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" in the CD-ROM drive. A dialog box called “Master Control
Menu” will appear.
For this dialog, see “Master Control Menu” described later.
5-4 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu is used for the setup of hardware and the setup and
installation of OS.
Start
Start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu following the procedure below:
1.
Turn on the powers of peripherals and the power of the server in this order.
2.
Insert the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of the server.
3.
After the CD-ROM is inserted, reset the system (by pressing Ctrl + Alt + Delete) or turn
off the power and then on again to restart the server.
The system is activated from the CD-ROM to start the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
After the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is started, the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu shown
below appears.
A
B
C
D
A
Express Setup
Performs various automatic setup operations including hardware’s internal parameters
and status settings and installation of the OS and various utilities automatically. Select this
setup method if hard disk drives are used in partitions different from those at purchase or
if the OS is reinstalled.
B
Tools
Starts each of the utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER individually to allow the
operator to provide setup. Enables the setup without influence of installed OS.
C
Help
Describes the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER. We recommend you to read through the help
before the setup.
D
Exit
The NEC EXPRESSBUILDER termination screen appears.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-5
Setup
This NEC Express5800/ft series setup method is used to perform automatic setup operations from
the settings of internal parameters and states of hardware to the installation of Windows Server 2003
Enterprise Edition and various utilities.
Use the setup program if hard disks are used with a partition different from that at purchase, or if
OS is reinstalled. This feature carries out the complicated setup.
IMPORTANT:
„ To install LINUX on your server, do not use “Express Setup.” Any other methods cannot
properly install Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition in the server.
„ The Express Setup is assumed to be used when the server has not been set up. Its execution
erases the data in the hard disk.
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu is used to start each of the several utilities stored in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
CD-ROM individually for manual setup by operator. Use the Tools Menu to provide settings that the
setup program cannot do automatically or detailed settings. Also use the Tools Menu when system
diagnosis is performed or a support disk is created. The items in the Tools Menu are described
below.
Tools Menu
Off-line Maintenance Utility
System Diagnostics
Create Support Disk
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
Initialize Remote Management Card
System Management
Help
Return to the Top Menu
„
RAID Board: None
Maint Part: None
Off-line Maintenance Utility
Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-dependent maintenance program that performs preventive
maintenance and error analysis for your server. See Chapter 6 or the online help for details.
„
System Diagnostics
Executes several tests on the main system to examine the features of the system and the
connections between the system and extension boards. If the system diagnosis is executed, the
system check program is started depending on the system status. See the description in Chapter
6 to manipulate the system check program
„
Create Support Disk
In the support disk creation procedure, the starting support disk for starting a utility within the
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER from a floppy disk and the support disk required in the installation
of the operating system can be created. If you write down the titles appearing on the screen on
the floppy disk labels, they can be easily managed later.
5-6 Installing and Using Utilities
The customer should prepare the floppy disks for creating the support disks.
„
ROM-DOS Startup FD
The support disk for starting the ROM-DOS system is created.
Off-line Maintenance Utility FD
Creates a support disk for activating the Off-line Maintenance Utility.
System Diagnostics Utility FD
The support disk for starting the system check program is created.
System Management Function FD
The support disk for system management functions is created.
BIOS/FW/etc. Update
The program which is necessary for the update work is transferred to the floppy disk which the
various update modules of BIOS/FW were stored in. After the reboot, an update program is
started automatically from the floppy disk, and various BIOS/FW's are updated.
IMPORTANT:
During the execution of the update program, do not turn off the power of the system. If
the update is interrupted halfway, the system will not be able to be started.
„
Initialize Remote Management Card
Allows you to configure ft Remote Management Cards with correct parameters of the system
where they are installed. In order to use this menu, modules must be mounted to both systems.
IMPORTANT:
This menu appears when optional ft Remote Management Cards are installed.
„
System Management functions
Allow you to make settings of BMC (Baseboard Management Controller) to use its report
functions and remote control from the management PC.
„
Help
Indicates the descriptions on several features of the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
„
Return to the Top Menu
Indicates the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER top menu.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-7
Master Control Menu
Load the attached “NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER” CD-ROM in the
CD-ROM drive of the computer that runs
Windows (Windows 95 or later, or Windows
NT 4.0 or later). The Master Control Menu
starts automatically.
TIPS:
The Master Control Menu may not start
automatically depending on the system status.
In such case, execute the following file on the
CD-ROM from the explorer, etc.
\MC\1ST.EXE
From the Master Control Menu, you can install various kinds of attached software that runs on
Windows and view online documents.
TIPS:
Some online documents are provided in the PDF format. To view these files, you need to
install Acrobat Reader or Adobe Reader of Adobe Systems Incorporated in advance. If either
is not installed, click [Setup] – [Acrobat Reader] first to install Acrobat Reader.
For the Master Control Menu operations, click each item displayed on the window, or use the
shortcut menu displayed by right-clicking the screen.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to exit online documents and tools started from the Master Control Menu or menu
before removing the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
5-8 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC ESMPRO Agent and Manager
NEC Express5800/ft series system management applications "NEC ESMPRO Manager" is bundled
to accessory CD-ROM "NEC EXPRESSBUILDER" and "NEC ESMPRO Agent" is bundled to
Linux for NEC Express5800/ft series Back Up CD-ROM.
This manual describes the functions and features provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC
ESMPRO Agent and the notes on their operations.
These applications are necessary for continuous operation of NEC Express5800/ft series.
Overview
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are the server management software provided
for the stable operation of a server system and effective system operations. They can manage the
configuration information and operating status of server resources to prevent server faults from
occurring. If a server fault occurs, they detect the fault to notify the system Administrator of the
occurrence. This enables the system Administrator to take appropriate action against faults.
„
Importance of server management
“Constantly stable operation” and “less management workload” are keywords in server
management.
Stable operation of server
Shutdown of a server immediately leads the customer to lose business opportunities
and profits. This requires servers to always operate in their perfect state. If a fault
occurs in a server, it is necessary to detect the occurrence as soon as possible, make
clear the cause, and take appropriate action. The shorter the time taken from the
occurrence of a fault to the recovery from the fault is, the smaller the loss of profits
(and/or costs) is.
Load reduction of server management
The server management requires many jobs. In particular, if the system becomes large
or remote servers are used, required jobs increase further. The reduction of the load of
the server management brings the decrease in costs (and thus customer's benefit).
„
What are NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent?
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent are server management software used
to manage and monitor NEC Express5800 series systems on the network. The installation
of NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent enables the server configuration,
performance, and fault information to be acquired, managed, and monitored realtime and
also the occurrence of a fault to be detected immediately by the alert report function.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-9
„
Effects of using NEC ESMPRO Manager and Agent
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent have sufficient effects on a variety of
needs in versatile and complicated system environments.
Detection of server fault
NEC ESMPRO Agent collects a variety of fault information on NEC Express5800
series systems to identify the states of the systems. If a server detects a fault, the
server provides NEC ESMPRO Manager with the proper alert report.
Prevention of server fault
NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function predicting the
occurrence of a fault in advance as countermeasures for preventing faults from
occurring. It can previously detect the increase in the cabinet temperature and the
empty capacity in a file system.
Management of server operation status
NEC ESMPRO Agent can acquire the detailed hardware configuration and
performance information on NEC Express5800 series systems. The acquired
information can be viewed at any point through NEC ESMPRO Manager.
Collective management of distributed servers
NEC ESMPRO Manager provides the GUI interface that allows servers distributed
on the network to be managed efficiently.
5-10 Installing and Using Utilities
Detection of Server Fault
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent detect errors causing faults to occur at an early
stage and notify Administrators of fault information real-time.
„
Early detection of error
If a fault occurs, NEC ESMPRO Agent detects the fault and reports the occurrence of the
fault to NEC ESMPRO Manager (alert report). NEC ESMPRO Manager displays the
received alert in the alert viewer and also changes the status colors of the server and server
component in which the fault occurs. This allows you to identify the fault at a glance.
Further, checking the content of the fault and the countermeasures, you can take
appropriate action for the fault as soon as possible.
„
Types of reported faults
The table below lists the typical faults reported by NEC ESMPRO Agent.
Component
CPU
Memory
Power supply
Temperature
Fan
Storage
LAN
Reported information
x
CPU load is over the threshold
x
CPU degrading, etc.
ECC 1-bit error detection, etc.
Voltage lowering
Power failure, etc.
Temperature increase in cabinet, etc.
Fan failure (decrease in the number of revolutions), etc.
File system usage rate, etc.
x
Line fault threshold over
x
Send retry or send abort threshold over, etc.
x
x
Prevention of Server Fault
NEC ESMPRO Agent includes the preventive maintenance function forecasting the occurrence of a
fault as countermeasures for preventing faults from occurring.
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent can set the threshold for each source in the
server. If the value of a source exceeds the threshold, NEC ESMPRO Agent reports the alert to NEC
ESMPRO Manager.
The preventive maintenance function can be set for a variety of monitoring items including cabinet
temperature, and CPU usage rate.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-11
Management of Server Operation Status
NEC ESMPRO Agent manages and monitors a variety of components installed in the server. You
can view the information managed and monitored by NEC ESMPRO Agent on the data viewer of
NEC ESMPRO Manager.
NEC ESMPRO Agent also manages and monitors all the components and conditions required to
keep the server reliability at a high level such as hard disks, CPU, memory, fans, power supply, and
temperature.
Below is a list of functions of data viewer’s items and their availability if NEC ESMPRO Agent is
installed.
Function name
Supported
Function description
c
Function to display physical information of hardware
Memory bank
c
Function to display physical information of memory
Device
Information
c
Function to display device-specific information
CPU
c
Function to display physical information of CPU
Hardware
System
c
I/O device
Function to view logical information or monitor load
rate of CPU
Function to view logical information or monitor status of
memory
c
Function to view information of I/O devices (floppy disk
drive, serial port, parallel port, keyboard, mouse and
video)
'
Function to monitor temperature, fan, voltage, power,
door, etc.
Temperature
c
Function to monitor the temperature inside the cabinet
Fan
c
Function to monitor fan
Voltage
c
Function to monitor the voltage inside the cabinet
Power
¯
Function to monitor power unit
Door
¯
Function to monitor the Chassis Intrusion (open/close
of the cover/door on the cabinet)
Software
c
Function to view information of service, driver, OS
Network
c
Function to view information about network (LAN) and
monitor packets
Extension device
c
Function to view information of extension bus device
BIOS
c
Function to view BIOS information
Local polling
c
Function to monitor any MIB item value which the
agents get
System environment
5-12 Installing and Using Utilities
Function name
Supported
Function description
Storage
¯
Function to monitor storage devices (e.g., hard disk
drive) and controller
File system
c
Function to view file system configuration and monitor
usage rate
Disk array
¯
Function to monitor disk array system of LSI Logic
Corporation
Other
c
Supports OS stall monitoring by Watch Dog Timer
c㪑㩷Supported㩷 㩷 '㪑㩷Partly supported㩷 㩷 ¯㪑㩷Not supported㩷
Installing and Using Utilities 5-13
Monitoring of NEC Express5800/ft series
NEC Express5800/ft series is a fault tolerant system. It can continue the operation even if a major
component fails. NEC Express5800/ft series improves the system availability with the hardware,
NEC ESMPRO, and system software functions.
If a major component fails, the NEC ESMPRO fault report function can notify the system
Administrator of the occurrence of the fault. In addition, the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO
Manager can monitor the system status and also identify the failed component.
NEC ESMPRO provides several maintenance functions such as the update of F/W and BIOS in the
NEC Express5800/ft series in the online state (in which the system continues the operation but the
components used to update F/W or BIOS is suspended) and the suspension of a specific component.
The table below lists the NEC Express5800/ft series management tasks using NEC ESMPRO and
system functions.
NEC Express5800/ft series
management task
Monitoring of major
component states
Diagnosis and start/stop of
major components and F/W
update
BMC F/W update
Confirmation of alert or
confirmation of fault
occurrence event
information
Confirmation of H/W error
log
NEC ESMPRO function or tool
(on managed NEC
Express5800/ft series)
–
NEC ESMPRO Agent
Server Maintenance Utility
NEC ESMPRO Agent
BMC F/W update utility
syslog
NEC ESMPRO Agent
NEC ESMPRO function or tool
(on management manager)
NEC ESMPRO Manager
data viewer
NEC ESMPRO Manager
data viewer
–
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Alert Viewer
–
The report of a fault occurrence in the NEC Express5800/ft series (alert) is immediately sent to the
NEC ESMPRO Manager. When the NEC ESMPRO Manager receives the alert, a popup message
appears.
The alert contains the detailed information of the fault and the proper countermeasures. You can
take the appropriate action for the alert.
5-14 Installing and Using Utilities
.
Collective Management of Distributed Servers
The excellent GUI provided by NEC ESMPRO Manager allows servers on a network to be
managed collectively. The management screen is designed in the Explorer format to indicate the
components in a server hierarchically for effective server management.
NEC ESMPRO Manager manages servers by using the following three types of GUIs.
„
Operation Window
The operation window is used to create the
map of servers connected to network to
manage them. The map can be multi-layered
depending on the installation areas,
organizations, and objects.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-15
„
Data Viewer
The data viewer indicates the server source configuration information in the Explorer format. In
addition, it changes the status color of the failed server component. This enables you to identify
the failed portion.
„
Alert Viewer
The Alert Viewer manages fault reports sent from servers together. A fault occurred in a server
is immediately reported to the Alert Viewer.
The Administrator can recognize all faults on the network instantly.
5-16 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC ESMPRO Agent
NEC ESMPRO Agent is a utility which acts as an agent (proxy) between NEC Express5800/ft series
and NEC ESMPRO Manager.
For details on the operating environment, the settings required before the setup, and the installation
procedure, see the separate volume, User’s Guide (Setup).
Device ID in Alert Report
Some NEC Express5800/ft series reports use unique device IDs which correspond to the
devices listed in the table below as the device identification information.
320Fa-L, 320Fa-LR models
Device name
CPU module 0
DIMM slot A1 on CPU module #0
DIMM slot B1 on CPU module #0
DIMM slot A2 on CPU module #0
DIMM slot B2 on CPU module #0
DIMM slot A3 on CPU module #0
DIMM slot B3 on CPU module #0
CPU #1 on CPU module #0
CPU #2 on CPU module #0
PCI module #0
PCI slot 1 on PCI module #0
PCI slot 2 on PCI module #0
Slot 1 of riser card on PCI module #0
Slot 2 of riser card on PCI module #0
PCI controller 1 on PCI module #0
PCI controller 2 on PCI module #0
I/O hub on PCI module #0
Display controller on PCI module #0
SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #0
SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #0
SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #0
Ethernet adapter on PCI module #0
CPU module #1
DIMM slot A1 on CPU module #1
DIMM slot B1 on CPU module #1
DIMM slot A2 on CPU module #1
DIMM slot B2 on CPU module #1
DIMM slot A3 on CPU module #1
DIMM slot B3 on CPU module #1
CPU #1 on CPU module #1
CPU #2 on CPU module #1
PCI module #1
PCI slot 1 on PCI module #1
PCI slot 2 on PCI module #1
Slot 1 of riser card on PCI module #1
Slot 2 of riser card on PCI module #1
PCI controller 1 on PCI module #1
PCI controller 2 on PCI module #1
Device ID
0
0/0/0
0/0/1
0/0/2
0/0/3
0/0/4
0/0/5
0/0/20
0/0/21
0/10
0/10/1
0/10/2
0/10/3
0/10/4
0/10/100
0/10/101
0/10/102
0/10/103
0/10/104
0/10/104/0
0/10/104/1
0/10/105
1/1
1/1/0
1/1/1
1/1/2
1/1/3
1/1/4
1/1/5
1/1/20
1/1/21
1/11
1/11/1
1/11/2
1/11/3
1/11/4
1/11/100
1/11/101
Installing and Using Utilities 5-17
Device name
I/O hub on PCI module #1
Display controller on PCI module #1
SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #1
SCSI bus 1 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #1
SCSI bus 2 of SCSI adapter 1 on PCI module #1
Ethernet adapter on PCI module #1
SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 0 on SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 1 on SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 2 on SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 3 on SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 4 on SCSI enclosure
SCSI slot 5 on SCSI enclosure
Device ID
1/11/102
1/11/103
1/11/104
1/11/104/0
1/11/104/1
1/11/105
41
41/0
41/1
41/2
41/3
41/4
41/5
The figure below shows the actual locations of the device names displayed on the NEC ESMPRO
screen. In the case of the tower model, modules are mounted vertically instead of horizontally.
CPU/IO module #1
CPU/IO module #0
SCSI enclosure
SCSI slots 0 through 5 from bottom to top
Front view of the rack-mount model
5-18 Installing and Using Utilities
Supplement
Note the following when using NEC ESMPRO Agent.
Dual registration of syslogs
At some types of errors, two syslogs may be registered for a single occurrence. (However, in the
case of NEC ESMPRO Manager, one log is reported for one occurrence.) Such errors are as
follows:
- Temperature error
- Voltage error
- Thermal trip
Maintenance-related Functions
When you want to use maintenance-related functions, contact your maintenance personnel.
CPU Information
If you select [CPU Module]–[CPU] in the FT tree of the data viewer, unknown or incorrect
information appears in some information items.
The CPU information can be viewed by selecting [System]–[CPU] in the [ESMPRO] tree.
Module Diagnostics
When you diagnose a PCI module (IO module), the CPU module of the same side will also be
diagnosed. Therefore, the CPU module also needs to be stopped.
Status during Module Diagnostics
While diagnosing a stopped module, the module is no longer in the duplex mode and the CPU and
the memory cannot be used. However, the status of [CPU] and [DIMM] displayed under [CPU
module] in the FT tree on a Data Viewer becomes “Online” and the status color becomes green.
Change of Installation States of CPU and PCI (IO) Modules
If you dynamically change the configuration of the CPU or PCI module (IO module) in the relevant
system during review of the server information by using the data viewer, the message prompting
you to reconstruct the tree of the data viewer will appear. If you click the [Yes] button, the tree is
reconstructed in the data viewer to reflect the change of the system configuration on the data viewer.
Clicking the [No] button does not cause the tree to be reconstructed in the data viewer. If so, the
information in the data viewer may be different from the current system information because the
change of the system configuration is not reflected on the data viewer.
㩷
Installing and Using Utilities 5-19
Status of Logical PCI Slots
Because the I/O hub and display controller on a PCI module (IO module) are logical PCI slot
information, PCI module (IO module) are not influenced by them. Therefore, the “Status” of [PCI
slot (ID:0/10/102)] and [PCI slot (ID:0/10/103)] under [PCI module (ID:0/10)] and the “Status” of
[PCI slot (ID:1/11/102)] and [PCI slot(ID:1/11/103)] under [PCI module (ID:1/11)] in the FT tree on
a Data Viewer becomes “Online” and the status color becomes green.
Impact of Module Status Changes
PCI modules (IO modules), SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules under the SCSI enclosure have
impact on each other. For example, when the “Status” item of a module changes to “fault,” it may
be caused by another module’s error. Therefore, you need to check the status of the other modules
based on alert information.
Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk
When creating a new mirror, the status of the hard disk and its upper component, SCSI enclosure,
will continue to change after you mount a hard disk until the mirror is completed. The OS may take
several minutes to recognize changes of disk status or the disk may need to be rescanned. During
this process, the status color may turn to abnormal, but when the mirror is created successfully, it
will return normal.
LAN Monitoring Report
The LAN monitoring function defines the line status depending on the number of transmission
packets and the number of packet errors within a certain period. Thus, the LAN monitoring function
may report a line fault or high line load only in a temporary high line impedance state. If a normal
state recovery is reported immediately, temporal high line impedance may have occurred thus there
is not any problem.
LAN Monitoring Threshold
Because hardware faults on the network are found in the driver level, NEC ESMPRO Agent does
not monitor line faults.
Community Authority
Depending on your OS type or its version, settings for community, SNMP service’s security
function, are not made, or default settings of authority are different
To enable the remote shutdown and threshold change functions via NEC ESMPRO Manager, make
settings of community and set its authority to "READ CREATE" or "READ WRITE."
5-20 Installing and Using Utilities
Monitoring with NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver.4.22 or Earlier
NEC ESMPRO Manager Ver.4.23 or later is required for monitoring the server.
If you are using an older version, you must install NEC ESMPRO Manager using the CD-ROM
shipped with the server.
ESRAS Utility
ESRAS Utility runs on NEC Express5800 series with NEC ESMPRO Agent installed, and is used to
display, print, and initialize logs and export them to a file.
If you attempt to collect ipmi.dat immediately after starting the OS or disconnecting the system, a
message “IPMI driver operation error” is displayed. Wait awhile and try collecting ipmi.dat again.
Coexistence with the Oracle products
The installation of the Oracle products may change Startup Type of SNMP Service into “Manual.” If
so, change the setting back to “Automatic” and set up correctly according to the description of the
Oracle product.
Connection with Hard Disk Drive
The preventive hard disk drive maintenance function may not work properly when a hard disk drive
which was used in a system where NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed is connected to other systems.
Make sure not to connect such hard disk drives.
Change Settings of File System Monitoring Function
New settings in thresholds of monitoring interval and free space monitoring are not reflected
immediately after they are changed. They are reflected at the next monitoring interval of monitoring
service.
CPU Load Ratio of SNMP Service (snmpd)
While monitoring the server from NEC ESMPRO Manager, the CPU load ratio of SNMP Service
on the NEC ESMPRO Agent side may increase at every monitoring interval (default: 1 minute).
NEC ESMPRO Manager and NEC ESMPRO Agent exchange information through SNMP Service.
If the server status monitoring by NEC ESMPRO Manager is on (default: ON), NEC ESMPRO
Manager regularly issues a request to NEC ESMPRO Agent to get the current status of the server. In
response, NEC ESMPRO Agent checks the status of the server. As a result, the CPU load ratio of
SNMP Service increases temporarily.
If you have trouble of terminating a movie player application, turn off the server status monitoring
by NEC ESMPRO Manager or extend the monitoring interval.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-21
Current Status of Temperature, Voltage and Fan Sensors
Some modes are equipped with temperature/voltage/fan sensors that do not have information on
status, current values, rpm, threshold etc. Therefore, if you view such a sensor on NEC ESMPRO
Manager, it may be displayed as follows:
„
The status becomes “Unknown” (grayed out) on the data viewer.
„
The current value or rpm becomes “Unknown” on data viewer.
Even if the sensor is displayed like stated above, it is monitoring the server.
Actions to Take When Temperature/Voltage Error Occurs on CPU/PCI Modules
At the time when a temperature or voltage error occurs on CPU/PCI module (CPU/IO module),
necessary actions will differ depending on its status as shown below. You can check the status of
each module from the data viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager or Server Maintenance Utility.
Status
Duplex
Simplex
Actions
Stop the failed CPU/PCI module (CPU/IO module).
Shut down the system.
TIPS:
„
If the status is “Empty Absent,” the module is not mounted. Sensor monitoring is not
conducted.
„
If disks are mounted on PCI modules (IO modules), the status of both modules is “Simplex”
while the disks are mirrored. Temperature or voltage error occurring during disk mirroring
will result in the system to shut down.
CPU Information
In [CPU Information] of Data Viewer’s system tree, the external clock is listed as “Unknown.”
When [ft] Tree Appears on Date Viewer in an Incorrect Manner
If you open a Data Viewer immediately after the system starts up, the tree or the state of a Data
Viewer may not be displayed correctly due to high load of the system. In about 20 minutes after the
system startup, when a pop-up message (below) which prompts you to reconstruct a Data Viewer
appears, click [OK]. The Data Viewer will be reconstructed and the tree and the status will be
displayed correctly. If the [ft] tree is not displayed, delete the icon and register the server again by
using the NEC ESMPRO Manager.
Floppy Disk Drive Information
If you add or delete floppy disk drive connected with USB while the system is running, the drive
information under the [I/O Device] in the data viewer will be updated at the next system startup.
5-22 Installing and Using Utilities
When the Displayed BIOS Information is Incorrect
Additional information of BIOS which is displayed by clicking [ft] - [CPU Module] - a CPU
module - [General] - [BIOS Information] on a Data Viewer or by clicking a CPU module and
clicking [BIOS Information] on Server Maintenance Utility may not be displayed correctly. In such
a case, display the BIOS information on a Data Viewer by clicking [ESMMIB] - [BIOS].
Ethernet Adapters You Do Not Use
If an Ethernet adapter is not used (not connected to cable), set it to “Disable” in [Network
Connections] from Control Panel. If an Ethernet adapter you are about to disable has dual LAN
settings (AFT function), remove the dual LAN settings before disable it.
Monitoring in Sleep State
NEC ESMPRO Manager cannot monitor the NEC ESMPRO Agent machine in the sleep state
(system standby or system halt state).
While NEC ESMPRO Manager monitors server shutdown, the relevant NEC ESMPRO Agent
machine may be entered into the sleep state. If so, the report "server access disabled" is issued and
the status color of the server icon becomes gray. This cannot indicate whether the NEC ESMPRO
Agent machine is shut down or entered into the sleep state. Keep these in mind when operating the
system where systems to be monitored may enter the sleep state.
Hang of SNMP Service
SNMP Service has a module called “SNMP Extended Agent.” This module may be registered when
you install some software that uses SNMP Service.
If you start SNMP Service, SNMP Extended Agent is also loaded at the initialization. However, if
the initialization is not completed within a specified period, SNMP Service will hang.
It may take time to complete the initialization due to temporary high load on the system. In this case,
wait for the system load become low enough before restarting SNMP Service.
SCSI Status on a Data Viewer
“Unknown” is always displayed for the following items:
„
“Serial Number,” “Firmware Revision” and “ROMBIOS Revision” in “General” of “SCSI
Adapter”
„
“Reassign Block Count” and “Reassign Block threshold” in “General” of “SCSI Slot”
SCSI Status while IO Module is Starting or being Stopped
While an IO module is starting or being stopped, the status of SCSI adapters, SCSI bus, SCSI
enclosure, SCSI slots, and mirror disks temporarily indicates an undefined status. Once the module
is started or stopped, the status will return to normal.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-23
Status of SCSI Slots and Mirrored Disks at High Load
When the system load is high, the status of SCSI slots and mirror disks may not be obtained, and
incorrect status may be displayed temporarily.
SCSI Slot Indication when a Disk Fails
When a disk which has failed before is mounted, the SCSI slot status becomes “Broken.” The status
changes from “Broken” when a mirror volume is created on the disk or any mirror volume is
resynchronized.
Monitoring NEC Storage
NEC ESMPRO Agent (Linux) does not monitor the failure status in NEC Storage. If you go to Data
Viewer and select [ESMPRO] – [File System], the File System status is indicated as “Unknown.”
However, this will not affect your system operation.
Bonding configuration displayed by NEC ESMPRO Manager
NEC ESMPRO Manager displays ten bonds, from bond0 to bond9, including unconfigured bonds.
5-24 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC ESMPRO Manager
To monitor and manage a computer, on which NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed, with a
management PC online, use NEC ESMPRO Manager that is bundled with the product.
For detailed procedures of installation and setting, see online documents or NEC ESMPRO Online
Help.
TIPS:
Online documents provide cautions and information for using NEC ESMPRO Manager. See NEC
ESMPRO Manager User’s Guide in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM.
Monitoring by Use of Data Viewer
To monitor the state of the NEC Express5800/ft series on a management computer with installation
of NEC ESMPRO Manager, the data viewer is used. If you click each of the modules and items to
be checked sequentially on the tree view in the Windows Explorer format, the data viewer indicates
their states on the right side of the screen.
You can manage the status on a Web browser using Web component functions of NEC ESMPRO
Manager. For details, see Help on Web Component.
This section describes the tree structure and displayed screens in the data viewer.
To make the data viewer indicate the state of each module and those of the components on it, select
the server to be monitored from NEC ESMPRO Manager to start the data viewer (in the following
description, the start procedure of the data viewer is omitted).
The server is physically configured with two modules, but each module has a CPU module and IO
module. Therefore, NEC ESMPRO Manager Data Viewer displays module #0 and module #1 in a
tree and under each of them, a CPU module and PCI module are displayed (on a Data Viewer of
NEC ESMPRO Manager and Server Maintenance Utility of NEC ESMPRO Agent, the IO module
is indicated as “PCI module”).
Installing and Using Utilities 5-25
Monitoring CPU Module
To monitor the CPU modules and the components on the CPU module, see the [CPU Module] tree.
To see the information on the [CPU Module] tree, select the target CPU module from [CPU
Module] in the [ft] tree.
You can see the following information on the modules and the components on the CPU modules in
the [CPU Module] tree.
„
General
Allows the configuration and other information on the CPU modules to be viewed.
„
Maintenance
Allows the start/stop, MTBF information clear and dump acquisition of the CPU modules to be
provided. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for the start/stop
and MTBF information clear of the CPU modules.
5-26 Installing and Using Utilities
„
Update
Allows the device identification information of the CPU modules to be viewed and BIOS of the
CPU modules to be updated. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later
for the update of BIOS of the CPU modules. The detailed device identification information can
be checked by selecting [ESMPRO] treeo[Hardware] treeo[Field Replaceable Unit] tree.
„
CPU
Allows the information of the CPU on the CPU modules to be viewed.
„
DIMM
Allows the information of DIMM on the CPU modules to be viewed.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-27
Monitoring IO Module
To monitor the IO modules and the components on the IO modules, refer to the [PCI Module] tree.
To see the information on the [PCI Module] tree, select the target IO module from [PCI Module] in
the [ft] tree.
You can see the following information on the IO modules and the components on the IO modules of
the [PCI Module] tree.
(This section describes the general information screens of the IO modules. The components on the
IO modules are described later.)
„
General
Allows the configuration and other information of the IO modules to be viewed.
„
Maintenance
Allows the start/stop, MTBF information clear, and diagnostics of the IO modules to be
provided. See "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" described later for the start/stop and
MTBF information clear of the IO modules.
5-28 Installing and Using Utilities
Monitoring PCI Slots and Devices on IOᴾModule
To monitor the PCI slots and devices on the IO modules, see the [PCI slot] tree. To see the
information on the [PCI slot] tree, select [PCI Module]o[PCI module (containing PCI slot to be
seen)]o[PCI slot] of the [ft] tree.
You can see the following information on the PCI slot and the devices on the PCI slot in the [PCI
slot] tree.
„
General
Allows the PCI slot configuration information to be viewed.
CHECK:
The status of the following PCI slots is always “Online.”
ID: 0/10/102, 0/10/103, 1/11/102, 1/11/103
„
Maintenance
Allows a device on the PCI slot to be started. This function is not supported in the current
version.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-29
„
PCI Device – General
Allows the information of devices on the PCI slot to be viewed.
„
PCI Device – Detailed information
Allows the detailed information of a device on the PCI slot to be viewed.
5-30 Installing and Using Utilities
Monitoring BMC on IOᴾModule
To monitor the base management controller (BMC), controller for system management, on the IO
modules, see the [BMC] tree. To see the information on the [BMC] tree, select [PCI Module] - [PCI
module (containing BMC to be seen)] - [BMC] of the [ft] tree.
You can see the BMC’s firmware version and other information in the [BMC] tree.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-31
Monitoring SCSI Enclosure
To monitor the SCSI enclosure, see the [SCSI enclosure] tree. To see the information on the [SCSI
enclosure] tree, select [SCSI enclosure] of the [ft] tree.
You can see the following information of the SCSI enclosure from the [SCSI enclosure] tree.
„
General
Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI enclosure to be viewed.
IMPORTANT:
You need to be aware that PCI modules, SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules under the
SCSI enclosure have impact on each other. For details, see “Impact of Module Status
Changes” described above.
„
SCSI Slot – General
Allows the configuration and other information of the SCSI slot to be viewed.
IMPORTANT:
You need to be aware of the status of hard disk during the mirror creation. For details, see
“Status Color after Mounting a Hard Disk” in “Supplement.”
5-32 Installing and Using Utilities
Monitoring Mirror Disk
To monitor the mirror disk components, see the [Mirror] tree. To view information on [Mirror] tree,
select [Mirror] under [ft] tree.
You can see the redundancy status of the mirrors and the device IDs of the SCSI slots into which
these hard disk components are connected.
[Mirror]
Installing and Using Utilities 5-33
Monitoring Hard Disk
To monitor the hard disks and detect disk failures at an early stage, use the NEC ESMPRO Manager
and Agent. You can see configurations and information of hard disk in the Data Viewer.
Monitoring Operations
This section describes how to maintain hard disks.
1.
Confirmation of hard disk failure
If NEC ESMPRO Agent detects some problem with a hard disk, it will report an alert of the
problem to NEC ESMPRO Manager. Check the alert viewer in the manager regularly.
Ex. If a hard disk in SCSI Slot (41/1) is broken, agent reports the following alert.
Status of the SCSI Slot (ID:41/1) has changed from Duplex to Broken.
And manager displays the problem information of the hard disk in the [ft] o [SCSI
enclosure] o [SCSI Slot] o [General] of the data viewer.
[General] of SCSI slot
5-34 Installing and Using Utilities
4.
Confirmation of mirror status
To check the redundancy status of the failed mirror disk, open [Mirror] screen under [ft]. On
this screen, you can check the redundancy status of the mirror and the status of the mirrored
hard disks.
[Mirror]
IMPORTANT:
The mirroring redundancy status will change depending on the status of the two hard disks
that make up a mirror as follows:
Status of hard disk 1
Duplex
Status of hard disk 2
Duplex
Simplex
Others
Simplex
Duplex
Simplex
Others
Others
Duplex
Simplex
Others
“-”: No status is shown.
Status of mirror volume
Normal
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
Warning
-
TIPS:
Unless the hard disks make up a mirror, the Mirror Disk screen does not show any
information.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-35
IMPORTANT:
The Mirror Disk screen shows a pair of two hard disks as a mirror. Disk pairs are shown in
the same manner even if a few volumes are created within a single disk or one volume
spans a few disks (span volume).
„
A few volumes are created within a single disk:
Mirror
Boot volume
Volume A
Volume C
Volume B
Volume D
Mirror
Mirror
Volume A
Volume C
Volume B
Volume D
ᴾ
The screen shows information on a pair of hard disks that make up a mirror. It does not
show information based on volumes (ex. Volume A, Volume B).
5-36 Installing and Using Utilities
5.
Recovery from a hard disk failure
If a hard disk breaks, the broken disk must be replaced immediately. This section describes
alert reports and status shown by the Data Viewer while disks are replaced to restore
mirroring.
(1) Detecting problem of a hard disk
See [1. Confirm of hard disk failure] above.
(2) Removing the hard disk
Disconnect the hard disk with the problem. At this time, NEC ESMPRO Agent reports
the following alert to manager. And icons related to the hard disk with problem change
the state of warning in the data viewer.
Since the hard disk has been removed, the status of the SCSI slot will be “EMPTY.”
TIPS:
You can identify the new hard disk by DevicePathID (ex. 41/1).
Installing and Using Utilities 5-37
When one hard disk with problem was disconnected, SCSI slot changes the status to
"Warning.”
[SCSI Slot] o [General]
IMPORTANT:
The status color of the SCSI slot differs depending on the connection of mirrored
hard disks:
„
If one of the mirrored disks was removed: Warning
„
If both of the mirrored disks were removed: Gray
Also, at this time, the redundant status of mirrored disks is changed to "Warning.”
[Mirror]
5-38 Installing and Using Utilities
(3) Mounting a hard disk drive.
Mount a hard disk drive. When a hard disk drive is inserted, an alert report is sent and
the information on a Data Viewer changed.
A hard disk drive is mounted and the SCSI slot status becomes “Online.”
ᴾ
[Details] of alert report
TIPS:
The device ID (for example, “41/1”) on the “Details” window of alert indicates the
location of the removed hard disk drive.
The state color becomes “Green” because a hard disk drive constructing a mirror is
mounted.
[General] of SCSI Slot
㩷
㩷
㩷
ᴾ
Installing and Using Utilities 5-39
The redundancy status becomes “Normal” because the hard disk drive constructing a
mirror is mounted.
[Mirror]
5-40 Installing and Using Utilities
Server Maintenance Utility
Server Maintenance Utility is a tool for managing server operation. It is used to configure operation
patterns, to check status at replacement of parts, and to instruct operations.
‹
How to start NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility that is installed on NEC
Express5800/ft series server
1. Go to the installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent.
The default installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent is /opt/nec/esmpro_sa. Here,
the destination is assumed to be /opt/nec/esmpro_sa.
2. Go to the storage location of Server Maintenance Utility:
cd bin
3. Start the tool:
./svmtnutl
‹
For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese, run the command below before starting
it. This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese fonts.
init 5
If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window, messages displayed
on the console may affect the screen display. If the screen is not displayed properly, press Ctrl
+ L to refresh the screen.
㩷
Screen Layout
Tree view: Information display view
Component screen: Displays information of the item that you selected in the tree in a new window.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-41
System Information
Chassis Information contains the following information:
Item
Type
Part Number
Serial Number
Description
Chassis type of the server
Parts number of the server chassis
Serial number of the server chassis
㩷
System Information contains the following information:
Item
OS(Ver)
Name
Description
Name of the OS installed on the server, and version
of the OS installed on the server
Host name of the server
㩷
Product Information contains the following information:
Item
Manufacturer
Product
Serial Number
Version
Description
Manufacturer of the server
Product name of the server
Serial number of the server
Version number of the server
ᴾ
LCD contains the following information:
Item
Module #0
Module #1
ᴾ
ᴾ
Description
Virtual LCD information of the module #0
Virtual LCD information of the module #1
5-42 Installing and Using Utilities
System Configuration
System Configuration contains the following information:
㩷
Quick dump that is harvested at the same time of system reboot.
Select the [Enable] radio button to obtain quick dump at a system crash.
When a quick dump cannot be produced, a dump is produced by the standard dump function.
㩷
Automatic firmware update.
Select the [Enable] radio button to enable automatic firmware update. When this item is enabled and
when one module is started, the firmware (System BIOS) of the other module started later will be
automatically updated to the one that is already running if it is old.
㩷
Automatic module start.
Select the [Enable] radio button to enable the automatic module start. When this item is enabled and
when the server is running in the simplex mode with one module, if the other module is inserted to
the chassis, it will be automatically started and modules will become duplex.
The module POWER switch of the server is always enabled regardless of this setting. (The module
stopped by the module POWER switch can be started even when this setting is disabled.)
The following buttons are displayed for System Configuration:
Item
Apply
Default
Description
Applies the system configuration to the server
Resets the system configuration of the server to the default.
These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware. Wait until such
processing is finished to perform the operations in the table.
ᴾ
Module#n
Module contains the following information:
Item
Device
Status
Description
CPU module name and PCI module name
Status of the CPU module and the PCI module
㩷
㩷
CPU Module(ID:n/m)
CPU Module contains the following information:
Item
Status
㩷
Description
Status of the CPU module
Installing and Using Utilities 5-43
MTBF Information contains the following information:
Note: The MTBF information is displayed only when the [<MTBF Info>] button is pressed.
Item
Type
Threshold
Current
Faults
Time of last fault
Description
Monitoring status of MTBF.
Use Threshold: MTBF is calculated at a fault occurrence. The device is
stopped when the calculated value is lower than the
threshold.
Never Restart: Always stops the device at a fault occurrence.
Always Restart: Always restarts the device at a fault occurrence.
Threshold of MTBF.
Current MTBF value.
Number of faults
Time of the last fault.
When there is none, “--” is displayed.
㩷
Firmware contains the following information:
Item
Version
Additional
Description
Version of the firmware (System BIOS)
Additional information of the firmware (System BIOS)
The version information of the firmware is displayed only when the [<Version>] button is pressed.
㩷
The following buttons are displayed for CPU Module:
Item
MTBF Info
Clear
Up
Description
Displays MTBF information
Clears the MTBF information of the CPU module
Starts the CPU module. When you also start the PCI module of the same
module, start the PCI module before the CPU module.
Down
Stops the CPU module
Version
Displays the version of the firmware
Update
Updates the firmware (System BIOS)
Switch
Switches the board.
Start the IO module and the CPU module of the sopped module
respectively and make modules duplex. Then, stop the other module's
CPU module and IO module respectively.
* Use this function when updating the firmware (BIOS). This function is
available for a module which CPU and PCI (IO) modules are stopped.
Harvest
Collects dump.
Before clicking this button, select one of the methods of to collect dump:
x
Save memory dump of the stopped module.
x
Harvest memory dump of the current system without stopping it.
* Do not start or stop the module while producing a dump.
* (1) The execution of each button may take a few minutes. Wait for a while to update the display
and check the module status.
(2) This system performs diagnostics to both CPU module and PCI module on the same board.
Execute diagnostics from a PCI module.
(3) These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware. Wait
until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table.
5-44 Installing and Using Utilities
PCI Module(ID:n/m)
PCI Module contains the following information:
The MTBF information is displayed only when the [<MTBF Info>] button is pressed.
Item
Status
Description
Status of the PCI module
㩷
MTBF Information contains the following information:
Item
Type
Threshold
Current
Faults
Time of last fault
Description
Monitoring state of MTBF.
Use Threshold: MTBF is calculated at a fault occurrence. The device is stopped
when the calculated value is lower than the threshold.
Never Restart: Always stops the device at a fault occurrence.
Always Restart: Always restarts the device at a fault occurrence.
Threshold of MTBF.
Current MTBF value.
Number of faults
Time of the last fault.
When there is none, “--” is displayed.
Diagnostics Information contains the following information:
Item
Time of last run
Message
Test No.
Description
Time and date of the last diagnostics execution
Message from the diagnostics result
Test number from the diagnostics result
㩷
The following buttons are displayed for PCI Module:
Item
MTBF Info
Clear
Up
Description
Displays MTBF information
Clears the MTBF information of the PCI module
Starts the PCI module.
The CPU module of the same module must be stopped when starting the PCI
module. When the CPU module of the same module is running, stop the CPU
module and then start it after starting the PCI module.
Down
Stops the PCI module.
Depending on a module state, a screen will go off temporarily. Also, USB
devices such as a keyboard and a mouse may not be available for a few
minutes. However, a system continues operating.
You cannot stop the module when the FT status LED is not illuminating green
(when the server is not duplicated).
Diagnose
Executes diagnostics of the CPU module on the same module as the PCI
module. To perform diagnostics, both CPU and PCI modules on the module
needs to be stopped.
* (1) The execution of each button may take a few minutes. Wait for a while to update the display
and check the module status.
(2) These operations cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware. Wait
until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-45
SCSI Adapter(ID:n/m/o)
SCSI Adapter contains the following information:
Item
Status
Description
Status of the SCSI adapter
ᴾ
SCSI Bus(ID:n/m/o/p)
The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus:
Item
Status
Description
Status of the SCSI bus (Primary or Secondary)
㩷
The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus:
Item
Change
Description
Makes the current bus the primary SCSI bus (For your maintenance
personnel).
* The execution of each button may take a few minutes. Wait for a while to update the display and
check the module status.
ᴾ
Ethernet Board(ID:/n/m/o) Port p
The following information is displayed for Ethernet Board:
Item
Status
Description
Status of the Ethernet board
ᴾ
BMC
The following information is displayed for Firmware:
Item
Active Status
IPMI Version
Firmware Revision
SDR Version
SEL Version
Description
Current status of the firmware
IPMI version
Firmware revision
SDR version
SEL version
ᴾ
SCSI Enclosure
The following information is displayed for SCSI Enclosure:
Item
Device
Status
ᴾ
Description
SCSI enclosure name
Status of the SCSI enclosure
5-46 Installing and Using Utilities
ᴾ
SCSI Enclosure(ID:n)
The following information is displayed for SCSI Enclosure:
Item
Status
Description
Status of the SCSI enclosure
ᴾ
The following information is displayed for SCSI Slot:
Item
Description
Slot
SCSI slot name
Status
Status of the SCSI slot
* The last digit of SCSI slots corresponds to the slot number of built-in SCSI disk.
For the rack-mount model: 0 through 5 from bottom to top.
For tower model: 0 through 5 from right to left.
ᴾ
SCSI Slot (ID:n.m)
The following information is displayed for SCSI Slot:
Item
Status
Description
Status of the SCSI slot (individual built-in SCSI disk)
㩷
The following information is displayed for SCSI Bus:
Item
Path State
PCI Module
SCSI Adapter
SCSI Bus
ᴾ
Description
State of the two SCSI buses connected to individual internal SCSI
disks.
PCI module number
SCSI adapter number
SCSI bus number
Installing and Using Utilities 5-47
Firmware Update
The following information is displayed for Firmware Update:
Copy online BIOS image to offline.
Select this radio button to copy online BIOS image to offline.
Specify the file path to update.
Select this radio button to specify the file path to update.
Type the location of the firmware.
Type the full path (location and the file name) of the firmware to update in the edit box.
The following buttons are displayed for Firmware Update:
Item
Execute
Cancel
Description
Updates the firmware
*Do not perform the following operations during the update of
firmware.
- Start/stop of a module
- OS shutdown
- Module removal
- Module power-off
*Firmware can be updated from an old version to a new version only.
It cannot be updated if its version number is equal to or smaller than
the one of both modules of the system whose firmware you want to
update.
Cancels firmware update
㩷
㩷
Key Operations
Arrow keys
Use the up or down arrow key (Ĺ or Ļ) to move up or down the selection of the tree item when the
focus is on the tree view. For items with “+” or “-,” use the left or right arrow key (ĸ or ĺ) to
expand or close the tree.
Space key
When the focus is on the tree view, use the space key to expand or close items with “+” or “-” on
the tree. When the focus is on the component screen, use the space key to check a radio button.
Tab key
When the focus is on the tree view, use the Tab key to move to the [Exit] button. When the focus is
on the component screen, use the Tab key to move to the next selection item.
Enter key
When the focus is on the tree view, use the Enter key to display the component screen of a
component.
5-48 Installing and Using Utilities
Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series
The server maintenance can be done in two ways; one is to use NEC ESMPRO Manager for remote
maintenance and the other is to use the NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility on the
server for local maintenance.
TIPS:
„ How to start NEC ESMPRO Agent Server Maintenance Utility that is installed on NEC
Express5800/ft series server
1. Go to the installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent.
The default installation destination of NEC ESMPRO Agent is /opt/nec/esmpro_sa.
Here, the destination is assumed to be /opt/nec/esmpro_sa.
2. Go to the storage location of Server Maintenance Utility:
cd bin
3. Start the tool:
./svmtnutl
„ For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese, run the command below before
starting it. This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese
fonts.
init 5
If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window, messages
displayed on the console may affect the screen display. If the screen is not displayed
properly, press Ctrl + L to refresh the screen.
The maintenance functions that can be executed from NEC ESMPRO include three types, those
common to all components, those specific to particular components, and general system settings.
The maintenance functions common to all components are operated in the same way basically (the
operation procedure and typical examples of screen images are described below).
The table below lists the maintenance functions common to all components.
Component
CPU module
IO module
PCI slot
Ethernet board
SCSI adapter
SCSI enclosure
SCSI electronics
SCSI slot
R:
L:
—:
–:
R
L
R
L
MTBF
clear
R
L
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
Start
Stop
—
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
Diagnosis
R
L
F/W
update
R
L
–
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
—
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Support
Not support
Installing and Using Utilities 5-49
The maintenance operations in the table cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating
firmware. Wait until such processing is finished to perform the operations in the table.
The table below shows the component-specific maintenance functions executable from NEC
ESMPRO.
Component
CPU module
R:
L:
—:
–:
R
L
–
—
—
Board switch
—
R
L
—
—
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Support
Not support
Change of primary SCSI bus
R
L
Component
SCSI bus
R:
L:
—:
–:
–
—
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Support
Not support
BMC firmware update
Component
BMC
R:
L:
—:
–:
Dump acquisition
during system
operation
R
L
Dump
acquisition
R
L
—
—
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Support
Not support
The table below shows the support of the whole system setup functions.
Component
Whole system
R:
L:
—:
–:
Quick dump
R
L
–
—
Automatic firmware
update
R
L
–
—
Automatic module start
R
L
–
—
Remote. Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local. Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Support
Not support
5-50 Installing and Using Utilities
Start and Stop of Components
To start or stop a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the [Maintenance] tree of the
component in the [ft] tree of the data viewer. Open the tree of the component to be started or
stopped and select the [Maintenance] tree.
To start or stop a component with the Server Maintenance Utility, use the component screens of the
Server Maintenance Utility.
The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be started or stopped.
Component
CPU
Module
IO Module
Start
Remote
When the cause of
down is reviewed
and the system is
restarted in module
down state.
Executable in any of
the following module
states (this can be
viewed on manager
screen):
x Removed
x Broken
x Shot
x Firmware Update
Complete
x Diagnostics
Passed
Local
When the cause of
down is reviewed
and the system is
restarted in module
down state.
Executable in the
following module
state: (this can be
viewed on Server
Maintenance Utility
screen)
x Removed
x Broken
x Shot
x Firmware Update
Complete
x Diagnostics
Passed
Same as above
Same as above
Stop
Remote
When system is
stopped forcibly
due to replacement
or malfunction of
module.
Local
When system is
stopped forcibly
due to replacement
or malfunction of
module.
Executable in the
Executable in the
following module
following module
state: (this can be
state (this can be
viewed on Server
viewed on manager Maintenance Utility
screen):
screen)
x Duplex
x Duplex
Same as above
Same as above
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
IMPORTANT:
IO modules, SCSI adapters, SCSI buses, and modules under the SCSI enclosure have impact on
each other. You need to be aware of this, for example, when you replace a CPU/IO module. For
details, see “Impact of Module Status Changes” described earlier in this chapter.
When starting modules, ensure to start IO modules first and then CPU modules. To start IO
modules when CPU modules are running and IO modules are stopped, the CPU modules must be
stopped before starting IO modules.
CHECK:
Even if stoppage of a CPU module or IO module is requested, the module will not be stopped if
it is judged that the system would be unable to continue running. It is the same for when the FT
STATUS LED is off.
For example, the module is not stopped when the CPU/IO modules are successfully duplicated,
Installing and Using Utilities 5-51
but the link cable of a teamed LAN is connected to only one side of the modules or when a
storage device connected by FC is connected to only one side of the modules.
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager
„
Start
1.
Select the target component in the [ft] tree.
2.
Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.
3.
Click the [Bring Up] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the target component.
A certain time is required for the start.
The start result can be confirmed by "State" on the target component screen. The result of
the start operation is reported by the server as an alert.
CHECK:
When starting a stopped IO module, diagnostics of the CPU/IO modules are
automatically performed. The IO module is started after the diagnostics.
„
Stop
Perform the procedure below before replacing a component.
1.
Select the target component in the [ft] tree.
2.
Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.
3.
Click the [Bring Down] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the target component.
A certain time is required for the stop.
The stop result can be confirmed by "State" on the target component screen. The result of
the stop operation is reported by the server as an alert.
CHECK:
When stopping IO module, check that the status of Ethernet is “Duplex” on NEC
ESMPRO Manager. Do not stop the IO module especially when LAN is connected
only to the IO module on that side.
5-52 Installing and Using Utilities
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 1
[Maintenance] screen of CPU module
[CPU Module] – [CPU Module] – [Maintenance]
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager 2
[Maintenance] screen of IO module
[PCI Module] – [Maintenance]
Installing and Using Utilities 5-53
Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility
Start
1.
Select the target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility.
The screen of the target component appears.
2.
Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.
3.
Select [Up] of the target component.
A certain time is required for the start.
The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component. The result of the
start operation is registered in the syslog.
Stop
Stop before replacing components.
1.
Select the target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility.
The screen of the target component appears.
2.
Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.
3.
Select [Down] of the target component.
A certain time is required for the start.
The start result can be confirmed by the LEDs on the target component. The result of the
start operation is registered in the syslog.
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
Main window
[CPU Module] screen
5-54 Installing and Using Utilities
Check and Clear of MTBF Information
The MTBF information of a component can be viewed or cleared (initialized).
The server manages the MTBF (mean time between failures) of each component. If a fault occurs in
a component, the server series calculates the MTBF of the component again. If the calculated value
is lower than the pre-defined threshold, the server disables the component to be used.
Contact your maintenance personnel if such a symptom as above occurs.
IMPORTANT:
A disabled component with the MTBF lower than the threshold can be forcibly enabled by
clearing the MTBF. However, contact your maintenance personnel for the forced use of such a
component.
To clear the MTBF information of a component with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the
[Maintenance] tree of the component of the [ft] tree of the data viewer. Open the tree of the
component whose MTBF information is to be cleared and select the [Maintenance] tree.
To clear the MTBF information of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility, use the
component screens of the Server Maintenance Utility. The table below shows the potential cases in
which the MTBF information of a component is to be cleared. Contact your maintenance personnel
for clearing MTBF information.
Component
CPU Module
MTBF clear
Remote
Local
To start the module forcibly after
To start the module forcibly after replacing
replacing a module or if MTBF became a module or if MTBF became lower than
lower than the threshold due to
the threshold due to malfunction and
malfunction and disabled the module.
disabled the module.
IO Module
Same as above
Same as above
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Installing and Using Utilities 5-55
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager
Perform the procedure below before replacement of a component.
1.
Select the target component in the [ft] tree.
2.
Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen.
3.
Click the [Clear] button in the [MTBF Clear] of the target component.
The MTBF clearing result can be confirmed by the MTBF information on the target
component screen. The result of the MTBF clearing operation is reported by the server as an
alert.
CHECK:
„
At this point, the "State" display on the target component screen is not changed.
„
If the MTBF clear is executed in the following conditions, diagnostics of the CPU/IO
modules are automatically performed after MTBF clear:
-
4.
The target CPU/IO module is turned on
Both of the target CPU module and IO module are stopped
Start the component.
CHECK:
At this point, the "State" display on the target component screen is changed.
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager
[Maintenance] screen of IO module
[PCI module] – [Maintenance]
5-56 Installing and Using Utilities
Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility
Perform the procedure below before replacement of a module.
1.
Select the target module from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility.
The screen of the target module appears.
2.
Check the current state of the target module with the LEDs.
3.
Select [Clear] in [MTBF Clear] of the target module.
You can confirm the MTBF clear result by checking the LEDs of the target component. The
result is registered in the syslog.
4.
Start the component.
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
Main window
[PCI Module] screen
Installing and Using Utilities 5-57
Diagnostics
The server provides the self-check diagnostics function for some components. If a fault occurs in a
component, the server can diagnose the component to detect the fault.
For this server, CPU modules and IO modules can be diagnosed all together.
To diagnose a component with the NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the [Maintenance] tree of the
component in the data viewer. Open the tree of the component to be diagnosed and select the
[Maintenance] tree.
To diagnose of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility, use the component screens of the
Server Maintenance Utility.
The table below shows the potential cases in which a component is to be diagnosed.
Component
CPU Module
Diagnostics
Remote
Local
When a phenomenon causing the
When a phenomenon causing the
module to be down occurs or a
module to be down occurs or a
phenomenon supposed to be a
phenomenon supposed to be a
malfunction occurs.
malfunction occurs.
Executable in any of the following
module states (this can be viewed on
manager screen):
x
x
x
x
Removed
Broken
Shot
Firmware Update Complete
To diagnose the module under
operation, bring down the module
before the diagnostics.
Executable in any of the following
module states:
(This can be viewed on Server
Maintenance Utility screen.)
x
Removed
x
Broken
x
Shot
x
Firmware Update Complete
(Diagnostics Passed)
To diagnose the module under
operation, bring down the module
before the diagnostics.
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
IMPORTANT:
Diagnostics operations are performed to IO modules. When IO modules are diagnosed, CPU
modules will be diagnosed as well. CPU modules cannot be diagnosed individually.
The system diagnostics cannot be performed while collecting dump or updating firmware. Wait until
such processing is finished to perform the diagnostics.
5-58 Installing and Using Utilities
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager
1.
Select the target module in the [ft] tree.
2.
Check the current state with the "State" display on the target module screen. If CPU and IO
modules of the target module are running, stop them.
3.
Click the [Diagnostics] button in the [Maintenance] screen for the IO module of the target
module.
When the diagnostics is started, the CPU and IO modules are diagnosed together.
The diagnostics result can be confirmed by "Result" of the diagnostics on the target
component screen. The result of the diagnostics is reported by the server as an alert.
The result of diagnostics executed last is displayed in the [Diagnostics Information] column.
In addition, if a fault is detected by the result of the diagnostics, the state of the [General
Information] tree of the component is changed.
CHECK:
When stopping IO module, check that the status of Ethernet is “Duplex” on NEC ESMPRO
Manager. Do not stop the IO module especially when LAN is connected only to the IO
module on that side.
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager
[Maintenance] screen of IOᴾmodule
[PCI Module] – [Maintenance]
Installing and Using Utilities 5-59
Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility
1.
Select a target component from the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility.
The screen of the target component appears.
2.
Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs.
3.
Diagnose the component by selecting [Diagnose] in [PCI Module Diagnosis].
The result can be viewed by reacquiring the status of the component. The result is
registered in syslog.
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
Main window
[PCI Module] screen
5-60 Installing and Using Utilities
Firmware Update
The server can update firmware (including BIOS) if some hardware components operate in the
online state (in which the system continues the operation but the component trying to update
firmware or BIOS is stopped).
To update firmware with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use the [Update] tree of the component in the
data viewer. Open the tree of the component for which firmware is updated and select the [Update]
tree.
To update the firmware of a component with the Server Maintenance Utility, use the component
screens of the Server Maintenance Utility.
To update the firmware of a component, the firmware image file of the firmware for update must
previously be stored in the managed server. On the firmware update screen, specify the path to the
firmware image file for update.
The table below shows the potential cases in which the firmware of a component is to be updated.
Component
CPU Module
Firmware update
Remote
Local
When BIOS must be updated to
When BIOS must be updated to new
new one.
one.
Executable in the following module
Executable in any of the
following module states (this can state (this can be viewed on Server
Maintenance Utility screen):
be viewed on manager screen):
x
Removed
x
Removed
x
Broken
x
Broken
x
Shot
x
Shot
x
Diagnostics Passed
x
Diagnostics Passed
(Firmware Update Complete)
To update the module under
To update the module under operation,
operation, bring down the
bring down the module before the
module before the update.
update.
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
Installing and Using Utilities 5-61
Procedure in NEC ESMPRO Manager
1.
Save the image data of the update firmware in an arbitrary directory of the server.
Write down the path to the directory in which the image data is saved.
2.
Select the target component in the [ft] tree.
3.
Check the current state with the "State" display on the target component screen. If the
component is operating, stop the component. Stop the CPU module and then stop the PCI
module.
4.
Click the [Firmware Update] button in the [Update] screen for the target component.
Sample screen of NEC ESMPRO Manager
[Update] screen of CPU module
[CPU Module] – [Update]
5.
Select [Specify the file path to update], enter the directory
where the firmware to update is stored (the directory you
wrote down in step 1) and the file name of the image data
into the input box, and click the [Execute] button.
The server will update the firmware.
The update result can be confirmed by the state on the
target component screen (indication of "Firmware update
completed"). The result of the update processing is
reported by the server as an alert.
6.
After the BIOS for a single CPU module is completed, click the [Jump Switch] button. The
module completely updated is started and the active module is stopped.
The result of switching boards is reported as an alert. Switching boards should be performed
only by “Firmware Update.” The keyboard and mouse may not function for a few minutes
while switching boards.
If the module is not switched successfully, you can continue to the next step by clicking
5-62 Installing and Using Utilities
[Down] of the module you want to stop.
7.
Click [Diagnostics] on the [Maintenance] screen of the other PCI module stopped.
8.
Start the other stopped module.
Starting the module causes the firmware to be updated automatically. However, if the [Enable
automatic firmware update] property is disabled, the module is started but the firmware will
not be updated. In such a case, perform the following operations before starting the module:
(1) Click the [Firmware Update] button in the
[Update] screen for the target component.
(2) In the [Firmware Update] dialog box, select [Copy
online BIOS image to Offline] as a method for
updating, and click [Execute].
IMPORTANT:
A message prompting you to reconstruct the tree of Data Viewer you are updating may appear. In
such a case, click [Yes].
CHECK:
When stopping IO module, check that the status of Ethernet is “Duplex” on NEC ESMPRO
Manager. Do not stop the IO module especially when LAN is connected only to the IO module
on that side.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-63
Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility
1.
Enable “Automatic module start” and “Automatic firmware update.”
See “Setup of System Operation” in this chapter for the procedure to enable.
2.
Store the image data of the firmware for update in the NEC Express5800/ft series.
Save it in the /etc directory under the name “BIOS.ROM.”
3.
On the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility, select the target component.
The screen of the target component appears.
4.
Check the current state of the target component with the LEDs. If the component is
running, stop the component.
5.
Select [Update] of [Firmware].
The [Firmware Update] screen appears.
6.
Select [Specify the file path to update.], type “/etc/BIOS.ROM” as the file path, and then
select [Execute].
The firmware update will be performed. After the firmware update has completed, the
target component automatically starts and the other stops.
IMPORTANT:
If “Automatic firmware update” is disabled, the target component will not start and the
firmware update will not complete. In such case, perform the firmware update again
after enabling “Automatic firmware update.”
7.
The other component will start automatically and the firmware will be updated
automatically.
IMPORTANT:
If “Automatic module start” is disabled, the target component will not start
automatically. In such case, start the component manually. The firmware will be
updated automatically.
8.
When BIOS of one CPU module is updated, select [Switch] in [Board Switch]. The
updated module will be started and the module currently running will be stopped. Use
[Board Switch] only when updating firmware. While switching boards, the keyboard and
the mouse will be unavailable for few minutes.
If the modules were not switched due to the system state, you can continue to the next step
by selecting [Down] in [CPU Module Up/Down] of the module you want to stop.
9.
10.
Diagnose the stopped PCI module.
Start the module.
5-64 Installing and Using Utilities
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
Main window
[CPU Module] screen
[Firmware Update] screen
Even if you do not have the image data of firmware for update, the firmware can be copied from the
other module.
By starting the module, the firmware will be updated automatically. However, when the [Automatic
firmware update] property is disabled, follow the steps below to update the firmware:
1. Start the system using the module of the firmware copy source.
Check the status LEDs of the copy destination component for its current status. If it is running,
stop it.
2. On the [Update] screen of the target component, select [Firmware update].
3. When the [Firmware Update] screen appears, check [Copy online BIOS image to offline] and
execute it.
Firmware is updated by copying the firmware on the online side to the offline side.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-65
Dump Collection
To collect the dump file with NEC ESMPRO Manager, use [CPU Module] o[Maintenance] tree in
the data viewer.
To collect the dump with the Server Maintenance Utility, use the utility screen of the component.
IMPORTANT:
Collect dump only for the purpose of failure investigation.
„
Collecting dump of inactive module
The dump is acquired from the inactive CPU module (Broken or Shot).
The dump can be collected only when the power is supplied with the module POWER LED
illuminating and both CPU module and IO module are stopped.
5-66 Installing and Using Utilities
„
Collecting dump under system operation
Either of the CPU modules is entered into the offline state and the dump is collected during
system operation. After the acquisition, the CPU module is returned to the online state again.
This can be done only in the duplex system.
The table below shows the potential cases in which the dump is acquired.
Component
CPU Module
Saving dump of stopped module
Remote
–
Local
When a fault or malfunction
occurs in the system.
Save the dump if requested
by maintenance personnel.
Executable in the following
module state:
(this can be viewed on
Server Maintenance Utility
screen)
x
Removed
x
Broken
x
Shot
x
Firmware Update
Complete
x
Diagnostics Passed
Saving dump of component under
system operation
Remote
Local
When a fault or
When a fault or
malfunction occurs malfunction occurs in
in the system.
the system.
Save the dump if
Save the dump if
requested by
requested by
maintenance
maintenance
personnel.
personnel
Executable in the
Executable in the
following module
following module
state (this can be
state:
viewed on manager (this can be viewed on
screen):
Server Maintenance
Utility screen)
x
Duplex
x
Duplex
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
–:
Not support
Installing and Using Utilities 5-67
Procedure in the Server Maintenance Utility
1.
On the main window of the Server Maintenance Utility, select the target component.
The screen of the target component appears.
2.
Check the current status of the target CPU module with the LEDs.
3.
Select a dump acquisition method on the CPU module screen, and select [Harvest].
A certain time is required for the dump acquisition. The dump is stored to the system
defined location on the server.
The result of the dump acquisition can be registered in the syslog.
4.
Start the component.
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
Main window
[CPU Module] screen
5-68 Installing and Using Utilities
Setup of System Operation
The following properties can be set as the operation setup of the whole system.
„
Quick dump that is harvested at the same time of reboot
If “Enable” is selected for this item, dump is collected as the system reboots when an error
occurs in the system. When “Disable” is selected, dump is collected by the OS standard dump
function. 㩷
The default value is “Enable.”
„
Automatic firmware update
If “Enable” is selected for this item, the BIOS of the new CPU module is updated to the BIOS
of the existing CPU module to match with each other. If “Disable” is selected, the BIOS of the
new CPU module is not updated automatically.
The default value is “Enable.”
„
Automatic module start
If “Enable” is selected for this item, modules will be put into the duplex mode automatically
when mounting both modules and restarting the system. If “Disable” is selected, the modules
will not be in the duplex mode.
The default value is "Enable."
㩷
㩷
Installing and Using Utilities 5-69
Settings can be made in the [System Configuration] window of Server Maintenance Utility.
The table below shows the potential cases in which the system operation setup is changed. Contact
your maintenance personnel for the change of the system operation setup. Setting change will take
effect after system reboot. However, the utility does not indicate that reboot is required.
The system operation settings cannot be made while collecting dump or updating firmware. Wait until
such processing is finished to make the settings.
Component
Whole
system
Quick dump
Remote
–
Local
Executable if
the system is
operating.
When dump is
acquired by
using the
dump function
normally
installed in OS
at occurrence
of system
fault.
Automatic firmware
update
Remote Local
Executable if the
–
system is
operating.
When firmware is
updated manually
at insertion of
new module
Automatic module start
Remote Local
Executable if the
–
system is
operating.
When firmware is
started manually at
insertion of new
module
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
–:
Not support
Configure the system settings using the Server Maintenance Utility in the following procedure. The
system cannot be configured using the NEC ESMPRO Manager.
1.
Select [System Setting] on main window of the Server Maintenance Utility. The [System
Setting] screen is displayed.
2.
Change the properties on the [System Setting] screen.
3.
Select [Apply].
Sample screen of Server Maintenance Utility
[System Setting] screen
Main window
5-70 Installing and Using Utilities
BMC Firmware Update
The firmware of the BMC on the PCI module can be updated.
The base management controller (BMC) is the processor exclusively used for monitoring the
system’s operating environment faults and controlling of the system.
The BMC firmware can be updated by using the BMC firmware update utility.
Both NEC ESMPRO Manager and the Server Maintenance Utility can start the BMC firmware
update utility.
To update the BMC firmware, the firmware image file must be updated on the managed server in
advance. On the BMC firmware update screen, specify the path of the image file of the firmware to
be updated.
The table below shows the potential cases in which the BMC firmware is to be updated.
IMPORTANT:
Contact your maintenance personnel for the update of the BMC firmware.
Component
BMC
BMC firmware update
Remote
Local
When an update to new firmware is
When an update to new firmware is
required.
required.
Executable in the following module
Executable in the following module state
state (this can be viewed on
(this can be viewed on Server Maintenance
manager screen):
Utility screen䋩
z
Duplex
z
Duplex
Remote: Executable from remote management PC by using NEC ESMPRO Manager
Local:
Executable on local server by using Server Maintenance Utility
–:
Not support
Installing and Using Utilities 5-71
Procedure of Update from NEC ESMPRO Manager Menu
Update firmware in the procedure as follows:
1.
Select [Tools]o[BMC FW Update Utility] from
the Operation Window’s menu.
The [BMC FW Update] dialog box appears.
2.
Enter the device name and click [OK].
The [Execution Check] dialog box appears.
3.
Store the firmware in the directory specified by
[Location].
The storage area may be modified. See "Changing
Update Data Storage Destination" described later.
4.
Click [OK].
Run firmware update.
The advance of the update appears during update.
At the termination of update, the update result is displayed.
5.
Click [OK].
5-72 Installing and Using Utilities
Procedure of Update from the Server Maintenance Utility
Update the firmware in the procedure as follows.
1.
Select [Firmware] on the main window of the Server
Maintenance Utility.
The [Firmware Update] screen appears.
2.
Select [Update].
The [BMC FW update Tool] screen appears.
3.
Select [BMC FW update Command]
menu, and press Enter.
The firmware will be updated.
Installing and Using Utilities 5-73
Changing Update Data Storage Destination
Change the storage destination by using the Server Maintenance Utility in the procedure below.
1.
Select [Firmware] on the main window of the Server
Maintenance Utility.
The [Firmware Update] screen appears.
2.
Select [Update].
The [BMC FW update Tool] screen
appears.
3.
Select [BMC FW update Property
Setting] menu, and then press Enter.
The [BMC FW update Service Property
Setting] screen appears.
4.
Enter the storage destination in [Data
File Path], and then click [Data save
and Exit].
If you click [Cancel and Exit], the
property setting will be finished with
the updated data canceled.
The confirmation message for the storage
is displayed.
5.
Press Y to store. Press N not to store.
5-74 Installing and Using Utilities
NEC DianaScope
NEC DianaScope is software for remote management of the server.
For features and installation of NEC DianaScope, see “NEC DianaScope Online Document” in
“NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.”
TIPS:
To use NEC DianaScope with the server, appropriate server license is required.
- UL1198- 001E DianaScope Additional Server License (1)
License for managing one server.
- UL1198- 011E DianaScope Additional Server License (10)
License for managing ten servers.
ft Remote Management Card comes with one license of NEC DianaScope.
Notes
The online document provides general descriptions of overall severs to be remotely managed by
NEC DianaScope, but this section indicates notes that require special attention for remotely
managing this server using NEC DianaScope.
z
z
z
The server can be managed remotely only when ft Remote Management Card is installed.
When remotely managing this server from NEC DianaScope, only LAN connection is
available. Direct connection and connection via modem are not supported.
NEC DianaScope cannot power off, power cycle or reset the server. The server does not
support such functions.
Chapter 6
Maintenance
This chapter describes the daily maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series and precautions when
relocating or storing the server.
6-2 Maintenance
DAILY MAINTENANCE
To use your NEC Express5800/ft series in best condition, check and maintain regularly as described
below. If an error is found on your NEC Express5800/ft series, consult your sales agent.
Checking Alert
Monitor the failure occurrence by NEC ESMPRO during the system operation.
Always check whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the management PC.
Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or Alert Viewer of
NEC ESMPRO Manager.
Viewers of NEC ESMPRO
Operation Window
Alert Viewer
Data Viewer
Checking STATUS LEDs
Check the LED indication on the front of the NEC Express5800/ft series, on hard disks installed in
3.5-inch hard disk drive bay, or on LCD display when the server is powered on or powered off by
the shut down operation. The functions and indications of LEDs are described in Chapter 2. If any
indication that shows an error, contact your sales agent.
Maintenance 6-3
Making Backup Copies
NEC recommends you make backup copies of your valuable data stored in hard disks of the server
on a regular basis. For backup storage devices suitable for the server and backup tools, consult with
your sales agent.
When you have changed the hardware configuration or BIOS configuration, select "System
Information Management" and then "Save" of the Off-line Maintenance Utility to make a backup
copy of the system information.
Cleaning
Clean the server on a regular basis to keep the server in a good shape.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of
death or serious personal injury. See “PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY” in
Chapter 1.
x Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
x Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
x Disconnect the power plug before cleaning the server.
Cleaning the NEC Express5800/ft series
For daily cleaning, wipe the external surfaces of the server with a dry soft cloth. Follow the
procedure below if stains remain on the surfaces:
IMPORTANT:
„
To avoid altering the material and color of the server, do not use volatile solvents such as
thinner or benzene to clean the server.
„
The power receptacle, the cables, the connectors on the rear panel of server, and the inside
of the server must be kept dry. Do not moisten them with water.
1.
Make sure that the server is powered off.
2.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
3.
Wipe off dust from the power cord plug with a dry cloth.
4.
Soak a soft cloth in neutral detergent that is diluted with cold or warm water, and squeeze
it firmly.
5.
Rub off stains on the server with the cloth prepared in Step 4.
6.
Soak a soft cloth in water, squeeze it firmly and wipe the server with it once again.
6-4 Maintenance
7.
Wipe the server with a dry cloth.
8.
Wipe off dust from the fan exhaust opening on the rear of the server with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the Keyboard and Mouse
IMPORTANT:
A keyboard and a mouse use USB interface. Therefore it is not necessary to power off the
server when connecting or disconnecting them.
Disconnect the keyboard from the server while the devices in the system (the server and the
peripheral devices) remain turned on. Wipe the keyboard surface with a dry cloth. Then connect the
keyboard to the server.
The mouse operation depends on the degree of smoothness of the internal ball rotation. To keep the
mouse ball clean, use the mouse in a place with little dust. Follow the steps below to clean the
mouse regularly:
1.
Disconnect the mouse from the USB hub of the keyboard while the server remains
powered on.
2.
Turn the mouse upside down, and rotate the
mouse ball cover counterclockwise to remove it.
Take out the ball from the mouse.
3.
Wipe the mouse ball with a dry soft cloth.
Mouse
Mouse ball
If stains remain, use a soft cloth to wipe them off.
Soak the soft cloth in neutral detergent that is
diluted with water or warm water, and squeeze it
firmly,
4.
Wipe three small rollers inside the mouse with
cotton swab.
Mouse cover
Bottom
Use the cotton swab soaked with alcohol if stains
remain.
5.
Put the mouse ball back into the mouse.
If the mouse or rollers are wet in steps 3 and 4, put
it back after fully dried.
6.
7.
Place the mouse ball cover, and rotate it clockwise
until it is locked.
Connect the mouse to the server (the USB hub of
the keyboard).
Rollers
Maintenance 6-5
Cleaning the Floppy Disk Drive
A read/write error may occur due to stains on the read/write head of the floppy disk drive.
Use the cleaner dedicated for floppy disk drive to clean the read/write head. It is recommended to
clean the head on regular basis.
Cleaning CD-ROM
A dusty CD-ROM or dust-accumulated tray causes the device to fail to read data correctly.
Follow the procedure below to clean the tray and CD-ROM regularly:
1.
Make sure that the server is powered on.
2.
Press the Eject button on the front of the CD-ROM drive.
The tray comes out.
3.
Hold the CD-ROM lightly and take it out from the tray.
IMPORTANT:
Do not touch the signal side of the CD-ROM with your hand.
4.
Wipe the tray with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT:
Do not wipe the lens of the CD-ROM drive. Doing so may damage the lens and may
cause a malfunction of the drive.
5.
Gently push on the tray front to close the tray.
6.
Wipe the signal side of the CD-ROM with a dry soft cloth.
IMPORTANT:
Wipe CD-ROMs from the center to the outside. Use only CD-ROM cleaner if
necessary. Cleaning a CD-ROM with record spray/cleaner, benzene, or thinner causes
damage to the CD-ROM contents. At worst, inserting the CD-ROM into the server
may cause failure.
6-6 Maintenance
Cleaning Tape Drive
Dirt on the tape head may be a cause of unsuccessful backup and damage to tape cartridge. Clean
the tape head regularly using a cleaning tape. For procedure and interval of cleaning as well as
lifetime of a tape cartridge to use, see instructions included with the tape drive.
Maintenance 6-7
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS
The System Diagnostics runs several tests on the server.
Select [Tools] - [System Diagnostics] in the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER to diagnose the system.
Test Items
The following items are tested in system diagnostics.
„
Memory
„
CPU cache memory
„
Hard disk drive used as a system
IMPORTANT:
When executing the system diagnostics, make sure to remove the LAN cable. Executing the
system diagnostics with the LAN cable connected, the network may be influenced.
TIPS:
On checking the hard disk drive, no data is written into the disk.
Startup and Exit of System Diagnostics
Follow the steps below to start the system diagnostics. (If the server is running, shut it down, and
execute Step 1 through Step 12.)ᴾ
1. Shutdown the OS, and power off the server. Then, unplug the power cord.
2.
Disconnect all the LAN cables from the server.
3.
Plug the power cord and power on the server.
4.
Use the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM to start the system.
Refer to “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER” of Chapter 5 “Installing and Using Utilities,” to
start the system properly. “NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu” is displayed on the
screen, when starting the system from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
6-8 Maintenance
5.
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER Top Menu
Select [Tools].
6.
Select [System Diagnostics].
The system diagnostics starts and will be completed in approximately three minutes.
When the diagnostics is completed, the screen of the display changes as shown below:
Diagnostics tool title
Test window title
Test result
Test summary
window
Guideline
Diagnostics tool title
Shows the name and version of the diagnostic tool.
Test window title
Shows the progress of the diagnostics. “Test End” is displayed when the diagnostics
completes.
Test result
Shows the start, end, and elapsed time and completion status of the diagnostics.
Maintenance 6-9
Guideline
Shows the details of the keys to operate window.
Test summary window
Shows the results of each test that executed the diagnostics. Move the cursor and press the
Enter key on the cursor line to display the details of the test.
When an error is detected by the system diagnostics, the relevant test result in the test
summary window is highlighted in red, and “Abnormal End” is displayed in the result on
the right side.
Move the cursor to the test that detected the error, and press the Enter key. Record the
error message that has been output to the Detail Information screen and contact your sales
agent.
7.
Follow the guideline shown at the bottom of the screen, and press the Esc key.
The [Enduser Menu] below is displayed.
<Test Result>
Shows the diagnostics completion screen of the above diagnostics.
<Device List>
Shows a list of connected devices.
<Log Info>
Shows the log information of the diagnostics. It can be saved on a floppy disk. To save it
on a floppy disk, insert a formatted floppy disk to the floppy disk drive, and select
<Save(F)>.
<Option>
Changes the output destination of a log.
<Reboot>
Reboots the system.
㩷
㩷
8.
Select <Reboot> in the [Enduser Menu] above.
The server restarts and the system is started from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
9.
Exit the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER, and remove the CD-ROM from the CD-ROM drive.
6-10 Maintenance
10.
Power off the server and unplug the power cord from the receptacle.
11.
Reconnect all the LAN cables that have been disconnected in Step 2 to the server.
12.
Plug the power cord.
This completes the system diagnostics.
Maintenance 6-11
OFF-LINE MAINTENANCE UTILITY
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is an OS-independent maintenance program. When you are unable
to start the OS-dependent NEC ESMPRO to troubleshoot a problem, the Off-line Maintenance
Utility can be used.
IMPORTANT:
„
The Off-line Maintenance Utility is intended for use of your sales agent. The NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM and the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD you
have created contain a file that describes operation of the utility, but do not attempt to use
the utility by yourself. Contact your sales agent and follow instructions.
„
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility disables any access from a client to the server.
Starting the Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility may be started in the following ways.
NEC Express5800/ft series does not support the feature to start the Off-line Maintenance Utility
from the maintenance partition.
„
From the CD-ROM
Set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive and reboot the system.
After the menu is displayed on the screen, select [Tools] - [Off-line Maintenance Utility].
The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the CD-ROM.
„
From the floppy disk
Set the Off-line Maintenance Utility Bootable FD in the floppy disk drive and reboot the
system. The Off-line Maintenance Utility program starts from the boot disk. The Off-line
Maintenance Utility Bootable FD is created by selecting [Tools] - [Create Support FD] on
the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER.
Features of Off-line Maintenance Utility
The Off-line Maintenance Utility provides the following features.
„
IPMI Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view the system event log (SEL), sensor data record (SDR), and
field replaceable unit (FRU) and to make a backup copy of them.
Using this feature, you can find system errors and events to determine a maintenance part.
„
BIOS Setup Viewer
Provides the functions to export the current configuration data defined with the SETUP utility
to a text file.
6-12 Maintenance
„
System Information Viewer
Provides the functions to view information on the processor (CPU) and the BIOS and export it
to a text file.
„
System Information Management
Provides the function to make a back-up copy of your data. Without the backup data, the
system-specific information and/or configuration may not be restored.
TIPS:
For information on making backup copy of system information, see the separate volume
“User’s Guide (Setup).” Only the authorized personnel are allowed to restore the backup
data.
„
Chassis Identification
Provides the function to distinguish the server using the LEDs or beeps of the server. This
function is convenient to distinguish the server from others when multiple servers are on the
rack.
Maintenance 6-13
RELOCATING/STORING THE NEC Express5800/ft series
Follow the procedure below to relocate or store the server. (Users should not attempt to remove the
rack-mountable server from the rack assembly.)
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are risks of
fire, personal injury, or property damage. See “PRECAUTIONS FOR SAFETY”
in Chapter 1 for details.
x Never attempt to lift the server only by yourself.
x Do not install the server in any place other than specified.
x Do not connect/disconnect any interface cable with the power cord of the
server plugged to a power source.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
„
„
If the server needs to be relocated/stored due to a change in the floor layout to a great
extent, contact the sales agent.
Make sure to make a backup copy of your valuable data in the hard disk, if any.
When moving the server with hard disks, make sure not to give a shock to the hard disks.
When storing the server, keep it under storing environment conditions (temperature: -10
to 55°C, humidity: 20 to 80%, non-condensing).
1.
Take a floppy disk and a CD-ROM out of the server, if any.
2.
Power off the server.
3.
Unplug the power cord of the server from a power outlet.
4.
Remove all the cables from the server.
5.
Remove all the mounted modules.
6.
Remove the backplane and the rails from the rack cabinet.
7.
Carry backplane, rails, and modules separately.
8.
Protect the server with the shock-absorbing materials, and pack it securely.
IMPORTANT:
Check and adjust the system clock before operating the server again after relocating or storing
it.
If the server and the built-in optional devices are moved from a cold place to a warm place in a
short time, condensation will occur and cause malfunctions and breakdown when these are used
in such state. When you start operating these equipments again after the transportation or the
storage, make sure to wait for a sufficient period of time to use them in the operating
environment.
If the system clock goes out of alignment remarkably as time goes by, though the system clock
adjustment is performed, contact your sales agent.
6-14 Maintenance
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
If the product does not work properly, see this chapter before deciding that it is a breakdown.
7-2 Troubleshooting
TO LOCATE THE ERRORS
Use NEC ESMPRO to monitor the occurrence of fault during the system operation.
Especially take note on whether any alert is reported to NEC ESMPRO Manager on the
management PC. Check whether any alert is reported on the Operation Window, Data Viewer, or
Alert Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
[Example]
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Determine type and location of
server/workstation trouble.
Troubleshooting 7-3
ERROR MESSAGES
If the NEC Express5800/ft series enters the abnormal state, the error is posted by various means.
This section explains the types of error messages.
Error Messages by LED Indication
The LEDs on the front and rear panels of the NEC Express5800/ft series and near the handles of
hard disks inform the user of the various server statuses by the colors and the patterns of going on,
going off, and flashing. If trouble seems to have occurred, check the LED indication. For the LED
indication and meanings, see page 2–22 “LEDs.”
This User’s Guide describes actions to be taken for watch error message. However, if replacement
of modules is necessary, contact your sales agent.
7-4 Troubleshooting
POST Error Messages
Powering on the server automatically starts the self-diagnostic program, POST (Power On
Self-Test). When POST detects any error, it displays an error message and its measure on the
display unit. Follow the table below to troubleshoot such errors.
Phoenix BIOS 4.0 Release 6.0.XXXX
:
CPU=Pentium III XXX MHz
0640K System RAM Passed
0127M Extended RAM Passed
WARNING:
02B0: Diskette drive A error.
:
press <F1> to resume, <F2> to SETUP
Message indicating a floppy disk drive error
TIPS:
For error messages on optional PCI boards, refer to the manual provided with those options.
On-screen error message
0200 Failure Fixed Disk
0210 Stuck Key
Cause
Hard disk is faulty
CPU/IO module is faulty.
Keyboard connection error
0211 Keyboard error
Keyboard is faulty.
0212 Keyboard Controller
Failed
0213 Keyboard locked Unlock key switch
0230 System RAM Failed at
offset
0231 Shadow RAM Failed at
offset
0232 Extended RAM Failed
at address line
0233 Memory type mixing
detected
Keyboard controller is faulty.
0250 System battery is dead
-Replace and run
SETUP
System battery is dead.
x
x
Keyboard is locked.
DIMM is faulty.
Shadow RAM is faulty.
Extended RAM is faulty.
Memory of the different types
is installed.
Action
Replace the hard disk.
Replace the CPU/IO module.
Disconnect the keyboard and
connect it back again.
x Replace the keyboard.
x Disconnect the keyboard and
connect it back again.
x Replace the keyboard.
x If restarting does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module.ᴾ
If restarting the server does not
help, replace the CPU/IO module.
Unlock the key switch.
x
x
x
Replace DIMM.
Replace the CPU/IO module.
Replace DIMM.
Replace the CPU/IO module.
Replace DIMM.
Replace CPU/IO module.
Memory of the different types is
installed. Replace DIMM with
appropriate one.
x Replace system battery.
x Replace CPU/IO module.
x
x
x
x
x
x
Troubleshooting 7-5
On-screen error message
0251 System CMOS
checksum bad-Default
configuration used
Cause
System CMOS configuration
is changed.
0252 Password checksum
bad -Password cleared
Password is cleared.
Action
x Reconfigure the system CMOS
by using BIOS setup.
x Clear system CMOS using
hardware jumper.
x Reconfigure by using BIOS
setup.
x Clear system CMOS using
0260 System Timer error
0270 Real time clock error
0271 Check date and time
setting
02D0 System cache error Cache disabled
02D1 System Memory
exceeds the CPU's
caching limit
0613 COM A configuration
change
0614 COM A config, error device disable
0B28 Unsupported
Processor detected on
Processor 1
0B29 Unsupported
Processor detected on
Processor 2
0B60 DIMM group #1 has
been disabled
0B61 DIMM group #2 has
been disabled
0B62 DIMM group #3 has
been disabled
0B70 The error occurred
during temperature
sensor reading
0B71 System Temperature
out of the range
0B74 The error occurred
during voltage sensor
reading
0B75 System voltage out of
the range
0B80 BMC Memory Test
Failed
0B81 BMC Firmware Code
Area CRC check failed
0B82 BMC core Hardware
failure
System Timer is faulty.
RTC is faulty.
Date and time are incorrectly
set.
CPU cache is faulty.
hardware jumper.
Reconfigure by using BIOS setup.
If replacing the CPU does not
help, replace the CPU/IO module.
CPU cache is faulty.
COM A configuration is faulty.
Device constructing COM A is
faulty.
Unsupported CPU is mounted.
If restarting does not help after
resetting the setting to default by
using BIOS setup, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Check the supported CPU and
replace it. If this does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module.
Unsupported CPU is mounted.
DIMM is faulty.
Replace DIMM Group#1.
Replace DIMM Group#2.
Replace DIMM Group#3.
I2C pass is faulty.
Sensor is faulty.
Replace the part that relevant
sensor is mounted.
Temperature is abnormal.
Fan is abnormal. ᴾ
Check if fan is faulty or clogging
has occurred. If there is no
problem, replace CPU/IO module.
Replace the part that relevant
sensor is mounted.
I2C pass is faulty.
Sensor is faulty.
Voltage is abnormal.
RMC device is faulty.
If turning AC power off and on
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
7-6 Troubleshooting
On-screen error message
0B83 BMC IBF or OBF
check
failed
0B8A BMC SEL area full
0B8B BMC progress check
timeout
Cause
RMC device is faulty.
There is no space to write
system event logs.
BMC check is suspended.
0B8C BMC command
access failed
BMC command access failed.
0B8D Could not redirect the
console - BMC Busy
Console cannot be redirected
(BMC is busy).
0B8E Could not redirect the
console - BMC Error
BMC is faulty.
0B8F Could not redirect the
console – BMC
parameter Error 0B90 BMC Platform
Information Area
corrupted
0B91 BMC update firmware
corrupted
0B92 Internal Use Area of
BMC FRU corrupted
0B93 BMC SDR Repository
empty
Configuration is faulty.
0B94 IPMB signal lines do
not respond
SMC is faulty.
0B95 BMC FRU device
failure
0B96 BMC SDR Repository
failure
0B97 BMC SEL device
failure
0B98 BMC RAM test error
0B99 BMC Fatal hardware
error
NVRAM within BMC is faulty.
0B9A BMC not responding
BMC device is faulty.
0B9B Private I2C bus not
responding
I2C bus is faulty.
BMC device is faulty.
Action
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Clear system event logs after
saving them.
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
There is a possibility that the
BMC was busy and could not
respond. Restart the server
again.
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Configure the console redirection
by using BIOS setup.
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Data within SROM is faulty.
SDR data is faulty.
SDR repository within BMC is
faulty.
SEL repository within BMC is
faulty.
BMC RAM is faulty.
BMC FPGA is faulty.
If updating SDR does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Replace the CPU/IO module or a
center plane after determining
where IPMB error has occurred
based on OS information.
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
If updating FPGA does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Replace the part related to failed
I2C bus.
Troubleshooting 7-7
On-screen error message
0B9C BMC internal
exception
0B9D BMC A/D timeout error
0B9E SDR repository corrupt
Cause
BMC device is faulty.
SDR data is faulty.
0B9F SEL corrupt
SEL repository within BMC is
faulty.
0BA0 SDR/PIA mismatched.
SDR, PIA must be
updated.
SDR and PIA data do not
match.
0BB0 SMBIOS - SROM data
read error
x I2C bus is faulty.
x SROM is faulty.
x BMC is faulty.
0BB1 SMBIOS - SROM data
checksum bad
0BC0 POST detected startup
failure of 1st Processor
0BC1 POST detected startup
failure of 2nd
Processor
8120 Unsupported DIMM
detected in DIMM
group #1
Data within SROM is faulty.
8121 Unsupported DIMM
detected in DIMM group #
8122 Unsupported DIMM
detected in DIMM group
#3
8130 Mismatch DIMM detected
in DIMM group#1
8131 Mismatch DIMM detected
in DIMM group#2
8132 Mismatch DIMM detected
in DIMM group#3
8150 NVRAM Cleared By
Jumper
8151 Password Cleared By
Jumper
8160 Mismatch Processor
Speed detected on
Processor 1
8161 Mismatch Processor
Speed detected on
Processor 2
8170 Processor 1 not
operating at intended
frequency.
Action
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
If updating SDR does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
Replace the CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
If updating SDR/PIA does not
help, replace CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card
(option).
If turning AC power off and on
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
CPU is faulty.
Replace the CPU.
Unsupported DIMM is
mounted.
Check supported DIMMs and
replace the DIMM. If replacing the
DIMM does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
DIMM group do not match.
CMOS clear jumper is
mounted.
Password clear jumper is
mounted.
CPU frequency does not
match.
CPU frequency is incorrect.
Turn off the DC power and
change back the jumper setting.
Check supported CPUs and
replace the CPU. If replacing the
CPU does not help, replace
CPU/IO module.
7-8 Troubleshooting
On-screen error message
8171 Processor 2 not
operating at intended
frequency
9064 Mixed CPU Steppings
detected
9038 Check date and time
settings (Chipset)
9001 Missing date and time
synchronization
9002 Memory not installed.
9003 Memory
implementation error
detected
Cause
CPU frequency is incorrect.
Different CPU steppings are
found.
Data and time settings are
incorrect.
Information delivery among
units failed
DIMM is not implemented.
DIMM is faulty.
Error is detected on memory
implementation.
9004 Real time clock error
(Chipset)
9005 Remote BMC access
failed
RTC is faulty.
9006 HW Memory Test
failed.
Memory is faulty.
9009 Chipset NMI occurred!
BIOS NMI handler is executed
and POST is stopped.
PCI-EX Link is faulty.
900A PEXA Link Width
Warning
900B PEXB Link Width
Warning
900D PEXD Link Width
Warning
900E PEXE Link Width
Warning
9021 Trace memory test
failed
902C BMCFW major revision
mismatched.
BMC of remote unit is faulty.
Action
Check supported CPUs and
replace the CPU. If replacing the
CPU does not help, replace
CPU/IO module.
If reconfiguring by using BIOS
setup does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Mount or replace the DIMM.
Check supported DIMMs and
replace the DIMM. If replacing the
DIMM does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Reconfigure RTC by using BIOS
setup.
Check again if the CPU/IO
module is mounted properly. If
this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the DIMM. If replacing it
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Obtain detailed information, and
replace the CPU/IO module.
Since performance becomes
slightly lower, replace the CPU/IO
module in case of an emergency.
Trace memory is faulty.
Replace the CPU/IO module.
BMCFW revision does not
match.
Update SDR/PIA. If updating it
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module or ft Remote
Management Card (option).
If restarting does not help,
replace the CPU/IO module, ft
Remote Management Card
(option) or center plane.
Replace the CPU/IO module.
Mount the primary unit. If
restarting does not help, replace
the CPU/IO module.
Mount the primary unit. If
restarting does not help, replace
the CPU/IO module.
902D IPMB#1 SROM failure
detected
902E IPMB#2 SROM failure
detected.
902F PCI Device Test failed.
9060 Module#0 is not
present.
IPMB#1 SROM is faulty.
9061 Module#1 is not
present.
CPU/IO module#1 is not
mounted.
IPMB#2 SROM is faulty.
PCI Device is faulty.
CPU/IO module#0 is not
mounted.
Troubleshooting 7-9
On-screen error message
9039 Not keep last boot
order
Cause
Unintended operations such
as incorrect DC off are
performed.
9070 The error occurred
during water-cooling
unit sensor reading
The sensor of water-cooling
kit is faulty.
NOTICE System is force
boot with POST
error
9000
Abnormality of one or both
sides of modules is detected.
9007
Forced power off occurred by
another CPU/IO module has
a problem.
9008
Forced power off occurred by
another CPU/IO module has
a problem.
9010 - 9015
Can not boot from target Disk.
9020
CPU is faulty.
9022 - 9023
Initialization of the cross-link
between the CPU/IO modules
and access are faulty.
9024
Disconnect the cross-link
between the CPU/IO
modules.
A serious error occurred
during a POST.
Action
Reconfigure the boot option by
using the BIOS setup. If
reconfiguring the boot option
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the water-cooling kit. If
turning on/off AC does not help,
replace CPU/IO module or ft
Remote Management Card.
View other error information and
the error information of standby
CPU/IO module.
There are some error messages
in addition to this error code.
Check the other error message.
Pull out another CPU/IO module
and install it.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Pull out another CPU/IO module
and install it.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Check the target disk.
In addition, replace it if required.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the CPU.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
When the system is running in
the duplex mode, it is no
problem.
If the system cannot be running
in the duplex mode due to
continuous this error, replace the
CPU/IO module.
If this does not help, replace
another CPU/IO module or
center plane.
When the system is running in
the duplex mode, it is no
problem.
If the system cannot be running
in the duplex mode due to
continuous this error, replace the
CPU/IO module.
If this does not help, replace
another CPU/IO module or
center plane.
7-10 Troubleshooting
On-screen error message
9027
Cause
Mounted CPU is
mismatching.
9028
Memory of the different types
is installed.
9029
DIMM is faulty.
902A
Initialization of the cross-link
between the CPU/IO modules
and access are faulty.
902B
BIOS revision does not
match.
9031
Configuration of PCI riser is
mismatch.
9032
The microcode to CPU is not
found and it cannot update
normally.
9033
The microcode to CPU
cannot update normally.
9034
DIMM is faulty.
903A
DIMM is faulty.
9040 - 9047
9050 - 9055
CPU is faulty. (ID=0-7)
DIMM is faulty. (ID=0-5)
Action
CPU configuration may be
different between the CPU/IO
modules.
Replace the CPU.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Memory of the different types is
installed.
Replace DIMM with appropriate
one.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace DIMM.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
When the system is running in
the duplex mode, it is no
problem.
If the system cannot be running
in the duplex mode due to
continuous this error, replace the
CPU/IO module.
If this does not help, replace
another CPU/IO module or
center plane.
This BIOS revision cannot
support the duplex mode.
Update the BIOS revision.
Check the PCI configuration.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Unsupported CPU may be
mounted.
Replace the CPU.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the CPU.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the DIMM.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the DIMM.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Replace the CPU.
Replace the DIMM.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
Troubleshooting 7-11
On-screen error message
9058 - 905F
Cause
This CPU/IO module detected
the mismatch of CPUID
between the CPU/IO
modules.
9062 - 9063
CPU/IO module or ft Remote
Management Card (option) is
faulty.
9065
One or both the CPU/IO
modules have a problem.
9071 - 9072
Water-cooling kit has leaked
out.
9080 - 908F
9080 - 9085
9087 - 908F
This CPU/IO module failed to
get the information from
another CPU/IO module.
9086
The CPU/IO modules were
unsuccessful to share
information.
9026
The chip set revisions are
mismatched.
Action
CPU configuration may be
different between the CPU/IO
modules.
Replace the CPU.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
If turning AC power off and on
does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module or ft Remote
Management Card (option).
There are some error messages
in addition to this error code.
Check the other error message.
Replace the water-cooling kit.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module.
When the system is running in
the duplex mode, it is no
problem.
If the system cannot be running
in the duplex mode due to
continuous this error, replace the
CPU/IO module.
If this does not help, replace
another CPU/IO module or
center plane.
The GA driver may not support
the server. Confirm that the driver
is an appropriate one and restart
the server.
If this does not help, replace the
CPU/IO module or center plane.
The model of the CPU/IO
modules mounted to the CPU
modules is different. Replace the
CPU/IO modules with those of
the same model.
7-12 Troubleshooting
Error Notification by BEEP
An error message may not be displayed on the display unit even though the POST detected an error.
In such a case, the beep sounds notifies you an error. The error contents are indicated by the
combination of beep sound patterns. For example, beep sounds once, consecutively three times,
once, and then once (beep code: 1-3-1-1) indicates DRAM refresh test error.
The following table lists the meaning of beep codes and measures against them.
Beep code
1-2-2-3
Meaning
ROM checksum error
1-1-2-4
1-3-1-1
ROMEXEC code error
DRAM refresh test error
1-3-1-3
Keyboard controller error
1-3-3-1
1-3-4-1
1-3-4-3
1-4-1-1
2-2-3-1
2-1-2-3
1-2
Failed to detect memory.
Or, DIMM board type is
incorrect.
Initial setting error of the
POST Memory Manager
RAM address error
RAM low byte data error
RAM high byte data error
Illegal interrupt test error
Copyright check error
Failed to initialize the video
BIOS
Failed to initialize the option
ROM
Failed to expand the option
ROM
1-5-1-1
FRB3 monitoring timeout
1-5-2-2
CPU is not implemented
1-5-2-3
CPU configuration error
1-5-4-2
1-5-4-4
Power error
1-3-3-2
Action
Contact your sales agent to replace the CPU/IO
module motherboard.
Check the installation of DIMM board.
If the error persists, contact your sales agent to
replace the DIMM or CPU/IO module
motherboard.
Disconnect the keyboard and connect it back on.
If the error persists, request your sales agent to
replace the CPU/IO module motherboard.
Check the installation of DIMM board.
If the error persists, contact your sales agent to
replace the DIMM or CPU module motherboard.
Contact your sales agent.
Check the connection of the connector for the
display if nothing is displayed on the display unit.
If the error persists, contact your sales agent to
replace the CPU/IO module motherboard.
Check the PCI board installation if the option
ROM of the added PCI board is not displayed. If
the error persists, contact your sales agent to
replace the CPU/IO module motherboard, PCI
module board or added PCI board with new one.
Check the installation of CPU. If the error
persists, contact your sales agent.
Check the installation of CPU. If the error
persists, contact your sales agent.
Check the installation of CPU. If the error
persists, contact your sales agent.
Check the installation of power. If the error
persists, contact your sales agent.
Troubleshooting 7-13
Linux Error Messages
NEC Express5800/ft series displays messages on the console window when failures occur. Also, the
same information is recorded as system logs.
The following indicates the syslog messages, messages on the console, their meanings and actions:
Message
Meaning
Action
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started successfully.
The driver was successfully
started.
The driver stopped.
The driver was successfully
terminated.
The driver failed to start.
The driver was not started
successfully.
There may be problem in
the system environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver finished successfully
to unload.
The unload processing of the
driver finished successfully.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver accepted to bind the
CPU module.
The driver received an instruction
to bind the CPU module.
The driver started to bind the
CPU module.
The driver started binding the
CPU module.
The friver finished successfully
to bind the CPU module.
The driver successfully bound
the CPU module.
The driver failed to bind the
CPU module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
bind the CPU module.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
The driver accepted to remove
the CPU module.
The driver received an instruction
to disconnect the CPU module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to remove
the CPU module.
The driver started disconnecting
the CPU module.
The driver finished successfully
to remove the CPU module.
The driver successfully
disconnected the CPU module.
The driver failed to remove the
CPU module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
remove the CPU module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver started the fast
re-sync function of the CPU
module.
The driver started performing fast
re-sync to the CPU module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver finished successfully
the fast re-sync function of the
CPU module.
The driver successfully
performed fast re-sync to the
CPU module.
7-14 Troubleshooting
Message
Meaning
Action
The driver failed the fast resync
function of the CPU module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
perform fast re-sync to the CPU
module.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
The driver accepted to change
the priority of the CPU module.
The driver received an instruction
to change the priority of the CPU
module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to change the
priority of the CPU module.
The driver started changing the
priority of the CPU module.
The driver finished to change
the priority of the CPU module.
The driver successfully changed
the priority of the CPU module.
The driver failed to change the
priority of the CPU module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
change the priority of the CPU
module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver accepted to bind the
IO module.
The driver received an instruction
to bind the IO module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to bind the IO
module.
The driver started binding the IO
module.
The driver finished successfully
to bind the IO module.
The driver successfully bound
the IO module.
The driver failed to bind the IO
module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
bind the IO module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver accepted to remove
the IO module.
The driver received an instruction
to disconnect the IO module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to remove
the IO module.
The driver started disconnecting
the IO module.
The driver finished successfully
to remove the IO module.
The driver successfully
disconnected the IO module.
The driver failed to remove the
IO module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
disconnect the IO module.
There may be problem of
hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver accepted to switch
Primary/Secondary state of the
IO module.
The driver received an instruction
to change the primary/secondary
state of the IO module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to switch
Primary/Secondary state of the
IO module.
The driver started changing the
primary/secondary state of the IO
module.
The driver finished successfully
to switch Primary/Secondary
state of the IO module.
The driver successfully changed
the primary/secondary state of
the IO module.
The server is operating
normally.
Troubleshooting 7-15
Message
Meaning
Action
The driver failed to switch
Primary/Secondary state of the
IO module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
change the primary/secondary
state of the IO module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver started to bind the
Module.
The driver started bindng the
CPU/IO module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver finished successfully
to bind the Module.
The driver successfully bounded
the module.
The driver failed to bind the
Module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
bind the module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver accepted to remove
the Module.
The driver received an instruction
to disconnect the module.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to remove
the Module.
The driver started disconnecting
the module.
The driver finished successfully
to remove the Module.
The driver successfully
disconnected the module.
The driver failed to remove the
Module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
disconnect the module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver accepted to update
the BIOS.
The driver received an instruction
to update BIOS.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to update the
BIOS.
The driver started updating
BIOS.
The driver finished successfully
to update the BIOS.
The driver successfully updated
BIOS.
The driver failed to update the
BIOS.
The driver was unsuccessful to
update BIOS.
The error occurred on the
South Bridge.
There was a South Bridge error.
FT nonfatal error occurrred.
NEC GeminiEngine HA System
Controller detected an error.
The error occurred on the CPU
module.
There was a CPU module error.
The error occurred on the PCI
Express.
There was a PCI Express error.
The driver detected that the
Module was not working.
A module error was detected.
DMA error occurred.
There was a DMA error.
Legacy device error occurred.
There was a legacy device error.
Surprise remove occurred.
Supprise removal occurred.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
7-16 Troubleshooting
Message
Meaning
Action
CRC error occurred on the FT
Link.
There was a CRC error in FT
Link.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
Accessing to shared memory
with the BIOS failed.
Failed to access the memory
shared with BIOS.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
MTBF is below the threshold.
The MTBF of the module is lower
than the threshold.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
There is a difference between
the BIOS version.
The BIOS version of the module
#0 and that of module #1 are
different.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the BIOS
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
Updating MTBF information
failed.
Failed to update the MTBF
information.
There may be problem in
the system environment.
Contact your sales agent.
IPMI driver does not start.
The IPMI driver is not running.
The driver failed to refer the
object of IPMI driver.
Failed to refer to the IPMI driver
object.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the system
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
Base address reading error.
(NEC GeminiEngine HA
System Controller I/O)
Base address reading error.
(NEC GeminiEngine HA System
Controller I/O)
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
Base address reading error.
(AMD8111 I/O)
Base address reading error.
(AMD8111 I/O)
The Modules does power down.
The module is powered off.
The server is operating
normally.
Synchronization of the CPU
module stopped.
Synchronization of the CPU
module is stopped.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the system
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
MC log was gathered.
MC log was collected.
CMC log was gathered.
CMC log was collected.
The server is operating
normally.
It failed in the collection of the
MC/CMC log.
Failed to collect MC/CMC log of
the module.
If the message is recorded
frequently, contact your
sales agent.
Memory check was completed
successfully.
Memory check was completed
successfully.
The server is operating
normally.
Troubleshooting 7-17
Message
Meaning
Action
Memory check failed.
Memory check failed.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
Memory copy was started.
Memory copy was started.
The Module got power down in
the middle of handling failure.
The module was powered off
while troubleshooting an error.
The server is operating
normally.
The Module or the CPU module
detected the state change in
the middle of handling failure of
the CPU module so stopped the
action.
The processing was stopped
because a change in the CPU
module state was detected while
troubleshooting a CPU error.
The Module BIOS CPU state
did not become [CPU stop
(reset waiting)].
The CPU state of BIOS did not
become [CPU stop (reset
waiting)].
The Module broke down.
The IO module failed.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The serial number of the
Module was invalid.
The serial number of the module
is invalid.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the system
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
Base address reading error.
(PCI Config)
Base address reading error.
(PCI Config)
The system abnormality of the
Module was detected.
Abnormality in the module was
detected.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The POST timeout occurred in
the Module.
A POST timeout occurred in the
module.
The POST error occurred in the
Module.
A POST error occurred in the
module.
[Do not bind] is set by MTBF
type.
The MTBF type of the module is
set to [Do not bind].
An illegal type is set to MTBF
type.
The specified MTBF type of the
module is invalid.
The driver accepted to switch
the Secondary Module.
The driver received an instruction
to switch the secondary module.
The driver started to switch the
Secondary Module.
The driver started switching the
secondary module.
The driver finished successfully
to switch the Secondary
Module.
The driver successfully switched
the secondary module.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the hardware
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the system
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
There may be problem in
the system environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The server is operating
normally.
7-18 Troubleshooting
Message
Meaning
Action
The driver failed to switch the
Secondary Module.
The driver was unsuccessful to
switch the secondary module.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
The driver has already
completed to bind the CPU
module.
The CPU module has already
been bound.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver has already
completed to remove the CPU
module.
The CPU module has already
been disconnected.
The driver has already
completed to change the
priority of the CPU module.
The priority of the CPU module
has already been changed.
The driver has already
completed to bind the IO
module.
The IO module has already been
bound.
The driver has already
completed to remove the IO
module.
The IO module has already been
disconnected.
The driver has already
completed to remove the
Module.
The module has alrady been
disconnected.
The driver was not able to bind
the Module. It has broken down
in the past.
The module cannot be bound
because it has failed in the past.
The driver was not able to bind
PCI Express 0. It has broken
down in the past.
The PCI Express 0 cannot be
bound because it has failed in
the past.
The driver was not able to bind
PCI Express 1. It has broken
down in the past.
The PCI Express 1 cannot be
bound because it has failed in
the past.
The driver was not able to bind
South Bridge. It has broken
down in the past.
The South Bridge cannot be
bound because it has failed in
the past.
The error occurred on the PXH.
There was an error in PXH.
The error occurred on the
device belong with the PXH.
There was an error in a device
that belongs to PXH.
Device is not duplexing.
The device is not duplexed.
Take necessary actions
referring to
“Troubleshooting” in the
User’s Guide.
The driver started to clear the
MTBF.
The driver started clearing MTBF.
The server is operating
normally.
The driver finished successfully
to clear the MTBF.
The driver successfully cleared
MTBF.
There may be problem in
the hardware environment.
Contact your sales agent.
Troubleshooting 7-19
Message
Meaning
Action
The server is operating
normally.
The driver started to set the
MTBF threshold.
The driver started setting the
MTBF threshold.
The driver finished successfully
to set the MTBF threshold.
The driver successfully set the
MTBF threshold.
The driver started to set the
MTBF type.
The driver started setting the
MTBF type.
The driver finished successfully
to set the MTBF type.
The driver successfully set the
MTBF type.
Board bootup error log detected
in the Module.
An error log at the module
startup was detected.
There may be problem in
the system environment.
Contact your sales agent.
[FT LED: Amber Blink] It is
dumping it.
[FT LED: Amber Blink] Collecting
dump.
The server is operating
normally.
[FT LED: Amber On] MTBF of
the CPU module is below the
threshold.
[FT LED: Amber On] The MTBF
of the CPU module is lower than
the threshold.
[FT LED: Amber On] MTBF of
the IO module is below the
threshold.
[FT LED: Amber On] The MTBF
of the IO module is lower than
the threshold.
If the message is recorded
frequently, there may be
problem in the system
environment. Contact your
sales agent.
[FT LED: Amber On] Module
broke down.
[FT LED: Amber On] The module
failed.
[FT LED: Amber On] Not able to
bind PCI Express 0. It has
broken down in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] The PCI
Express 0 cannot be bound
because it has failed in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] Not able to
bind PCI Express 1. It has
broken down in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] The PCI
express 1 cannot be bound
because it has failed in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] Not able to
bind South Bridge. It has
broken down in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] The South
Bridge cannot be bound because
it has failed in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] Not able to
bind Module. It has broken
down in the past.
[FT LED: Amber On] The module
cannot be bound because it has
failed in the past.
[FT LED: Green On] The
system was duplex.
[FT LED: Green On] The system
was duplexed.
The server is operating
normally.
[FT LED: Off] The driver did not
bind the CPU module.
[FT LED: Off] The CPU module is
not bound.
[FT LED: Off] The driver did not
bind the IO module.
[FT LED: Off] The IO module is
not bound.
Take necessary actions
referring to
“Troubleshooting” in the
User’s Guide.
[FT LED: Off] The Network
device is not duplex.
[FT LED: Off] The network device
is not duplexed.
[FT LED: Off] The SCSI device
is not duplex.
[FT LED: Off] The SCSI device is
not duplexed.
There may be problem in
the system environment.
Contact your sales agent.
7-20 Troubleshooting
Message
Meaning
Action
Take necessary actions
referring to
“Troubleshooting” in the
User’s Guide.
[FT LED: Off] The FC device is
not duplex.
[FT LED: Off] The FC device is
not duplexed.
Since removal of each device
was not completed, the driver
was not able to bind the
CPU/IO module.
The CPU/IO module cannot be
bound because devices have not
been comopletely removed yet.
HAS driver enabled use of
USB.
The USB queue timed out.
[FT LED: Off] South Bridge is
not doubled.
[FT LED: Off] The South Bridge
is not duplexed.
[FT LED: Off] PCI Express 0 is
not doubled.
[FT LED: Off] The PCI Express 0
is not duplexed.
[FT LED: Off] PCI Express 1 is
not doubled.
[FT LED: Off] The PCI Express 1
is not duplexed.
[FT LED: Off] CPU is not
doubled.
[FT LED: Off] The CPU is not
duplexed.
Removal of SCSI device was
not completed.
The removal processing of the
SCSI device has not been
completed.
[FT LED: Off] The doubleness
information about an I/O device
is not reported.
[FT LED: Off] The duplexity
information on the I/O device has
not been reported.
Service is stopped by the notice
of a stop.
The HAS management service is
stopped by an instruction from
the OS.
Snapshot dump is started.
The dump service of the system
running in the duplex mode is
started.
Stop image dump is started.
The dump service of the system
running in the simplex mode is
started.
Quick dump is started.
The quick dump service is
started.
It failed in the doubleness
surveillance of a network card.
Failed to monitor duplexity of the
network card.
It failed in the doubleness
surveillance of a SCSI device.
Failed to monitor duplexity of the
SCSI device.
It failed in the doubleness
surveillance of a FC device.
Failed to monitor duplexity of the
FC device.
If the error occurs
frequently, contact your
sales agent.
The error occurred in session
creation with client application.
Failed to create a session for
communication with client
applications.
Contact your sales agent.
The server is operating
normally.
If the error occurs
frequently, contact your
sales agent.
Troubleshooting 7-21
Message
Meaning
It failed in the client attestation.
Client authentication was
unsuccessful.
It failed in the initialization of a
transaction.
Failed to initialize the transaction.
Transaction task abort.
The transaction is terminated
because there was a
communication error.
Invalid service demand.
An invalid service was
requested.
It failed in the device I/O control
from client application.
The I/O control requested by the
client was unsuccessful.
It failed in the notification of
doubling information for the
HAS Driver.
Failed to report the duplexed
status to the HAS driver.
It failed in IOCTL which notifies
the removal completion of USB
device to a driver.
Failed to report the completion of
the USB removal to the HAS
driver.
It failed in the start of snapshot
dump.
There was an error when starting
the active dumpr service.
It failed in the start of stop
image dump.
There was an error when starting
the stopped dump service.
It failed in the start of quick
dump.
There was an error when starting
the quick dump service.
It failed in the setting of the FC
watch library.
Failed to read and set FC
duplexity monitoring library.
It failed in the setting of the
SCSI watch library.
Failed to read and set SCSI
duplexity monitoring library.
It failed in the setting of the NIC
watch library.
Failed to read and set network
duplexity monitoring library.
If failed in the initialization of a
device doubleness surveillance
event.
Failed to initialize the duplexity
monitoring event.
It failed in the initialization of a
timer.
Failed to initialize and set the
timer for monitoring duplexity.
If failed in the daemon start.
Failed to start the HAS
monitoring service.
Action
Contact your sales agent.
Restart the system. If the
error occurs frequently,
contact your sales agent.
7-22 Troubleshooting
Server Management Application Error Message
If the server management tool such as NEC
ESMPRO Agent or NEC ESMPRO Manager has
been installed in the NEC Express5800/ft series or
management PC, you can obtain the error
information from the display unit of the server or
management PC.
See Chapter 5 or online documentation for details of
such application programs.
Troubleshooting 7-23
SOLVING PROBLEMS
When the server fails to operate as expected, see the following to find out your problem and follow
the given instruction before asking for repair.
If the server still fails to operate successfully after solving your problem, take a note on the
on-screen message and contact your sales agent.
Problems with NEC Express5800/ft series
Fail to power on the server:
†
Is the server properly supplied with power?
o Check if the power cord is connected to a power outlet (or UPS) that meets the
power specifications for the server.
o Check if the two pieces of the provided power cord are connected to the main unit
properly.
o Make sure to use the power cord provided with the server. Check the power cord
for broken shield or bent plugs.
o Make sure the power breaker for the connected power outlet is on.
o If the power cord is plugged to a UPS, make sure the UPS is powered and it
supplies power. See the manual that comes with the UPS for details.
Power supply to the server may be linked with the connected UPS using the BIOS
setup utility of the server.
<Menu to check: [Server] - [AC-LINK] - [Power On]>
o Make sure the POWER switch on the power unit is on.
†
Did you press the POWER switch?
o Press the POWER switch on the front of the NEC Express5800/ft series to turn on
the power (the POWER LED lights).
†
Did you install the CPU/IO module properly?
o Check if the CPU/IO module is properly installed in the server. Secure the
CPU/IO module with screw located on the module removable handle. The server
cannot be powered on unless it is screwed completely.
†
Is the FAULT LES of the CPU/IO module on?
o Remove and reinsert the CPU/IO module and restart the server.
7-24 Troubleshooting
Fail to power off the server:
†
Is the POWER switch enabled?
o Restart the server and start the BIOS setup utility.
<Menu to check: [Security] o [Switch Inhibit] o [Enabled]>
†
Are you trying to power off by a method other than pressing the POWER switch?
o You cannot power off the server by using software commands such as the
shutdown command. Press the POWER switch to power off the server.
POST fails to complete:
†
Is the DIMM installed?
o At least one DIMM is required for operation.
†
Is the memory size large?
o The memory check may take a time if the memory size is large. Wait for a while.
†
Did you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after you started the
server?
o If you perform any keyboard or mouse operation immediately after start-up, POST
may accidentally detect a keyboard controller error and stops proceeding. In such
a case, restart the server once again. Do not perform any keyboard or mouse
operation until the BIOS start-up message appears when you restart the server.
†
Does the server have appropriate memory boards or PCI card?
o Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Server reboots while running the SCSISelect utility:
†
Have you modified the Setup settings?
o From [Server] - [Monitoring Configuration] - [Option ROM Scan Monitoring] of
Setup, select “Disabled.” If [Option ROM Scan Monitoring] is enabled, the
system may reboot while using the SCSISelect utility. Change back the setting
after you finish using the utility.
Fail to access to internal or external devices:
†
Are cables properly connected?
o Make sure that the interface cables and power cord are properly connected. Also
make sure that the cables are connected in the correct order.
†
Is that device compliant with NEC Express5800/ft series?
o Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
Troubleshooting 7-25
†
Is the power-on order correct?
o When the server has any external devices connected, power on the external
devices first, then the server.
†
Did you install drivers for connected optional devices?
o Some optional devices require specific device drivers. Refer to the manual that
comes with the device to install its driver.
†
Is SCSI controller (including options) configuration correct?
o If the sever has an optional SCSI controller board and SCSI devices are hooked up
to the server, make correct settings by the SCSI controller board’s SCSI BIOS
utility. For details, see manuals included with the SCSI controller board.
†
Is SCSI device configuration correct?
o If external SCSI devices are connected to the server, you need to make settings of
SCSI ID and terminal resistance. For details, see manuals included with the SCSI
device.
†
Does the SCSI driver recognize the target devices?
o Execute the following command to check if the SCSI driver recognizes the target
devices.
>cat /proc/scsi/scsi
†
Is a driver which supports the SCSI device loaded to kernel?
o Execute the following command to check if a driver which supports the SCSI
device is loaded to kernel.
>lsmod
CPUs not in Duplex mode:
o Check if the memory configuration is correct.
o Check if third-party CPUs or memory (DIMM) are used.
BIOSes not in Duplex mode due to differences between both modules:
o Check if the setting of [Automatic firmware update] is disabled on the [System
Setting] screen on the main window of [Server Maintenance Utility].
o If the setting of [Automatic firmware update] is enabled and modules are
remounted, BIOSes are automatically updated and duplicated. At this time, it is
recommended to reduce the load of the system as much as possible.
Disks not in Duplex mode:
o Unless you perform mirroring (including reconfiguration after failed disks are
replaced) in correct order, the mirror may not be (re)configured. Check if the steps
were correct.
7-26 Troubleshooting
The keyboard or mouse fails to operate:
†
Is the cable properly connected?
o Make sure that the cable is connected to the correct connector on the rear of the
server.
†
Are the keyboard and mouse are compliant with NEC Express5800/ft series?
o Operation of the server with unauthorized devices is not guaranteed.
†
Does the server have drivers installed?
o Refer to the manual that comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and
mouse drivers are installed. (These drivers are installed along with the OS.) Some
OS's allow you to change the keyboard and mouse settings. Refer to manual that
comes with your OS to check that the keyboard and mouse settings are correct.
Screen freezes, keyboard and mouse do not work:
o If the amount of memory is large, it takes time to copy the memory in dual mode
and the system stops working temporarily during the copying, but it is not system
trouble.
Fail to access (read or write) to the floppy disk:
†
Does the floppy disk drive contain a floppy disk?
o Insert a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive until it clicks.
†
Is the floppy disk write-protected?
o Place the write-protect switch on the floppy disk to the "Write-enabled" position.
†
Is the floppy disk formatted?
o Use a formatted floppy disk or format the floppy disk in the floppy disk drive.
Refer to the manual that comes with the OS for formatting a floppy disk.
†
Is the media mounted?
o If a failover occurs while the media is mounted, the media is forcibly unmounted.
Therefore you need to mount it again. (When mounting CPU/IO module and at a
failover, errors such as buffer I/O error may be recorded, but there is no problem
on operation they are specifications of the server.) After the failover, device name
of the floppy disk drive may be changed (Ex. from scd0 to scd1), that
phenomenon is due to the specifications of the server and does not affect the
operation. In such a case, specify the changed device name for mounting the
media.
Mount point is not automatically created:
ĺ If mount point is not automatically created, the service needs to be restarted. Run
the following commands as root user to start the service.
# /etc/init.d/messagebus restart
# /etc/init.d/haldaemon restart
Troubleshooting 7-27
Fail to access to the CD-ROM:
†
Is the CD-ROM properly set in the CD-ROM drive tray?
o The tray is provided with a holder to secure the CD-ROM. Make sure that the
CD-ROM is placed properly in the holder.
†
Is the CD-ROM applicable to the server?
o The CD-ROM for Macintosh is not available for use.
†
Is the media mounted?
o If a failover occurs while the media is mounted, the media is forcibly unmounted.
Therefore you need to mount it again. (When mounting CPU/IO module and at a
failover, errors such as buffer I/O error may be recorded, but there is no problem
on operation as they are specifications of the server.) After the failover, device
name of the CD-ROM drive may be changed (Ex. from scd0 to scd1), that
phenomenon is due to the specifications of the server and does not affect the
operation. In such a case, specify the changed device name for mounting the
media.
Fail to access the hard disk:
†
Is the hard disk applicable to the server?
o Operation of any device that is not authorized by NEC is not guaranteed.
†
Is the hard disk properly installed?
o Make sure to lock the hard disk with the lever on its handle. The hard disk is not
connected to the internal connector when it is not completely installed (see
Chapter 8). When the hard disk is properly installed, the drive power LED for the
hard disk is lit while the server is powered.
Fail to start the OS:
† Is a floppy disk in the floppy disk drive?
o Take out the floppy disk and restart the server.
†
Is the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM (or the other bootable CD-ROM) in the
CD-ROM drive?
o Take out the CD-ROM and restart the server.
†
Is the OS damaged?
o Use the recovery process of the OS to attempt to recover the damaged OS.
†
Is reset performed by the boot monitoring function?
o For the following cases, boot monitoring function needs to be disabled for NEC
Express5800/ft series. To disable it, see “Step 3: Disable the Startup Monitoring
Function Setting.”
- To enter into the kudzu setup mode and make settings while the OS is
starting.
- To change the boot mode to the interactive startup mode.
7-28 Troubleshooting
Note: You can change the interactive startup mode by entering the
message “I” when “Press ‘I’ to enter interactive startup.” appears
during the OS startup.
- When the system enters into the maintenance mode while the OS is
starting.
Note: The following message is displayed on the screen:
Give root password for maintenance
(or type Control-D to continue):
- For other cases that daemons and/or drivers are not started successfully
due to errors or other causes.
Note: For configuration that the actual memory capacity and the disk
capacity are large, it is recommended to change the BIOS Setup from
the default (10 minutes) to an appropriate value.
It takes time to display the screen on the OS when 2.5GB or more memory is
mounted:
o Check the Cache Settings of the BIOS settings. In the Processor Settings on the
Main screen, change the Cache Settings to “Discrete.” This setting optimizes the
visual display.
OS behavior is unstable:
†
Have you modified kernel?
o Confirm that no patch for general kernel is applied or that the kernel that has been
installed for NEC Express5800/ft series is not modified.
IO module is not disconnected:
o When you attempt to disconnect IO module while network adapter and/or SCSI
adapter and/or FC adapter is not in dual mode, the following message will be
recorded to the system event log and the IO module will not be separated. In this
case, check each adapter setting referring to “After starting up, FT Status LED do
not illuminate or illuminate amber” of this chapter.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
HasCtrl
Warning
1505
Device [Device name] is not duplexing.
[Device name] “LAN” or “SCSI” or “FC”
o When you attempt to disconnect IO module when the HAS Fault Tolerance
service is not started, the following message will be recorded to the system event
log and the IO module will not be separated. In this case, refer to “After starting
up, FT Status LED do not illuminate or illuminate amber” of this chapter to start
the HAS Fault Tolerance service and retry disconnecting the I/O module.
Troubleshooting 7-29
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
HasCtrl
Warning
1506
The doubleness information about an I/O device is not reported.
Video mode cannot be changed by using the Xrandr feature of XServer:
o Specification of the server. For setting the video mode, see “SETTING THE
VIDEO MODE” on page 3-10.
Settings such as screen size and color are made from Control Panel, but they are
not enabled:
o Specification of the server. Even if you change the video mode on the
[DisplaySetting] tab displayed by selecting the Start menu, [System], [Control
Panel], and then [Display] or by right-clicking the blank space of the desktop and
selecting [Video Property], the change is not reflected to the system. For setting
the video mode, see “SETTING THE VIDEO MODE” on page 3-10.
DISK ACCESS LED is amber and blinking:
†
Is the mirror of the hard disk not removed?
o Check [Disk Management], and reconfigure the mirror if the mirror is broken.
(See “HARD DISK CONFIGURATIONS THAT CAN BE BUILT ON THE NEC
Express5800/ft series” in Chapter 3 “Linux Setup and Operation.”)
Relevant Disk LED and DISK ACCESS LED illuminate amber during the process
of automatic mirror reconfiguration. During the process of reconfiguration, DISK
ACCESS occurs at the same time, and amber and green appear to illuminate
alternately. Wait for a while if it is found out that the mirror is being reconfigured
in “Disk Management,” etc.
When one of the disks that configure the mirror is broken, the other disk becomes
“Failed Redundancy.” In this case, DISK LED also illuminates amber. Replace the
failed disk and reconfigure the mirror.
The setting screen for kudzu is displayed at each startup:
o When the system is started from a module different from the previous startup, the
setting screen for kudzu is displayed. However, no operation is required.
ᴾ
The screen of X is not displayed after failover:
o This phenomenon may occur when you start X by running startx on the text
console. For using X, read the notes on page 3-11.
7-30 Troubleshooting
When incorporating the module again it has been disconnected, the network is not
duplexed:
†
Has the module been completely disconnected?
o When you disconnected the module using NEC ESMPRO and tried to incorporate
it again, the network may not be duplexed if the module is not completely
disconnected. Make sure that the module is completely disconnected by
confirming that the FT-LED is turned off and the module is powered off, and then
incorporate the module.
o If incorporating the module does not start for a few minutes, try to incorporate it
again.
When turning on the DC power after the module has been implemented,
“$ESMALERT:HAS:C00706A6$ The driver failed to bind the Module.” is notified:
†
After the module is implemented, if the timing to turn on the DC power is too early,
this message may be displayed.
o Right after implementing the module, hardware is initialized. When the DC power
is turned on before the initialization process completes, this message may be
displayed, but there is not any problem. After that, if the DC power of the module
is not automatically turned on, press the DC button again to turn on the DC
power.
The network is not duplexed:
o If the network is not duplexed, redundancy of the system is incomplete, and the
status LED indicator does not illuminate green. Follow the steps below to check
the network configuration:
[Procedure]
1. Run “ifconfig -a |grep eth.”
If no message appears, the network is successfully duplexed.
If the standard device names for Linux (such as eth0, eth1) are assigned to
Ether devices, the network is not duplexed.
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------# ifconfig -a |grep eth
eth0
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
eth1
Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:YY:YY:YY:YY:YY
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2. Run “udevstart.”
All the Linux standard device names will be renamed to the ones for your NEC
Express5800/ft series (such as e08030, e13030), and the network is duplexed.
3. Run “ifconfig -a |grep eth” again to confirm that no message appears.
Troubleshooting 7-31
Event Log
HAS Daemon-related logs are recorded in the system event log.
o When you manage servers using NEC ESMPRO Manager, the following message
may be recorded in the system event log. This message does not indicate an event
that impacts operations. However, if it is recorded frequently, there may be
problem in OS or the software environment. Contact your sales agent.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
HAS Daemon
Warning
800000cc – 800000d2
o The following message may be recorded in the system event log for operation or
replacement maintenance of each network adapter, SCSI disk or fibre channel.
This message does not indicate an event that impacts operations. However, if it is
recorded frequently or even when maintenance procedures are followed, there
may be problem in OS or the software environment. Contact your sales agent.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
HAS Daemon
Warning
800000cc – 800000d2
hasftctl-related logs are recorded in the system event log.
o The following message may be recorded in the system event log. This log does not
indicate an event that impacts operations. This message informs that the CPU
modules are no longer in the duplex mode. However, dual configuration is to be
set to the CPU modules again, so this warning does not indicate any impact on the
system operation.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
hasftctl
Warning
800704B2
The driver failed the fast re-sync function of the CPU module.
Source:
hasftctl
Type:
Warning
Event ID:
80070DAC
Description: The error occurred on the CPU module.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
hasftctl
Warning
80070fa0
The error occurred on the CPU module.
Source:
Type:
Event ID:
Description:
hasftctl
Warning
40071209
CPU is not doubled.
7-32 Troubleshooting
Syslog
“A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response.” is recorded in the syslog.
o The following logs may be recorded while the system is running. These logs are
recorded if the software that has acccess to BMC could not receive any response
from BMA within a certain time period. However the contents of these logs does
not influence the system.
A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response. Process = (Although
Primary BMC is ready)
A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response. Process = (Secondary
BMC is still running)
“I/O error” is recorded in the log at OS startup:
o The following message may be displayed on the screen or recorded in the log if a
USB floppy disk drive is connected at OS startup. However, this will not impact
operations (in the description below, * represents an alphanumeric character).
Partition Check:
sdg:<6> I/O error: dev **:**, Command ********, sector 0
I/O error : dev **:**, Command ********, sector 0
unable to read partition table
“APIC error” is recorded in the syslog by the operations such as inserting/removing
disks:
o A message “APIC error” may be recorded to the log or displayed on the screen
when you perform operations such as inserting/removing disks with the server
powered on, because the internal status managed by the OS and the actual status
on the server side are different. The operations are not affected.
“info synchronization error” is recorded while the CPU modules are being
synchronized:
o A message “info synchronization error” may be recorded in the log when the CPU
modules are performing duplication because the internal status managed by the
OS and the actual status on the server side are different. The operations are not
affected.
“card reports no resources” log is recorded when using the built-in LAN board:
o A message “card reports no resources” may be output to the log when the system
cannot allocate the resource for the LAN driver due to high load ratio on the
network access. The operations are not affected. LAN driver performs retry
automatically thus the system continues communication without disconnecting the
network connection.
Troubleshooting 7-33
“I/O error” is recorded in the syslog by the cable disconnection during the access to
the Fibre Channel disk:
o When the Fibre Channel connected to the primary PCI module Cable is
disconnected during the access to the Fibre Channel disk, logs may be recorded,
which seem that “SCSI disk (/dev/sdd**)I/O error”(** represent numbers)
occurred on the devices which are not running because the internal status
managed by the OS and the actual status on the server side are different. The
operations are not affected.
HASIPMI-related logs are recorded in the log:
o The following event logs may be recorded during the system operation. These
logs are recorded when the software that access to BMC could not receive
response from BMC within a given period of time. There is no problem to the
system by this warning.
A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response. Process = (Although Primary
BMC is ready)
A timeout occurred for waiting BMC response. Process = (Secondary BMC is still
running)
SCSI-related logs are recorded in the system event log:
o SCSI driver records mounting and unmounting of a module in the system event
log, but these events do not affect the system. However, if they are recorded for
over 5 minutes, contact your sales agent.
<When mounting a module > (“*” is different for each system.)
scsi0: Someone reset channel A
[aic79xx/scsi*] occur Hardware error interrupt.
scsi*: hwerrint, Discard Timer has timed out
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was paused
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was not pausedA timeout occurred for waiting
<When unmounting a module > (“*” is different for each system.)
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was paused
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was not paused
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was paused, not connected.
scsi*: Recovery Initiated - Card was not paused, not connected.
(scsi*:A:0:0): SCB 0x0 - timed out
(scsi*:A:0:0): Other SCB Timeout
(scsi*:A:0:0): No other SCB worth waiting for...
[aic79xx/scsi*] HBA seems to be removed.
7-34 Troubleshooting
[aic79xx/scsi*] start to remove the HBA.
[aic79xx/scsi*] unregister SCSI host on kernel.
[aic79xx/scsi*] SCSI host was unregisterd.
[aic79xx/scsi*] HBA was removed.
[aic79xx/scsi*] ahd_stat_timer: HBA was lost.
[aic79xx/scsi*] Reject the request. adapter was already removed.
[aic79xx/scsi*] Reject the request. adapter lost(not notified to remove yet).
FC-related logs are recorded to the system event log:
o FC driver records mounting and unmounting of a module in the system event log,
but these events do not affect the system. However, if they are recorded for over 5
minutes, contact your sales agent.
<When mounting a module> (“n” and “x” are different for each system.)
lpfc nnnn:nn:nn.n: n:1303 Link Up Event x1 received Data: xx xx xx xx
<When unmounting a module > (“*” is different for each system.)
lpfc nnnn:nn:nn.n: n:0203 Nodev timeout on NPort xxx Data: xxxxx xx xx
lpfc nnnn:nn:nn.n: n:0253 Illegal State Transition: node xe8 event xx, state xx
Data: xx xxxxx
lpfc nnnn:nn:nn.n: n:0263 Cannot block scsi target. target ptr xxxxxxxxx
lpfc nnnn:nn:nn.n: dma_pool_destroy lpfc_mbuf_pool, xxxxxxxx busy
Troubleshooting 7-35
Problems with NEC EXPRESSBUILDER
When the server is not booted from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM, check the following:
†
Did you set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and restart the
server?
o If you do not set the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM during POST and
restart the server, an error message will appear or the OS will boot.
† Is BIOS configuration correct?
o The boot device order may be specified with the BIOS setup utility of the server.
Use the BIOS setup utility to change the boot device order to boot the system
from the CD-ROM drive first.
<Menu to check: [Boot]>
When an error occurs while the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER is in progress, the following message
appears. After this message appears, check the error and take the appropriate corrective action
according to the error codes listed in the table below.
Message
This machine is not supported.
NvRAM access error
Hard disk access error
There is no device specific
information on motherboard.
Restore the backup information or
write the information using
[System Information Management]
in offline maintenance utility.
Only maintenance personnel can
operate this.
Are you going to run offline
maintenance utility?
Cause and Remedy
This NEC EXPRESSBUILDER version is
not designed for this server. Execute the
NEC EXPRESSBUILDER on the compliant
server.
An access to the nonvolatile memory
(NvRAM) is not acceptable.
The hard disk is not connected or it is
failed.
Check whether the hard disk is correctly
connected.
This message is displayed when NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER cannot find device
specific information, such as when
replacing a motherboard.
Maintenance personnel write information
using offline maintenance utility.
7-36 Troubleshooting
Problems with NEC ESMPRO
NEC ESMPRO Agent
o See Chapter 5.
NEC ESMPRO Manager
o See Chapter 5. See also online document in NEC EXPRESSBUILDER CD-ROM
for troubleshooting and other supplementary information.
Troubleshooting 7-37
COLLECTION OF TROUBLE LOGS
In the event of trouble, you can get information in the procedures described below:
IMPORTANT:
„
You can perform the procedures described below only when you are asked by your
maintenance personnel to get trouble logs.
„
When the system restarts after the trouble, it may show a message that there is a shortage of
virtual memory. However, continue the system startup. If you reset and restart the system,
you cannot get correct information.
Collection of syslog
The log file of Linux is created under the following directory in text format:
/var/log/
The log file of NEC Express5800/ft series is also created in this directory, as with general log file
of Linux.
Collection of System Information
The system information of Linux is recorded in syslog, etc.
7-38 Troubleshooting
Collection of the Memory Dump
If a failure occurs, the memory data should be dumped to acquire the required information.
IMPORTANT:
„
Consult with your sales agent before dumping the memory. Executing memory dumping
while the server is in the normal operation may affect the system operation.
„
Restarting the system due to an error may display a message indicating insufficient virtual
memory. Ignore this message and proceed. Restarting the system again may result in
dumping improper data.
Preparing for Memory Dump
Memory dumping with the DUMP switch may disable the server to restart. In such a case, it is
required to force the server to shut down. This forced shutdown, however, is not available if
"Enabled" is selected for "Switch Inhibit" on the “Security” menu of the BIOS Setup Utility
“SETUP,” because this setting disables POWER switch operation.
Follow the procedure below to change the setting to enable the forced shutdown and reset the server.
1.
Power on the server and start the BIOS Setup Utility “SETUP.”
2.
Select "Disabled" for "Switch Inhibit" in the “Security” menu.
3.
Save the configuration data and exit the SETUP.
Saving Dump Files
Press the DUMP switch to save the dump file
when an error occurs. Insert a metal pin (a
straightened large paper clip will make a
substitute) into the switch hole to press the
switch.
Pressing the switch saves the dump file in the
specified directory. (Memory dumping may not
be available when the CPU stalls.)
Dump switches
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a toothpick or plastic stick that
is easy to break.
When the DUMP switch is pressed, the system restarts and collects the memory dump.
Troubleshooting 7-39
Time Required for Dump Collection
- QuickDump
1.
From pressing the NMI switch until the server is started: about 5 minutes
2.
From the server startup until the completion of a dump file creation: 10 minutes/1GB of
memory
- diskdump
1.
From pressing the NMI switch until the completion of collecting dump and the server
startup: About 10 minutes (It may take shorter time depending on the mounted memory
amount.)
Storing Dump File
- Quick Dump
When there is not enough space for storing the dump file, Quick Dump deletes other dump files
and stores the new one.
Note: Save necessary dump files to other storage device in order to avoid the files to be deleted
before the storage run out of space.
- diskdump
When there is not enough space for storing the dump file, dump is not collected.
Note: Store necessary dump files on other storage device and make sure there is enough space
to store a new dump file.
Notes on Collecting diskdump
- The HDD access LED illuminates during dump collection.
- The screen may remain blank even if dump is being collected. Do not perform forced DC off.
BACKUP OF IPMI INFORMATION
Collect the IPMI information. NEC ESMPRO Agent must be installed to collect the information.
1.
Log on to the system as a user with a root authority.
2.
Move to the directory where the NEC ESMPRO Agent is installed.
Unless you have specified the installation destination, it is installed in
“/opt/nec/esmpro_sa.” In this description, it is assumed to be installed in
“/opt/nec/esmpro_sa.”
cd /opt/nec/esmpro_sa
3.
Move to the directory where tools are stored.
cd bin
7-40 Troubleshooting
4.
Execute the following command:
./xrasutil
ESRAS Utility will start.
5.
Select <Backup the current IPMI Information…>.
The IPMI Information Backup screen will appear.
6.
Enter an output destination and a comment, and then select [OK].
The information will be output to the specified location.
<Backup File Name>: Specify the path to the file on which you want to save the
information. By default, the information is output to log/ipmi.dat
which is under the directory where NEC ESMPRO Agent is
installed.
<Comment>: Describe the information which you want to output with. (Optional)
For using the Server Maintenance Utility in Japanese, run the command below before starting it.
This command starts X Window and the screen will be displayed in the Japanese fonts.
init 5
If you star the Server Maintenance Utility without starting the X Window, messages displayed on
the console may affect the screen display. If the screen is not displayed properly, press Ctrl + L to
refresh the screen.
Chapter 8
System Upgrade
This chapter describes procedures to add options and replace failed components.
IMPORTANT:
„
Optional devices described in this chapter may be installed or removed by the user. However,
NEC does not assume any liability for damage to optional devices or the server or
malfunctions of the server resulted from installation by the user. NEC recommends you ask
your sales agent to install or remove any optional devices.
„
Be sure to use only optional devices and cables designated by NEC. Repair of the server due to
malfunctions, failures, or damage resulted from installing such devices or cables will be
charged.
8-2 System Upgrade
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Observe the following notes to install or remove optional devices safely and properly.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are
risks of death or serious personal injury. See “PRECAUTIONS FOR
SAFETY” in Chapter 1 for details.
x
x
x
x
Do not disassemble, repair, or alter the server.
Do not look into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not remove the lithium battery.
Disconnect the power plug before working with the server.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to use the server safely. There are
risks of fire, personal injury, or property damage. See “PRECAUTIONS
FOR SAFETY” in Chapter 1 for details.
x
x
x
x
x
Do not install or remove components by a single person.
Do not install the server leaving the cover removed.
Make sure to complete component installation.
Do not pinch your finger(s).
High temperature
System Upgrade 8-3
ANTI-STATIC MEASURES
The server contains electronic components sensitive to static electricity. Avoid failures caused by static
electricity when installing or removing any optional devices.
„
Wear wrist straps (arm belts or anti-static gloves).
Wear wrist straps on your wrists. If no wrist strap is available, touch an unpainted metal part of
the cabinet before touching a component to discharge static electricity from your body.
Touch the metal part regularly when working with components to discharge static electricity.
„
Select a suitable workspace.
– Work with the server on the anti-static or concrete floor.
– When you work with the server on a carpet where static electricity is likely to be generated,
make sure take anti-static measures beforehand.
„
Use a worktable.
Place the server on an anti-static mat to work with it.
„
Clothes
– Do not wear a wool or synthetic cloth to work with the server.
– Wear anti-static shoes to work with the server.
– Take off any metal accessories you wear (ring, bracelet, or wristwatch) before working
with the server.
„
Handling of components
– Keep any component in an anti-static bag until you actually install it to the server.
– Hold a component by its edge to avoid touching any terminals or parts.
– To store or carry any component, place it in an anti-static bag.
8-4 System Upgrade
PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE
Note the following, when installing or replacing devices, to improve the performance of NEC
Express5800/ft series.
„
With the NEC Express5800/ft series, devices can be replaced during the continuous operation.
Take extreme care for electric shock and damage to the component due to short-circuit.
„
Optional devices cannot be installed or removed during continuous operation. Normally,
shutdown the OS, check that the server is powered off, disconnect all power cords and interface
cables from the server before installing or removing the optional devices.
„
To remove the CPU or PCI module during the continuous operation, disable the intended module
(place the module off-line) by using the Server Maintenance Utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent
or the NEC ESMPRO Manager from the management PC on the network. After a new module is
installed to the server, enable the module using the Server Maintenance Utility or the NEC
ESMPRO Manager.
TIPS:
The system is defaulted to automatically boot the module, once installed. For more
information, see Chapter 5.
„
Make sure to provide the same hardware configuration on both groups.
„
Use the same slots and sockets on both groups.
„
Do not install those devices having different specifications, performance, or features.
„
Before removing the setscrews from the CPU/IO modules, place the desired module off-line
using the Server Maintenance Utility or the NEC ESMPRO Manager.
.
System Upgrade 8-5
3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE
The 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay in front of the server contains six slots in which hard disks with the
SCA2 interface are installed.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not use any hard disks that are not authorized by NEC. Installing a third-party hard disk may
cause a failure of the server as well as the hard disk. Purchase hard disks of the same model in
pair. Contact your sales agent for hard disk drives optimum for your server.
TIPS:
„
The primary CPU/IO module is determined by the order of connecting power cords (see
Chapter3).
㩷
The 320Fa-L model is used in the example quoted here. However steps you should take are the same
for other models. You can install 25.4mm (1-inch) high hard disk drives to six 3.5-inch hard disk drive
bays on the server. 3.5-imch hard disk drive bays have labels with slot number.
The hard disk drives installed on the slot 0, 1 and 2 are mirrored with the slot 3, 4, and 5 respectively.
(The OS is installed on the mirror volumes that consist of the hard disks in the slot 0 and 3)
Slot 5
Slot 4
Slot 3
Slot 2
Slot 1
Slots to execute the mirroring process
Slot 0
Empty slots in the 3.5-inch hard disk drive bay contain dummy trays. The dummy trays are inserted to
improve the cooling effect within the device. Always insert the dummy trays in the slots in which hard
disks are not installed.
Attach an HDD ID label indicating the slot number of installed hard disk to the handle of the hard disk.
8-6 System Upgrade
Installing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
Follow the procedure below to install the hard disk. A hard disk may be installed in another slot in the
same procedure.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before starting installing or removing options.
1.
Click [Start] - [Administrative Tools] - [Computer Management]. The [Computer Management]
window appears.
2.
Click [Disk Management] under [Storage] in the console tree.
3.
<If you are using the tower model>
Unlock the front door lock with the security key and open the front door.
<If you are using the rack model>
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it.
4.
Identify the slot to which you want to install the hard disk.
Install a hard disk in an empty slot in the group, starting from the lower slot. (In the order of slot
0, slot 3, slot 1, slot 4, slot 2, and slot 5)
5.
Hold the handle of the dummy tray to remove the
tray. 㩷
IMPORTANT:
Keep and store the dummy tray with care.
6.
Unlock the hard disk to be added.
System Upgrade 8-7
7.
Firmly hold the handle of the hard disk to install and
insert the hard disk into the slot.
TIPS:
8.
„
Insert the disk until the lever hook touches the
server frame.
„
Check the orientation of lever. Insert the hard
disk with the lever unlocked.
Slowly close the lever.
When the lever is locked, you will hear a click sound.
IMPORTANT:
Be careful not to pinch your finger(s) between the
lever and handle.
TIPS:
Check the hook of the lever is engaged with the frame.
9.
Connect the power cord.
10.
Press the POWER switch to power on.ᴾ
11.
<If you are using the tower model>
Close the front door and lock it with the security key.
<If you are using the rack model>
Install the front bezel and lock it with the security key.
12.
See “RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED” on page 8-10 to configure
RAID.
8-8 System Upgrade
Removing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
Follow the procedure below to remove the hard disk.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before starting installing or removing options.
1.
Shutdown Linux.
The system turns off automatically.
2.
Disconnect all the power cords from the power outlet.
3.
<If you are using the tower model>
Unlock the front door lock with the security key and open the front door.
<If you are using the rack model>
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it.
4.
Push the lever of the hard disk to unlock the handle.
5.
Hold the handle and hard disk to pull them off.ᴾ
6.
Install the dummy tray in an empty tray according to
procedures described in "Installation.”
Make sure to install the dummy slot in the empty slot to
improve the cooling effect within the device.
System Upgrade 8-9
Replacing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive
Follow the procedure below to remove the failed hard disk. If the hard disk fails, it should be replaced
with new device with the server powered-on.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to read “ANTI-STATIC MEASURES” and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before starting installing or removing options. You can replace disks during
continuous operation.
Replacing the Hard Disk Drive
1.
Locate the failed hard disk.
When a hard disk fails, the DISK LED on the hard disk drive’s handle illuminates amber.
The DISK Access LED of the amber lit disk also illuminates amber.
2.
Remove the failed hard disk referring to “REPLACING 3.5-INCH HARD DISK DRIVE” on
page 3-3 and “Removing 3.5-inch Hard Disk Drive” on page 8-8.
No need to shutdown Linux.
3.
Refer to the steps in "Installing the hard disk" to install a new hard disk.
TIPS:
„ The
hard disk to be installed for replacement must have the same specifications as its
mirroring hard disk.
„ Use
an unsigned hard disk to replace the failed one. If you use a signed disk, you need to
restore the redundant configuration in the procedure of “How to Restore Redundant
Configuration Manually” below.
4.
Restore the redundant configuration (see Chapter 3).
8-10 System Upgrade
RAID CONFIGURATION WHEN DISKS ARE ADDED
Use ftdiskadm to configure RAID when disks are added.
From “SCSI” – “Bring Up,” specify slot numbers and add the disks to the system. Then, from “RAID”
– “New Disks,” configure RAID.
Following is an example of adding disks to Slot 2 and Slot 5 using ftdiskadm:
(Example of adding disks to the system)
#ftdiskadm
Command Action
1 => RAID
2 => SCSI
9 Quit
Command:2
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:2
[Bring Up(System Disk)]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:2
<<<Add the disk in Slot2>>>
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:2
[Bring Up(System Disk)]
Which scsi SLOT?[0-5]:5
<<<Add the disk in Slot5>>>
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:3
<<<Confirm that the disks are added to the system>>>
[SCSI DISK STATUS]
-- SYSTEM -slot name use serial
path
0
hada 2
V3W1N8RA0050B5CL0399 h1c0t0l0ACT
1
2
hadc 0
V3W45ZVA0050B5CL0707 h1c0t2l0ACT
3
hadb 2
V3W1RK5A0050B5CK040D h2c0t3l0ACT
4
5
hadd 0
V3W1D30A0050B6120DED h2c0t5l0ACT
h7c0t0l0HOT
h7c0t2l0HOT
h8c0t3l0HOT
h8c0t5l0HOT
System Upgrade 8-11
Command Action
1 Bring Down(System Disk)
2 Bring Up(System Disk)
3 Status(System Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:9
(Example of RAID configuration)
Command Action
1 => RAID
2 => SCSI
9 Quit
Command:1
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:1
[New Disks]
Which scsi SLOT?[1,2,4,5]:2
(*1)
Making the disk partition table: SLOT=2 SIZE=69809 (MB)
How many partitions?[1-12]:4
(*2)
Input the SIZE of partition 1 [1-65620(MB)]:10000
Input the SIZE of partition 5 [1-55620(MB)]:20000
Input the SIZE of partition 6 [1-35620(MB)]:20000
partition 7: 19809
Are you sure to create?[y/n]:y
Now the creation of RAID configuration begins and the process is completed unless there is any
problem. For RAID status, user “Status(Raid).”
Notes:
1: Before configuring RAID, insert disks to slots and add them to the system. Insert the disks to
make pairs in Slot1 and Slot4, and Slot 2 and Slot 5. In this example, Slot 2 and Slot 5 are
paired.
2: Enter the number of partitions to create. Then, assign the capacity in MB to each partition.
Values of the last partition will be assigned automatically. The partition numbers begin with 1
and the next number is 5 and the following numbers are in ascending order. A certain amount
of capacity is reserved for the last partition. Therefore the specifiable range is smaller than
actual disk capacity. The actual partition size varies slightly depending on the disk structure.
8-12 System Upgrade
View the status of disks and confirm that the disks are added properly:
Command Action
1 New Disks
2 Remove Half Disk
3 Repair Disk
4 Remove Full Disks
5 Status(Raid)
6 Status(All Disks)
9 <= Return
Command:5
[Status(Raid)]
Name Partition Status
Member
-------------------------------------------------md6
resync=DELAYED (2)hadc7 (5)hadd7
md5
resync=DELAYED (2)hadc6 (5)hadd6
md4
resync=DELAYED (2)hadc5 (5)hadd5
md3
resync3.9%
(2)hadc1 (5)hadd1
md1 /
duplex
(0)hada2 (3)hadb2
md2
duplex
(0)hada3 (3)hadb3
md0 /boot
duplex
(0)hada1 (3)hadb1
TIPS:
„ If you attempt to start ftdiskadm more than once at a time, “Cannot start” is displayed. If this
message is displayed even when only one ftdiskadm is started, it may have been terminated
without clearing the information. In such a case, run ftdiskcleanup and then start ftdiskadm.
„ The trace log of ftdiskadm is recorded to the /var/log/ftdiskadm directory. If the files occupies a
large part of the disk space, delete them from the oldest.
„ Boot disks are inserted into the Slot0 and Slot3 normally. If you can only boot the system in the
simplex mode, insert a boot disk into the Slot0 and boot the system.
„ After the disk is expanded and the system is restarted, the name of the disk device used by
diskdump
is
changed.
Refer
to
“DUMP INITIALIZATION”
and
modify
"/etc/sysconfig/diskdump.”
System Upgrade 8-13
5.25-INCH DEVICE
The server has two slots to which you can install magnetic tape backup devices.
You need a SCSI controller, sold separately, to install a backup device
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
ᴾ
Backup
device tray
8-14 System Upgrade
ᴾ
Installing 5.25-inch Device
1. See page 8-4 to prepare for installation.
2. Loosen screws to remove the side cover.
3.
Loosen screws to remove the tray for adding devices.
4.
Remove the four screws securing the dummy cover,
and remove the dummy cover.
System Upgrade 8-15
5.
Fix the device to the tray for adding devices with the
four screws.
TIPS:
Referring to the manual that comes with the
5.25-inch device you are to install, set the
TermPower to Enable.
6.
Gently insert the device into the tray and secure
it with the screw. ᴾ
7.
Connect the SCSI cable and power cords to the
device.
IMPORTANT:
Distorted connector pins or loose
connections may cause malfunction. Make
sure that the device and cable connectors are
connected correctly.
8.
Secure the side cover with the screws.
9.
Set up the SCSI BIOS referring to the manual
shipped with the SCSI controller.
10.
Install the device driver of the installed device.
Removing 5.25-inch Device
Removal is the reverse of the installation.
8-16 System Upgrade
CPU/IO MODULE
To replace a CPU (processor, DIMM (memory), PCI card, you need to remove the CPU/IO module.
IMPORTANT:
„
Ask your sales agent to replace the CPU/IO module and components of the CPU/IO module.
„
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before installing or removing options.
„
To install or remove CPU or DIMM, first power off the server before removing the CPU/IO
module.
„
Removing the module being operating may cause unexpected trouble. Use the management
software (e.g., Server Maintenance Utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager) to identify the module
to be removed so that the module is removed when it is stopped, without fail
Then remove the relevant module after verifying the Status LED on the CPU/IO module. See
Chapter 2 “LEDs” for details of the Status LED.
„
After installing CPU/IO module, always power on the module using the power switch.
Precautions
When replacing a CPU/IO module, replace one module and wait until dual configuration is
established to replace the other module. If you replace the both modules simultaneously,
establishing dual CPU/IO module configuration, which can result in interruption of the whole
system. (See Chapter 7 “Troubleshooting.”)
System Upgrade 8-17
Removing CPU/IO Module
Follow the procedure below to remove the CPU/IO module.
The 320Fa-L model is used in the example quoted here. However steps you should take are the same
for other models.
1.
Stop the CPU/IO module you want to remove.
To this end, use the Server Maintenance Utility of the NEC ESMPRO Agent installed to your
server or the Data Viewer of the NEC ESMPRO Manager.
For the detailed procedure, see "Maintenance of NEC Express5800/ft series" of "NEC
ESMPRO Agent and Manager" in Chapter 5.
NEC ESMPRO Manager
Select [ft] - [CPU Module] - [CPU Module (to be
removed)] - [Maintenance] - [Bring Up/Bring Down]
- [Bring Down].
Server Maintenance Utility
Select [FTServer] - [CPU Module] - [CPU Module (to
be removed)] - [Bring Up/Bring Down] - [Down].
Repeat the operation mentioned above for the IO module and confirm that the status of the
CPU/IO module and the IO module are “Removed.”
2.
If the module POWER LED of the module to be removed is illuminated, press the module
POWER switch to power off the module.
3.
<If you are using the tower model>
Unlock the front door lock with the security key to open the front door.
<If you are using the rack model>
Unlock the front bezel with the security key and detach it.
8-18 System Upgrade
4.
Loosen the screws securing the CPU/IO module
handle to press down the handle.
The lock is unlocked and the CPU/IO module is
pulled out.
IMPORTANT:
Before you pull out a CPU/IO module, check
the rear of the server to make sure cables for
Handle
connection with peripheral equipment or
network are disconnected. If any cables are connected, keep a record of where the cables
are connected and then disconnect all cables connected to the module you are to pull out.
5.
Hold the release levers of the CPU/IO module and pull it off.
IMPORTANT:
6.
„
Do not hold part other than the handle to pull the module.
„
Handle the CPU/IO module carefully. Do not drop the module or bump it against
parts in the device when you remove it.
Carefully place the CPU/IO module on a flat and sturdy table.
Avoid the dusty or humid place.
This allows you to access the devices in the CPU/IO module. For more information on how to
handle these devices, see the associated sections.
System Upgrade 8-19
Installing CPU/IO Module
Follow the procedure below to install the CPU/IO module:
The 320Fa-L model is used in the example quoted here. However steps you should take are the same
for other models.
IMPORTANT:
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" (page 8-3) and "PREPARING YOUR
SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE" (page 8-4) before starting installing or removing options.
1.
Firmly hold the CP/IOU module with both hands and insert it into the rack.
Hold the CPU/IO module in such a way that its back panel connector faces the back of the rack
and engage the guides of the
module and chassis, and insert it
slowly.
2.
Hold the handle to push the
module as far as it goes.
Handle
3.
Put the handle back in the position where it was.
The installed CPU/IO module will start
automatically.
IMPORTANT:
Connect the cables that you disconnected
before removing the CPU/IO module to
where they were originally connected.
Connect cables while the handle is leaned
toward you.
4.
Secure the handle with the screws.
IMPORTANT:
„
„
„
Secure the handle with the screws. If it is not secured by the screws, the CPU/IO will
not be powered on.
In some system statuses or settings, auto start up or integration does not take place
when the module is connected. In such a case, check the status by using the Server
Maintenance Utility or NEC ESMPRO Manager data viewer, and then power on by the
module POWER switch or start up the IO and CPU modules.
After installing CPU/IO module, always power on the module using the power switch.
8-20 System Upgrade
DIMM
The DIMM (dual inline memory module) is installed to the DIMM socket in the CPU/IO module on
the NEC Express5800/ft series.
The CPU/IO module board is equipped with six sockets. Two DIMMS are installed on the DIMM slot
A1 and B1 as standard equipment. (The standard DIMMs can be replaced with other DIMMs.)
320Fa-L and 320Fa-LR models: 512MB DIMM×2
DIMMs should be installed to these sockets, starting from the lowest socket number.
TIPS:
„
You can add memory up to:
320Fa-L and 320Fa-LR models: 6GB (1GB x 6)
„
In the error messages and logs in POST NEC ESMPRO, or Off-line Maintenance Utility, the
DIMM connector may be described as “group.” The number next to “group” corresponds to
the connector number shown in the figure on the next page.
IMPORTANT:
„
The DIMM is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of
the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the DIMM. Do not
touch the DIMM terminals or onboard parts with a bare hand or place the DIMM directly on
the desk. For more information on static electricity, see “ANTI-STATIC MEASURES.”
„
Make sure to use the DIMM authorized by NEC. Installing a third-party DIMM may cause a
failure of the DIMM as well as the server. Repair of the server due to failures or damage
resulted from installing such a board will be charged.
„
Before adding or removing DIMMs, power off the server and detach the CPU/IO module.
„
Make sure to read “ANTI-STATIC MEASURES” (page 8-3) and “PREPARING YOUR
SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE” (page 8-4) before installing or removing options.
System Upgrade 8-21
DIMM slot A1
DIMM slot B1
DIMM slot A2
DIMM slot B2
DIMM slot A3
DIMM slot B3
Motherboard of the CPU/IO module
Precautions
Note the following to install or replace DIMM.
„
The DIMMs with the same number are linked among the groups. When a DIMM is added to one
group, another identical DIMM should be installed to the socket with the same number in
another group. This rule is applied to the case of removal.
„
The linked DIMMs should be of the same product with the same performance.
„
DIMMs should be installed in sockets from the lowest socket number to the highest socket
number.
8-22 System Upgrade
Installing DIMM
Follow the procedure below to install the DIMM.
1.
Shut down OS.
The sever turns off automatically.
2.
Disconnect the power cords from the outlets.
3.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-17.
4.
Check to be sure in which socket you are mounting the DIMM.
5.
Remove the connector cover from the socket.
DIMM connector cover
A DIMM connector cover is installed to the open socket. When the
levers on both ends of the connector are opened, the DIMM
connector cover is unlocked and you can remove the cover.
IMPORTANT:
Keep the removed DIMM connector cover.
6.
Insert a DIMM into the DIMM socket vertically.
TIPS:
Pay attention to the orientation of the DIMM. The terminal of
the DIMM has a cutout to prevent misinsertion.
After the DIMM is completely inserted into the socket, the levers
are automatically closed.
7.
Mount the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
8.
Reattach the removed memory duct and secure it with the tree screws.
9.
Connect the power cords.
10.
Press the POWER switch to power on the server.
11.
Verify that POST displays no error message.
If POST displays an error message, write it down and see the POST error message list on page
7-4.
System Upgrade 8-23
Removing DIMM
Follow the procedure below to remove the DIMM.
TIPS:
Unless at least two DIMMs are installed, the server does not work.
1.
Shutdown OS.
The system turns off automatically.
2.
Disconnect the power cords from the outlets.
3.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-17.
4.
Open the lever on both ends of the target DIMM socket to
unlock the DIMM. Then, remove the DIMM.
5.
Mount the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
6.
Connect the power cords.
7.
Press the POWER switch to power on the server.
8.
Verify that POST displays no error message.
If POST displays an error message, write it down and see the POST error message list on page
7-4.
8-24 System Upgrade
Replacing DIMM
Follow the procedure below to replace a failed DIMM.
1.
Identify the failed DIMM using the Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager.
2.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-17.
3.
Replace the DIMM
4.
Install the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
5.
Start up the CPU/IO module using NEC ESMPRO Manager or Server Maintenance Utility.ᴾ
System Upgrade 8-25
PROCESSOR (CPU)
In addition to the standard CPU (Intel® Xeon® Processor), you can add one CPU to make a
multi-processor system.
IMPORTANT:
„
The CPU is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of the
server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the CPU. Do not touch the
CPU terminals or onboard parts with a bare hand or place the CPU directly on the desk. For
more information on static electricity, see “ANTI-STATIC MEASURES.”
„
Do not use the system before checking to see it works correctly.
„
Make sure to use the CPU specified by NEC. Installing a third-party CPU may cause a failure
of the CPU as well as the server.
„
Before adding or removing a CPU, power off the server and then remove the CPU/IO module.
„
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before starting installing or removing options.
CPU#1
(Standard CPU)
CPU#2
(Additional CPU)
8-26 System Upgrade
Installing CPU (Model with Heat Sink)
Follow the steps below to mount a CPU.
Information provided here is for the 320Fa-L and 320Fa-LR models, which have a heat sink installed.
1.
Shut down OS.
The system turns off automatically.
2.
Unplug the power cords.
3.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-17.
4.
Remove the cable to remove the cooling fan unit.
Cable
Cooling fan unit
5.
Check to be sure of the location of the CPU socket.
6.
Detach the socket cover on the CPU socket.
IMPORTANT:
Keep the socket cover.
7.
Lift the socket lever.ᴾ
IMPORTANT:
Open the lever fully. It can be opened 120° or more.
System Upgrade 8-27
8.
Place the CPU on the socket carefully.
TIPS:
Pay attention to the orientation of the CPU. The CPU and
socket have pin marks to prevent misinsertion. Check the
pin marks of the CPU and the socket and insert the CPU
correctly.
9.
After pressing the CPU softly against the socket, close the
lever to secure it.
10.
Remove the film of the cool sheet on the heat sink.
11.
Place the heat sink on top of the CPU.
12.
Secure the heat skink with the screws. Firstly, fasten four
screws in a crisscross pattern tentatively, then fasten the
screws tightly.
Pin marks
8-28 System Upgrade
13.
Confirm that the heat sink is mounted horizontally to the motherboard.
IMPORTANT:
„
If the heat sink is not horizontally to the motherboard, dismount and remount it.
The heat sink cannot be mounted correctly if:
- the CPU is not mounted correctly
- the screws are not fully fastened.
„
Do not hold the fastened heat sink to move the CPU.
14.
Insert the cable and then install the cooling fan unit.
15.
Install the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
16.
Connect the power cords.
17.
Press the POWER switch to power on the server.
18.
Verify that POST displays no error message.
If POST displays an error message, write it down and see the POST error message list on page
7-4.
System Upgrade 8-29
Removing CPU (Model with Heat Sink)
When you remove a CPU, prepare for removal referring to the steps from 1 to 4 of “Installing CPU
(Model with Heat Sink).” Then follow the installation steps from 12 to 7. To remove the heat sink,
remove the screws, move the heat sink horizontally a little, and then remove it.
IMPORTANT:
„
Do not remove the CPU unless it is faulty.
„
After operation, the cool sheet at the bottom of the heat sink may stick to the CPU because of
the heat. When you dismount the heat sink, turn it sideways lightly to make sure that it is not
sticking to the CPU. If it is sticking to the CPU and you remove it, the CPU or the socket may
be damaged.
1.
After removing the heat sink and the CPU, attach the socket cover on the CPU socket, mount the
cooling fan unit, and then connect the cable.
2.
Install the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
3.
Connect the power cords.
4.
Press the POWER switch to power on the server.
5.
Check POST to see if there is any error message. If there is any error message, write it down and
see the error message list on page 7-4.
8-30 System Upgrade
Replacing CPU
Follow the steps below to replace a failed CPU:
1.
Use Data Viewer of NEC ESMPRO Manager to identify the failed CPU.
2.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-17.
3.
Replace the CPU.
4.
Install the CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
The installed CPU/IO module will start automatically.
System Upgrade 8-31
ft Remote Management Card
ft Remote Management Card function is compatible only with 320Fa-L, 320Fa-LR models.
An ft Remote Management Card needs to be installed on each CPU/IO module in order to use ft
Remote Management Cards.
IMPORTANT:
„
Even when the server is powered off (the POWER LED is off), the power is supplied to the
server if the power cords are connected. Therefore, before adding any ft Remote Management
Card, you must remove all power cords from the AC inlets. If ft Remote Management Cards are
installed with the power cords connected, the server and the ft Remote Management Cards may
be damaged.
„
ft Remote Management Cards can only be installed into the dedicated slots. If they are installed
into other slots such as slots for PCI EXPRESS, the server and the ft Remote Management Cards
may be damaged.
„
Since the sensor information specific to the server is not written to the added ft Remote
Management Card, the messages below are displayed and the startup process temporally stops
when starting the server (POST). The server may be in such a state when the NEC logo screen is
displayed and the startup process is stopped. Press ESC to delete the logo screen and check the
diagnostic message.
H/W Configuration of BMC is corrupted.
!! Update BMC H/W Configuration by configuration tool !!
!! Refer to BMC configuration manual !!
When the messages above are displayed, press F1or POST starts if you wait for a while. NEC
EXPRESSBUILDER starts by inserting the EXPRESSBUIDER CD-ROM that comes with the
server into the CD-ROM drive. Select the [Tools] menu - [Initialize Remote Management Card]
from the NEC EXPRESSBUILDER main menu and write the sensor information specific to the
server.
Running the initialize Remote Management Card resets the AC LINK setting (Server-AC LINK)
of the BIOS setup to the initial value “Last State.” If you have changed the value, you will need
to set it again.
„
The ft Remote Management Card is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch
the metal frame of the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the
PCI board. Do not touch the board terminals or its parts with a bare hand or place the board
directly on the desk. For more information on static electricity, see "ANTI-STATIC
MEASURES" on page 8-3.
„
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" on page 8-3 and "PREPARING YOUR
SYSTEM FOR UPGRADE" on page 8-4 before starting installing or removing options.
8-32 System Upgrade
Installing ft Remote Management Card
Follow the procedures below and install ft Remote Management Card.
1.
Remove CPU/IO module referring page 8-17.
TIPS:
If PCI board is already installed to the CPU/IO module, remove the PCI board referring to
page 8-37.
2.
Remove PCI rear bracket installed to the CPU/IO
module as a standard with two screws.
PCI rear bracket
3.
Remove the blank cover for LAN connector of ft Remote
Management Card. Grab the top and bottom of the blank
cover to unlock and remove it.
4.
Install ft Remote Management Card to PCI rear bracket
with one screw.
Blank cover for
LAN connector
ft Remote
Management
Card
System Upgrade 8-33
5.
Check the slot for ft Remote Management Card and remove the connector cap installed in the
slot.
IMPORTANT:
Keep and store the removed connector cap with care.
6.
Insert ft Remote Management Card slowly against the connecting part to the slot board on the
motherboard.
7.
Insert the connecting part of the card against the slot and secure it with two screws.
IMPORTANT:
If you have trouble installing the card, remove the card
once and install it again. Be careful since the card gets
damaged if you press it too hard.
TIPS:
If PCI board is removed in the first step, remount it
referring to page 8-36.
8.
Install CPU/IO module referring to page 8-19.
9.
Turn ON the power by pressing the POWER switch of installed CPU/IO module.
Removing ft Remote Management Card
Removal of PCI riser card follows the reverse procedure of the installation and remove the connector
cap.
8-34 System Upgrade
PCI BOARD
Up to three PCI boards can be installed to the CPU/IO module.
IMPORTANT:
„
The PCI board is extremely sensitive to static electricity. Make sure to touch the metal frame of
the server to discharge static electricity from your body before handling the PCI board. Do not
touch the PCI board terminals or onboard parts by a bare hand or place the PCI board directly
on the desk. For more information on static electricity, see "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" on
page 8-3.
„
Make sure to read "ANTI-STATIC MEASURES" and "PREPARING YOUR SYSTEM FOR
UPGRADE" before starting installing or removing options.
PCI#2
(PCI#2 for 320Fa-L,
320Fa-LR)
PCI#1
(PCI#1 for 320Fa-L,
320Fa-LR)
Note the following to install or replace PCI board.
„
To make a dual PCI board configuration, install the same type of board (i.e., having the same
specifications and performance) to the same slot in another group.
When a PCI board is installed to one group, another identical PCI board should be installed to
the same slot in another group. This rule is applied to the case of removal.
„
Install the PCI boards, starting from the one with the smallest number.
System Upgrade 8-35
List of option PCI boards and installable slots:
N-code
Product name
N8804-002
PCI slot
performance
Slot size
PCI board type
Mountable board
size
1000BASE-T 1ch
board set
1000BASE-SX 1ch
board set
1000BASE-T 2ch
board set
SCSI board
N8804-003
N8804-004
N8803-032
N8803-033
Fibre Channel board
set
320Fa-L 320Fa-LR
PCI-1
PCI-2
64bit/100MHz
Remarks
Low Profile
3.3V
MD2
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
ż
Only one board can be mounted
when N8804-004 or N8803-033 is
installed
Up to one board can be mounted
per CPU/IO module
8-36 System Upgrade
Installing PCI Board
Follow the procedure below to install the board to be connected to the PCI board slot.
TIPS:
To install the PCI board, make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the shape of
the PCI board slot connector.
1.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to the page 8-17.
2.
Identify the slot to which you want to install a PCI board and remove the connector cap.
IMPORTANT:
Carefully keep the removed connector cap.
3.
Remove the PCI bracket by loosening the screw and
remove the slot cover of an expansion slot.
Screw
IMPORTANT:
Keep and store the removed slot cover with care.
㩷
Bracket
Expansion
slot cover
4.
Remove the connector cap installed in the slot in which the board is installed.
TIPS:
To install the PCI board, make sure the shape of the board connector matches with the shape
of the PCI board slot connector.
IMPORTANT:
Keep and store the removed connector cap with care.
System Upgrade 8-37
5.
Gently insert the slot on the board against the
connecting part of the board㪅㩷
6.
Insert the board for connecting part of the board to securely connect to the slot.
PCI board
IMPORTANT:
If you have trouble installing the board, remove the board once and install it again. Be
careful since the board gets damaged if you press it too hard.
7.
Install the PCI bracket and secure the board㪅㩷
8.
Install CPU/IO module referring to the page 8-19.
9.
Turn ON the power by pressing the POWER switch of installed CPU/IO module.
Removing PCI Board
Removal of PCI board card follows the reverse procedure of the installation and installs the expansion
slot cover.
8-38 System Upgrade
㩷
Replacing PCI Board
Follow the procedure below to replace the failed PCI board.
1.
Check the PCI board LED and identify the failed PCI board.
When the PCI board is failed or incorrectly installed, the three LEDs associated with the PCI
board slot are being turned off.
2.
Remove the CPU/IO module referring to the page 8-17. .
3.
Remove the PCI bracket, then remove the PCI board.
4.
Replace the board and fasten it.
5.
Install the CPU/IO module referring to the page 8-19. .
6.
Connect the network cable and cables for PCI boards.
7.
The installed CPU/IO module will start automatically.
8.
Confirm that the PCI board is correctly recognized by POST and OS.
System Upgrade 8-39
Setup of Optional PCI Board
„
To enable the fault-tolerant feature of the optional device, the identical PCI boards must be
installed to the slots with the same number in CPU/IO module#0 and CPU/IO module#1.
„
The BIOS settings need to be modified when mounting some optional PCI boards. To change
the BIOS settings, start the BIOS Setup Utility to change the [Boot Monitoring] configuration in
[Server] – [Monitoring Configuration]. See “Monitoring Configuration” on page 4-25 for more
details.
„
For the supported connecting devices, contact your sales agent.
N8804-002
1000BASE-T 1ch board set
N8804-003
1000BASE-SX 1ch board set
N8804-004
1000BASE-T 2ch board set
IMPORTANT:
For LAN cable’s connector, use a RJ-45 connector which is compliant with IEC8877 standard. If
any other connector is used, it may not be removed easily.
„
List of slots to install optional PCI boards
Refer to “List of option PCI boards and installable slots:” on page 8-35.
„
Installation procedure
NEC Express5800/ft series sets dual configuration with optional PCI boards in pairs. See “Step 6:
Set Dual LAN Card Configuration.”
N8803-032
„
SCSI board
List of slots to install optional PCI boards
Refer to “List of option PCI boards and installable slots:” on page 8-35.
„
Driver installation procedure
The driver for N8803-032 SCSI board is included in the OS, so its installation is not necessary.
8-40 System Upgrade
N8803-033 Fibre Channel Board Set
„
List of slots to install optional PCI boards
“List of option PCI boards and installable slots:” on page 8-35.
„
Driver installation procedure
The driver for N8803-033 Fibre Channel board is included in OS, so its installation is not necessary.
However, the following needs to be added under /etc/modprobe.conf depending on your
environment.
<N8190-119>
options lpfc lpfc_topology=0
<Others>
options lpfc lpfc_topology=6
After setup, reboot the system:
#sync
#reboot
IMPORTANT:
„
StoragePathSavior is required for connecting NEC Storage using N8803-033 Fiber
Channel boards.㩷 㩷
„
Mount N8803-033 Fibre Channel boards after completing the OS installation. They are
used in a pair or in a set of four. Mount each controller on the slot of the same position
of each PCI module.
Appendix A
Specifications
Item
CPU
Type
Clock/second cache
Number of processors
Maximum
Chipset
Memory
Standard
Maximum
Expansion unit
Memory module
Error check
Graphics (VRAM)
Auxiliary
Floppy disk (standard)
input
Hard disk (standard)
device
Hard disk (maximum)
File bay
CD-ROM (standard)
5.25 inch
3.5 inch
PCI, 64-bit
Additional
slot
LAN interface
External
USB
interface
Network
Display
Cabinet design
External dimensions
Weight
Power supply
Power consumption
Environmental
In operation
requirements
In storage
NEC Express5800/320Fa-L
NEC Express5800/320Fa-LR
N8800-090F, EXP320B
N8800-091F, EXP320A
Intel“ Xeon“ Processor u 1
3.2GHz/2MB
1 processor (the number of processors installed per module)
Up to 2 processors (the number of processors installed per
module)
GeminiEngine (NEC original chipset)
None
6GB (The standard DIMM must be replaced.)
2 DIMMs (512MB u 2/ 1GB u 2)
DDR400 SDRAM DIMM (Registered Type)
ECC
ES1000 (32MB)
3.5-inch drive u 1 (USB)
None
1.8TB* (300GB u 6)
* The user area is reduced to a half of the physical capacity due
to software mirroring.
ATAPI interface u 1 (Load on tray type, x24 speed)
2 slots
None
6 slots
2 slots
(Low profile)
1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T (2 ports)
4-pin connector (3 ports). Keyboard occupies one port.
RJ-45 (4 ports)
MINI D-sub 15-pin (1 port)
Tower type
Rack-mount type
310 mm (w) x 543 mm (h) x
485 (w) u 177 (h) u
715 mm (d)
635 (d) mm
59 kg (Max. 66 kg)
38 kg (Max. 47kg)
100 to 120 VAC r10%, 200 to 240 VAC r10%, 50/60 Hz r1 Hz
829 VA, 819 W
Temperature 10 to 35°C
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Temperature -10 to 55°C
Humidity 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing)
A-2 Specifications
Appendix B
I/O Port Addresses
The factory-set I/O port addresses for the server are assigned as follows:
Address
00000000 - 0000000F
00000020 - 00000021
0000002E - 0000002F
00000040 - 00000043
0000004E - 0000004F
00000060 - 00000060
00000061 - 00000061
00000064 - 00000064
00000070 - 00000073
00000080 - 0000008F
000000A0 - 000000A1
000000C0 - 000000DF
000000E0 - 000000F0
000000F0 - 000000FF
00000274 - 00000277
00000279 - 00000279
000002E8 - 000002EF
000002F8 - 000002FF
000003B0 - 000003BB
000003B0 - 000003BA
000003C0 - 000003DF
000003C0 - 000003DE
000003E8 - 000003EF
000003F8 - 000003FF
000004D0 - 000004D1
00000540 - 0000055F
00000560 - 0000056F
00000600 - 0000061F
00000A79 - 00000A79
00000CA2 - 00000CA5
00000CF8 - 00000CFF
0000FE00 - 0000FE20
Chip in Use
DMA controller
Programmable interruption controller
Motherboard resource
System timer
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
System speaker
Motherboard resource
System CMOS/real-time clock
DMA controller
Programmable interruption controller
DMA controller
Motherboard resource
Numerical data processor
ISAPNP read data port
ISAPNP read data port
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
PCI standard PCI-to-PCI bridge
Graphics controller (NEC GA Driver)
PCI standard PCI-to-PCI bridge
Graphics controller (NEC GA Driver)
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
Motherboard resource
ISAPNP read data port
Motherboard resource
PCI configuration
Motherboard resource
N8800-090F, EXP320B
NEC Express5800/320Fa-L
N8800-091F, EXP320A
NEC Express5800/320Fa-LR
User's Guide
2nd Edition
9-2006
856-126408-101-01